User Manual

Maxsurf Stability 2024

MOSES Stability 2024
SACS Stability 2024
23 August 2024
License and Copyright
Stability Program & User Manual
Copyright © 2024 Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All rights reserved.

iii
Contents

Contents
License and Copyright .........................................................................................................................................................................................................iii
Contents ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... v
Differences between versions ............................................................................................................................................................................................1
Coordinate System ..................................................................................................................................................................................................1
Maxsurf Stability ........................................................................................................................................................................................1
MOSES Stability ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1
SACS Stability ..............................................................................................................................................................................................2
About this Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................2
Chapter 1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................................................................................3
Input Model ................................................................................................................................................................................................................3
Analysis Types ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................3
Analysis Settings .......................................................................................................................................................................................................4
Environment Options .............................................................................................................................................................................................4
Stability Criteria .........................................................................................................................................................................................................4
Output...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................5
Chapter 2 Quickstart..............................................................................................................................................................................................................7
Upright Hydrostatics Quickstart ........................................................................................................................................................................7
Large Angle Stability Quickstart.........................................................................................................................................................................8
Equilibrium Condition Quickstart ......................................................................................................................................................................9
Specified Condition Quickstart...........................................................................................................................................................................9
KN Values Quickstart ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Limiting KG Quickstart ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Floodable Length Quickstart ............................................................................................................................................................................ 12
Longitudinal Strength Quickstart ................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Tank Calibrations Quickstart ............................................................................................................................................................................ 13
MARPOL Oil Outflow Quickstart ..................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Cross-Flood MSC.362(92) Quickstart ............................................................................................................................................................ 14
Probabilistic Damage Quickstart .................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Chapter 3 Using Stability .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Installing Stability ................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Starting Stability...................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
Auto-saved backup recovery files ................................................................................................................................................... 16
Stability Model ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Preparing a Design in Modeler......................................................................................................................................................... 17
Opening a New Design ........................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Opening an Existing Stability Design File..................................................................................................................................... 28
Effect of Zero Point change ............................................................................................................................................................... 29
Updating the Stability Model ............................................................................................................................................................ 32
Stability Sections Forming .................................................................................................................................................................. 32
Checking the Stability model ............................................................................................................................................................ 35
Setting Initial Conditions ..................................................................................................................................................................... 39
Working with Loadcases ..................................................................................................................................................................... 43
Auto ballasting ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 56
Modelling Compartments .................................................................................................................................................................. 59
Tank sections ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 70
Forming Compartments ...................................................................................................................................................................... 70
Compartment Types.............................................................................................................................................................................. 78
Sounding Pipes ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Room display ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 80
Cross-Flood Device Connections ..................................................................................................................................................... 86
Damage Case Definition ...................................................................................................................................................................... 88
Cargo Dropout ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 93
Damage Analysis and Partial Flooding .......................................................................................................................................... 94
v
Contents

Partial Flooding – Modelling and Analysis .................................................................................................................................. 96

Key Points (e.g. Down Flooding Points) ..................................................................................................................................... 102
Margin Line Points .............................................................................................................................................................................. 107
Spilling Tanks ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 108
Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments ......................................................................................................... 116
Floodable Length Bulkheads .......................................................................................................................................................... 117
Stability Criteria .................................................................................................................................................................................... 117
SACS Cargo Import............................................................................................................................................................................. 117
Analysis Types ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 119
Upright Hydrostatics .......................................................................................................................................................................... 120
Large Angle Stability .......................................................................................................................................................................... 122
Water on Deck – Stockholm Agreementt ................................................................................................................................. 129
Equilibrium Analysis ........................................................................................................................................................................... 139
Specified Conditions .......................................................................................................................................................................... 142
KN Values Analysis .............................................................................................................................................................................. 143
Limiting KG ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Limiting KG for damage conditions with initially loaded tanks ....................................................................................... 150
Floodable Length................................................................................................................................................................................. 154
Longitudinal Strength........................................................................................................................................................................ 157
Tank Calibrations ................................................................................................................................................................................. 159
MARPOL Oil Outflow ......................................................................................................................................................................... 165
Cross-Flood MSC.362(92) ................................................................................................................................................................ 170
Probabilistic Damage ......................................................................................................................................................................... 174
Probabilistic damage Log file ......................................................................................................................................................... 220
Batch Analysis ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 223
Starting and Stopping Analyses .................................................................................................................................................... 226
Analysis Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 226
Heel ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 227
Trim ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 228
Draft .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 230
Displacement ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 230
Specified Conditions .......................................................................................................................................................................... 231
Permeability ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 231
Calibration .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 231
MARPOL .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 231
Cross-Flood ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 232
Tolerances .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 232
Analysis Environment Options...................................................................................................................................................................... 233
Fluids Analysis Methods ................................................................................................................................................................... 233
Density of Fluids .................................................................................................................................................................................. 236
Hog and Sag .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 237
Waveform ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 239
Grounding .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 240
Stability Criteria .................................................................................................................................................................................... 241
Damage ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 241
Analysis Output ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 241
Reporting ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 242
Copying & Printing ............................................................................................................................................................................. 247
Select View from Analysis Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 249
Storing and Restoring Results........................................................................................................................................................ 249
Saving the Stability Design.............................................................................................................................................................. 252
Exporting ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 253
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 257
Criteria Concepts ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 257
Criteria List Overview ......................................................................................................................................................................... 257
Types of criteria .................................................................................................................................................................................... 260
Criteria Procedures ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 261
Starting the Criteria dialog .............................................................................................................................................................. 261

vi
Contents

Resizing the Criteria dialog ............................................................................................................................................................. 262

Working with Criteria ......................................................................................................................................................................... 262
Editing Criteria ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 265
Working with Criteria Libraries ...................................................................................................................................................... 267
Criteria Results..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 269
Criteria Results Table ......................................................................................................................................................................... 269
User-customizable text in stability criteria ............................................................................................................................... 270
Report and Batch Processing ......................................................................................................................................................... 271
Nomenclature ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 271
Definitions of GZ curve features ................................................................................................................................................... 272
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 275
Chapter 5 Stability Reference ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 277
Windows ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 277
Assembly View and Property Sheet ............................................................................................................................................. 277
View Window ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 277
Loadcase Window ............................................................................................................................................................................... 279
Damage Window ................................................................................................................................................................................. 279
Input Window ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 280
Results Window.................................................................................................................................................................................... 281
Graph Window...................................................................................................................................................................................... 285
Report Window .................................................................................................................................................................................... 290
Toolbars ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 293
File Toolbar ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 293
Edit Toolbar............................................................................................................................................................................................ 293
View Toolbar.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 293
Analysis Toolbar ................................................................................................................................................................................... 294
Window Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................................. 294
Design Grid Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................................................... 294
Visibility Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................................. 294
Edge VIsibility Toolbar ...................................................................................................................................................................... 295
Render Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 295
Report Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 295
Results Toolbar ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 295
View (extended) Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................. 295
Display (extended) Toolbar ............................................................................................................................................................. 296
Extra Buttons Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................................................ 296
Menus ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 296
File Menu ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 296
Bentley Cloud Services Submenu ................................................................................................................................................. 306
Edit Menu ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 307
View Menu ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 309
Case Menu.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 311
Analysis Menu ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 311
Results Menu ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 314
Display Menu ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 315
Data Menu .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 321
Window Menu ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 321
Help Menu.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 323
Ribbon .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 324
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters ....................................................................................................................................................... 325
Definition and calculation of form parameters ..................................................................................................................................... 325
Measurement Reference Frames .................................................................................................................................................. 325
Nomenclature ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 327
Coefficient parameters ...................................................................................................................................................................... 327
Length ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 328
Beam ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 329
Draft .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 330
Midship and Max Area Sections ................................................................................................................................................... 332

vii
Contents

Block Coefficient .................................................................................................................................................................................. 332

Section Area Coefficient ................................................................................................................................................................... 333
Prismatic Coefficient .......................................................................................................................................................................... 333
Waterplane Area Coefficient .......................................................................................................................................................... 333
LCG and LCB .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 334
Trim angle............................................................................................................................................................................................... 334
Maximum deck inclination .............................................................................................................................................................. 335
Immersion............................................................................................................................................................................................... 335
MTc or MTi ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 335
RM at 1 deg ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 335
Potential for errors in hydrostatic calculations ...................................................................................................................................... 335
Integration of wetted surface area............................................................................................................................................... 336
Appendix B: Criteria file format................................................................................................................................................................................... 337
Appendix C: Criteria Help .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 339
Parent Calculations ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 339
Selecting a calculation in a criterion ........................................................................................................................................... 339
Angle calculators ................................................................................................................................................................................. 339
GM calculators ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 340
Parent Heeling Arms ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 343
Heeling Arm Definition ..................................................................................................................................................................... 344
Parent Heeling Moments ................................................................................................................................................................. 358
Parent Stability Criteria .................................................................................................................................................................................... 360
Criteria at Equilibrium ........................................................................................................................................................................ 360
GZ Curve Criteria (non-heeling arm) ........................................................................................................................................... 362
Heeling arm criteria (xRef) ............................................................................................................................................................... 379
Heeling arm criteria ............................................................................................................................................................................ 380
Multiple heeling arm criteria .......................................................................................................................................................... 399
Heeling arm, combined criteria ..................................................................................................................................................... 407
Derived heeling arm criteria ........................................................................................................................................................... 411
Other combined criteria ................................................................................................................................................................... 416
Specific stand alone heeling arm criteria .................................................................................................................................. 421
Stand alone heeling arm criteria ................................................................................................................................................... 421
Stand alone heeling arm combined criteria ............................................................................................................................. 422
Appendix D: Specific Criteria........................................................................................................................................................................................ 424
Dynamic stability criteria ................................................................................................................................................................................. 424
Capsizing moment .............................................................................................................................................................................. 424
Heeling arms for specific criteria - Note on unit conversion........................................................................................................... 426
IMO Code on Intact Stability A.749(18) amended to MSC.75(69) .................................................................................. 426
IMO HSC Code MSC.36(63)............................................................................................................................................................. 428
USL code (Australia) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 430
ISO 12217-1:2002(E) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 432
ISO 12217: Small craft – stability and buoyancy assessment and categorisation. ................................................... 433
ES TRIN 19.03 – Stability ................................................................................................................................................................................. 435
Article 19.03.1 – Intact ....................................................................................................................................................................... 435
Article 19.03.3.a – Maximum righting lever, angle and value ........................................................................................... 436
Article 19.03.3.b – Downflooding angle ..................................................................................................................................... 438
Article 19.03.3.c – GZ area ............................................................................................................................................................... 440
Article 19.03.3.d – Initial metacentric height ........................................................................................................................... 441
Article 19.03.3.e – Angle of equilibrium with heeling arms ............................................................................................... 441
Article 19.03.3.f – Residual freeboard ......................................................................................................................................... 441
Article 19.03.3.f – Residual freeboard ......................................................................................................................................... 442
Article 19.03.4 – Passenger crowding heeling moment ...................................................................................................... 442
Article 19.03.5 – Wind heeling moment .................................................................................................................................... 444
Article 19.03.6 – Turning heeling moment ............................................................................................................................... 445
Article 19.03.7 – Damage ................................................................................................................................................................. 447
Article 19.03.9.c – Intermediate damage Downflooding .................................................................................................... 448
Article 19.03.9.e – Lesser damage ................................................................................................................................................ 449
Article 19.03.10.a – Intermediate damage: Angle of equilibrium.................................................................................... 449

viii
Contents

Article 19.03.10.b – Intermediate damage: Maximum GZ .................................................................................................. 449

Article 19.03.10.c – Intermediate damage: Downflooding angle .................................................................................... 449
Article 19.03.11.a – Final damage: Angle of equilibrium under passenger crowding ............................................ 450
Article 19.03.11.b.i – Final damage: Maximum residual GZ above passenger crowding heeling arm ............ 451
Article [Link] – Final damage: Residual GZ area above passenger crowding heeling arm ...................... 451
Article 19.03.11.c – Final damage: Downflooding ................................................................................................................. 452
Appendix E: Reference Tables ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 452
File Extension Reference Table ..................................................................................................................................................................... 452
Analysis settings reference table ................................................................................................................................................................. 454
Appendix F: Quality Assurance.................................................................................................................................................................................... 455
Quality Assurance .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 455
Quality Principles ................................................................................................................................................................................. 455
Structured Programming ................................................................................................................................................................. 455
Verification of Algorithms ................................................................................................................................................................ 455
Testing of Implementation .............................................................................................................................................................. 458
Testing of Upgrades ........................................................................................................................................................................... 458
Beta Testing ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 458
Version Control .................................................................................................................................................................................... 458
But we're not Perfect ......................................................................................................................................................................... 458
Index ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 460

ix
About this Manual

Differences between versions

There are several different versions of Stability; here the differences between them are explained.

Coordinate System

All Modules: Body plan, view from behind (stbd side of vessel on right-hand side of screen)
All Modules with the exception of Stability:Plan view from bottom (stbd side of vessel on upper half of
screen); Stability has the Paln view from top (stbd side of vessel on lower half of screen)
All Modules:Profile view from stbd (bow on right-hand side of screen)

Maxsurf Stability

Longitudinal: +ve forward -ve aft

Transverse: +ve stbd -ve port
Vertical: +ve up -ve down

The zero-point can be defined at any location in the model

MOSES Stability

x-Axis (longitudinal): +ve aft -ve forward

y-Axis (horizontal): +ve stbd -ve port
z-Axis (vertical): +ve up -ve down

The zero-point should be defined to coincide with the furthest forward and the lowest part of the model.

MOSES Stability is for modeling only and has no analysis capability.

Page 1
About This Manual

SACS Stability

x-Axis (longitudinal): +ve aft -ve forward

y-Axis (horizontal): +ve stbd -ve port
z-Axis (vertical): +ve up -ve down

About this Manual

This manual describes how to use Stability to perform hydrostatic and stability analyses on your design.

Chapter 1 Introduction
Contains a description of Stability functionality and its interface to Modeler.

Chapter 2 Quickstart
Gives a quick walk through the analysis tools available in Stability.

Chapter 3 Using Stability

Explains how to use Stability' powerful floatation and hydrostatic analysis routines to best advantage.

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Gives details of the stability criteria that may be evaluated with Stability.

Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Gives details of the windows and commands in Stability.

If you are unfamiliar with Microsoft Windows® interface, please read the owner's manual supplied with your
computer. This will introduce you to commonly used terms and the basic techniques for using any computer
program.

Page 2
Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction
Stability is a hydrostatics, stability and longitudinal strength program specifically designed to work with
Modeler. Stability adds extra information to the Modeler surface model. This includes: compartments and
key points such as downflooding points and margin line.

Stability’s analysis tools enable a wide range of hydrostatic and stability characteristics to be determined for
your design. A number of environmental setting options and modifiers add further analysis capabilities to
Stability.

Stability is designed in a logical manner, which makes it easy to use. The following steps are followed when
performing an analysis:
• Input model
• Analysis type selection
• Analysis settings
• Environment options
• Criteria specification and selection
• Run analysis
• Output

Stability operates in the same graphical environment as Modeler; the model can be displayed using hull
contour lines, rendering or transparent rendering. This allows visual checking of compartments and shows
the orientation of the vessel during analysis.

Input Model

Modeler design files may be opened directly into Stability, eliminating the need for time-consuming
digitising of drawings or hand typing of offsets. This direct transfer preserves the three-dimensional accuracy
of the model.

Tanks can be defined and calibrated for capacity, centre of gravity and free surface moment. Tanks and
compartments can be flooded for the purpose of calculating the effects of damage.

A number of loadcases can be created. The loadcase allows static weights and tank-fillings to be specified
and calculates the corresponding weights and centres of gravity as well as the total weight and centre of
gravity of the vessel under the specified loading condition. Loadgroups may also be created and cross
referenced into loadcases.

Other input consists of: tank sounding pipes; key points, such as downflooding points, immersion and
embarkation points; margin lines and section modulus.

Analysis Types

Stability contains the following analysis tools:

• Upright hydrostatics
• Large angle stability
• Equilibrium analysis
• Specified Condition analysis
• KN values and cross curves of stability
Page 3
Chapter 1 Introduction

• Limiting KG analysis
• Floodable Length analysis
• Longitudinal Strength analysis
• Tank Calibrations
• MARPOL oil outflow
• Cross-Flood MSC.362(92), time for
• Probabilistic damage (Stability Ultimate only)

Although common analysis settings are used where possible, different analyses may require different
settings. For example: the upright hydrostatics analysis simply requires a range of drafts; whereas the
longitudinal strength analysis requires a detailed load distribution. The analysis settings for each analysis
type are explained in detail in the analysis synopsis below.

Analysis Settings

The analysis settings describe the condition of the vessel to be tested. For example, a range of drafts in the
case of upright hydrostatics, or a range of heel angles for a large angle stability analysis.

The following analysis settings are available:

• Heel
• Trim
• Draft
• Displacement
• Permeability
• Specified condition

The analysis settings are specified prior to running the analysis. Settings that are not relevant to the selected
analysis type are greyed out in the Analysis menu.

Environment Options

Environmental options are modifiers that may be applied to the model or its environment that will affect the
results of the all the hydrostatic analysis types.

Depending on the analysis being performed, different environmental options may be applied to the Stability:
• Type of Fluid Simulation
• Density (of fluids)
• Wave form
• Grounding
• Intact and Damage condition

Stability Criteria

Stability has the capability to calculate compliance with a wide range of stability criteria. These criteria are
either derived from the properties of the stability curve calculated from a Large Angle Stability analysis or
from the vessel’s orientation and stability properties calculated from an Equilibrium analysis. Limiting KG and
Floodable length analyses also use stability criteria.

Page 4
Chapter 1 Introduction

Stability has an extensive range of stability criteria to determine compliance with a wide range of
international stability regulations. In addition, Stability has a generic set of parent criteria from which virtually
any stability criterion can be customized.

Output

Views of the hull are shown for each stage of the analysis, complete with immersed sectional areas and
actual waterlines. The centres of flotation, gravity and buoyancy are also displayed. Heeled and trimmed
hullforms and water plane shapes may be printed.

Results are stored and may be reviewed at any time, either in tabular form, or as graphs of the various
parameters across the full range of calculation. All results are accumulated in the Report window (which can
be saved, copied and printed), or output directly to a Word document.

The criteria checks are summarised in tables listing the status (pass/fail) of each criterion as well as the
margin. The criterion settings and intermediate calculation data may also be displayed if required.

For a brief overview of the different analysis that Stability has available, continue reading Chapter 2
Quickstart.

Page 5
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Chapter 2 Quickstart
This chapter will briefly describe each analysis type and its output. For each analysis type, a list of the
required settings as well as the available environment options is given.

Stability contains the following analysis types

• Upright Hydrostatics
• Large Angle Stability
• Equilibrium Condition
• Specified Condition
• KN Values
• Limiting KG
• Floodable Length
• Longitudinal Strength
• Tank Calibrations
• MARPOL Oil Outflow
• Cross-Flood MSC.362(92), time for
• Probabilistic Damage

Each analysis has different settings that may be applied

• Heel
• Trim
• Draft
• Displacement
• Specified condition
• Permeability
• Loadcase
• Tank and compartment definition

Stability offers different environment options that may be applied to the analyses
• Fluid Densities
• Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG
• Wave form
• Grounding
• Damage

Stability offers an extensive range of stability criteria that are applicable to equilibrium, large angle stability,
limiting KG and Floodable length analysis.

The Analysis types section describes each of the analysis types, settings and environment options in more
detail.

Upright Hydrostatics Quickstart

For Upright Hydrostatics, heel is fixed at zero heel, trim is fixed at a user defined value and draft is varied in
fixed steps. Displacement and centre of buoyancy and other hydrostatic data are calculated during the
analysis.

Upright hydrostatics requirements

• Range of drafts to be analysed
Page 7
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• VCG (for calculation of some stability characteristics such as GMt and GMl only)
• Trim

Upright hydrostatic options

• Fluid Densities
• Wave form
• Damage
• Compartment definition (in case of damage)

The results are tabulated and graphs of the hydrostatic data, curves of form and sectional area at each draft
are available. Bonjean Curves are also calculated.

For more detailed information please see: Upright Hydrostatics on page 120.

Large Angle Stability Quickstart

For the analysis of Large Angle Stability, displacement and centre of gravity are specified in the loadcase. A
range of heel angles are specified and Stability calculates the righting lever and other hydrostatic data at
each of these heel angles by balancing the loadcase displacement against the hull buoyancy and, if the
model is free-to-trim, the centre of gravity against the centre of buoyancy such that the trimming moment is
zero.

Large angle stability requirements

• Range of heel angles to be analysed
• Trim (fixed or free)
• Loadcase or loadgroup
• Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of
damage)

Large angle stability options

• Fluid Densities
• Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG
• Wave form
• Damage
• Compartment definition (in case of damage)
• Key points
• Margin line and deck edge
• Analysis of stability criteria
• Water on Deck (WoD) – Stockholm Agreement

The key output value is GZ (or righting lever), the horizontal distance between the centres of gravity and
buoyancy. A graph of these values at the various heel angles forms a GZ curve. Various other information is
often overlaid on the GZ curve, including upright GM, curves for wind heeling and passenger crowding levers
and the angle of the first downflooding point. These additional data depend on which (if any) stability criteria
have been selected.

A number of other graphs may be selected from the pull-down list in the graph window. Remember that you
can access this data in tabular form by double clicking in the graph window:
• Dynamic stability curve (Area under GZ curve, integrated from upright)
• Variations of other hydrostatic and form parameters may be plotted against heel angle.
• Maximum safe steady heel angle

Page 8
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• The sectional area curve at each of the heel angles tested may also be displayed.
Note:

Some of these graphs have parameters that may be adjusted in the Data Format dialog
If large angle stability criteria have been selected for analysis, these results will also be reported in the criteria
results table and they may lead to additional curves being displayed on the GZ curve.

Downflooding angles for any key points, margin line and deck edge will also be computed and tabulated.
Furthermore the freeboard at each non-negative heel angle is tabulated. (For negative heel angles, calculate
the GZ curve heeling the vessel in the opposite direction.)

For more detailed information please see: Large Angle Stability on page 122.

Equilibrium Condition Quickstart

Equilibrium Analysis uses the Loadcase, to calculate the displacement and the location of the centre of
gravity. Stability iterates to find the draft, heel and trim that satisfy equilibrium and reports the equilibrium
hydrostatics and a cross sectional areas curve.

Equilibrium analysis requirements

• Loadcase or loadgroup
• Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of
damage)
• Compartment definition and damage case (in case of damage)

Equilibrium analysis options

• Fluid Densities
• Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG
• Wave form
• Grounding
• Damage
• Compartment definition (in case of damage)
• Key points
• Margin line and deck edge
• Analysis of equilibrium criteria

Equilibrium analysis result table lists the hydrostatic properties of the model. If a wave form has been
specified there will be a number of columns; each column contains the results for a different position of the
vessel in the wave as given by the wave phase value. The sectional area curve is also calculated, as is the
freeboard to any defined key points, margin line and deck edge. Any equilibrium criteria will also be
evaluated and their results reported.

For more detailed information please see: Equilibrium Analysis on page 139.

Specified Condition Quickstart

In the specified condition each of the three degrees of freedom, for which the hydrostatic properties of the
model are to be calculated, can be set.

Specified Condition Requirements

• Specified Conditions Input Dialog
Page 9
Chapter 3 Using Stability

If fixed trim is specified, you may enter the trim or specify the forward and aft drafts (these are at the
perpendiculars as specified in the Frame of Reference dialog).

Specified Conditions options

• Fluid Densities
• Wave form
• Damage
• Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage)

The output for the specified condition consists of a curve of cross sectional areas and hydrostatics of the
vessel in the specified condition.

For more detailed information please see Specified Conditions on page 142.

KN Values Quickstart

KN values or Cross Curves of Stability are useful for assessing the stability of a vessel if its VCG is unknown.
They may be calculated for a number of displacements before the height of the centre of gravity is known.
The KN data may then be used to obtain the GZ curve for any centre of gravity height (KG) using the
following formula:

GZ = KN - KG * sin(Heel)
where GZ is the righting lever measured transversely between the Centre of Buoyancy and the Centre of
Gravity, and KG is the distance from the baseline to the vessel's effective Vertical Centre of Gravity.

KN Values Analysis Requirements

• Range of displacements to be analysed
• Range of heel angles to be analysed
• Trim (fixed or free)
• Estimate of VCG (provides more accurate result if free-to-trim)
• TCG (if required)

KN Values Analysis Options

• Fluid Densities
• Wave form
• Damage

Page 10
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage)

Output is in the form of a table of KN values and a graph of Cross Curves of Stability. Furthermore the
immersion angles of the keypoints and margin line and deck edge are computed for each displacement.

If the analysis is performed free-to-trim and an estimate of the VCG is known, this may be specified. The
computed KN results will then give a more accurate estimate of GZ for KG close to the estimated VCG since
the effects of VCG on trim have been more accurately accounted for.

For more detailed information please see KN Values Analysis on page 143.

Limiting KG Quickstart

The Limiting KG analysis may be used to obtain the highest vertical position of the centre of gravity
(maximum KG) for which the selected stability criteria are just passed. This may be done for a range of vessel
displacements. At each of the specified displacements, Stability runs several Large Angle Stability analyses at
different KGs. The selected stability criteria are evaluated; the centre of gravity is increased until one of the
criteria fails.

Limiting KG Analysis Requirements

• Range of displacements to be analysed
• Range of heel angles to be analysed
• Trim (fixed or free)
• Stability criteria for which limiting KG is to be found
• TCG (if required)

Limiting KG Analysis Options

• Fluid Densities
• Wave form
• Damage
• Tank and Compartment definition (in case of damage)
• Laodcase (in case of initial loading of damaged tanks)
• Key points (if required for criteria)
• Margin line and deck edge (if required for criteria)

A graph of maximum permissible GZ plotted against vessel displacement is produced as well as tabulated
results indicating which stability criteria limited the VCG. If limiting curves are required for each of the
stability criteria individually, this may be done in the Batch Analysis mode.

A check will be made to ensure that any selected equilibrium criteria are passed, however at least one large
angle stability criterion is required. Only relevant criteria will be used, i.e. if a damage case is chosen, only
damage criteria will be evaluated; if the intact condition is used, only intact criteria will be evaluated. Some
criteria, such as angle of maximum GZ, are very insensitive to VCG and may prevent the analysis converging.
If the analysis is unable to converge for a certain displacement this will be recorded and the next
displacement tried.

For more detailed information see Limiting KG on page 147.

Page 11
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Floodable Length Quickstart

This analysis mode is used to compute the maximum compartment lengths based on user-specified
equilibrium criteria. Floodable Lengths may be computed for a range of displacements; the LCG may be
specified directly or calculated from a specified initial trim. In addition a range of permeabilities may be
specified. The VCG is also required to ensure accurate balance of the CG against the CB at high angles of
trim. As well as the standard deck edge and margin line immersion criteria (one of which must be specified)
the user can also add criteria for maximum trim angle and minimum required values of longitudinal and
transverse metacentric height.

Floodable Length Analysis Requirements

• Range of displacements to be analysed
• VCG
• Range of permeabilities to be analysed
• Trim (free- to- trim to either initial trim or specified LCG)
• Floodable length criteria to be tested

• Margin line and deck edge (required for criteria)

Floodable Length Analysis Options

• Fluid Densities
• Wave form

The output is in the form of tabulated Floodable Lengths for each displacement and permeability. The data is
tabulated for each of the stations as defined in Modeler. The data is also presented graphically.

For more detailed information please see Floodable Length on page 154.

Longitudinal Strength Quickstart

Stability calculates the net load from the buoyancy and weight distribution of the model. That data is then
used to calculate the bending moment and shear force on the vessel.

Longitudinal Strength Analysis Requirements

• Loadcase (including distributed loads if required)
• Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of
damage)

Longitudinal Strength Analysis Options

• Fluid Densities
Page 12
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation is always used for Longitudinal Strength analysis
• Wave form
• Grounding
• Damage
• Compartment definition and damage case (in case of damage)
• Allowable shear and bending moment

The longitudinal strength graph and tables contain all information on weight and buoyancy distribution, the
shear force and bending moment on the vessel. If defined, graphs of allowable shear and bending moment
are superimposed on the graph.

For more detailed information please see Longitudinal Strength on page 157.

Tank Calibrations Quickstart

Tanks can be defined and calibrated for capacity, centre of gravity and free surface moment (FSM). Fluid
densities and tank permeabilities can be varied arbitrarily. Tank calibrations may be calculated for a range of
trim and heel angles. Stability uses its fluid simulation mode to calculate the actual position of the fluids in
the tanks, taking into account the vessel trim and heel; i.e. the position of the fluid in the tank will be
computed so that the fluid surface is parallel with the external seawater surface. Tank ullages are measured
from the top of the sounding pipe to the free surface of the liquid within the tank along the sounding pipe
and in a similar manner, soundings are measured from the bottom of the sounding pipe to the free surface.

Tank calibrations may be performed for a range of heel and trims. The results for a single condition are
shown in the results table. The condition to be viewed may be selected from the Results toolbar; Tabulated
results may be customised using the Data Format dialog:

Tank calibration analysis requirements

• Tank definitions
• Sounding pipe definition (if required)
• Sounding intervals for calibration levels
• Trim range

Page 13
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Heel range

Tank calibration analysis options

• Fluid Densities
• Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation always selected
• Damage: Intact case always selected
• What to calibrate (Analysis | Calibration options)

For each tank, a table of capacities, volumes etc. is calculated. These results are presented in both tabular
and graphical forms.

For more detailed information please see Tank Calibrations on page 159.

MARPOL Oil Outflow Quickstart

MARPOL probabilistic oil outflow calculation may be computed according to the following MARPOL
regulations:
Resolution MEPC.141(54), Regulation 12A: Oil fuel tank protection
Resolution MEPC.117(52), Regulation 23: Accidental oil outflow performance

Seltect the Reolution and tanks to be included in the analysis in the MARPOL options (Analysis menu) dialog.
Then in the MARPOL results data table, edit any values as required; the resulting oil outflows will be
calculated automatically. The “Start Analysis” button will send the tabulated results to the Report.

For more detailed information please see MARPOL Oil Outflow on page 165

Cross-Flood MSC.362(92) Quickstart

The time for Cross-Flood according to IMO MSC.362(92) can be computed with this analysis.

Cross-Flood analysis requirements

• Loadcase or loadgroup
• Tank definition in the case of tank loads being included in the Loadcase (and/or for the definition of
damage)
• Compartment definition
• Cross-Flood connection definition
• Damage case (specifying damage condition before cross-flooding commences)

Cross-Flood analysis options

• Number of intermediate cross-flood conditions to compute
• Which cross-flood connections are considered active
• Fluid Densities
• Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG
• Wave form
• Grounding

Stability can only compute cross-flooding for single connections between pairs of rooms; multiple
connections between the same pair of rooms should not be activated.

Define the rooms (tanks or compartments) and the cross-flooding connections between pairs of cross-
flooding rooms. Define also the damge condition for the intial damage prior to cross-flooding. Finally specify
Page 14
Chapter 3 Using Stability

the time for any intermediate stages of cross-flooding that should be evaluated (Analysis | Cross Flood
dialog)

Run the analysis: Stability will then perform Equilibrium analyses for the intial and final cross-flooded
conditions; this provides the data required to calculate the time for complete cross-flooding according to
IMO MSC.362(92). Stability will then also try to find the conditions at each of the intermediate.

Probabilistic Damage Quickstart

Attained index using probabilistic damage analysis may be computed.

Probabilistic damage analysis requirements

• Loadcase definitions
• Tank and compartmentation definition
• Main probabilistic damage analysis parameters and criteria setup
• Subdivision definitions
• Heel angle range for GZ curve calculation
• Trim

Probabilistic damage analysis options

• Treatment of fluids in tanks: fluid simulation or corrected VCG
• Wave form
• Key points
• Margin line and deck edge

For more detailed information please see the Probabilistic Damage section on page 174.

Chapter 3 Using Stability

This chapter describes
• Getting Started
• Stability Model
• Analysis Types
• Analysis Settings
• Analysis Environment Options
• Analysis Output

Getting Started

This section contains everything you need to do to start using Stability

• Installing Stability
• Starting Stability

Installing Stability

Install Stability by inserting the CD and running the Setup program, then follow the instructions on screen.

Page 15
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Starting Stability

After installation, Stability should be accessible through the Start Menu. Simply select Stability from the
Maxsurf or MOSES group in the Bentley Engineering folder in the Start menu.

Windows Registry

Certain preferences used by Stability are stored in the Windows registry. It is possible for this data to become
corrupted, or you may simply want to revert back to the default configuration. To clear the Stability
preferences, start the program with the Shift key depressed. You will be asked if you wish to clear the
preferences, click OK, doing this will reset all the preferences.

The following preferences are stored in the registry:

• Color and line thickness settings of contours and background
• Fonts
• Window size and location
• Size of resizing dialogs (alternatively, these may be reset by holding down the shift key when activating
them)
• Density of fluids
• Heel angles for large angle stability, KN and Limiting KG analyses
• Permeabilities for floodable length analysis
• Location of files
• Units for data input and results output
• Convergence tolerance (Error values)
• Maximum number of loadcases
• Reporting preferences
• Cross-Flooding intermediate times

Note:

The default density for the fluid labelled "Sea Water" is stored in the windows registry. All
hydrostatic calculations use this. Check the density of seawater after resetting your preferences.

It is recommended to save your customized densities with your project using the File | Save
Densities As command.

Auto-saved backup recovery files

Recovery files are automatically saved. These files are typically:

Typical location of auto-saved backup files

They are time-stamped in the format yy-mm-dd_hh-mm-ss and located in the first folder from the folling list
which to which the user has write permission:
1. user’s temp folder (%TEMP%); typically C:\Users\[Link]\AppData\Local\Temp
Page 16
Chapter 3 Using Stability

2. the applicaton folder; typically C:\Program Files\Bentley\Offshore\Maxsurf CONNECT

Edition Vxx
3. the user’s Documents folder; typically C:\Users\[Link]\Documents
4. a folder selected by the user

The auto-save of backup files is implemented in Multiframe, Modeler and Stability. If the model has been
modified, this feature automatically saves the model after a specific time interval. You can adjust the auto-
save interval (in seconds) or turn the feature off completely. The default auto-save interval is 120s. If
necessary, these settings may be modified, through the Edit | Auto Backup Options… dialog as shown below:

Stability Model

This section describes how to open a model in Stability and provides some important information to ensure
that your model is correctly interpreted by Stability.
• Preparing a Design in Modeler
• Opening a New Design
• Opening an Existing Stability Design File
• Updating the Stability Model
• Stability Sections Forming
• Checking the Stability model

After checking the Stability model, the next step is to check the Stability settings and initial analysis
conditions.
• Setting Initial Conditions

Depending on the analysis performed, you may need to set up the following additional model data:
• Working with Loadcases
• Modelling Compartments
• Forming Compartments
• Compartment Types
• Physical Properties
• Damage Case Definition
• Sounding Pipes
• Key Points (e.g. Down Flooding Points)
• Margin Line Points
• Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments
• Stability Criteria

Preparing a Design in Modeler

There are several important checks that must be carried out in Modeler before opening a design in Stability:
• Setting the Zero Point

Page 17
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Setting the Frame of Reference

• Setting the Windage Surfaces
• Skin Thickness
• Outside Arrows
• Trimming
• Coherence of the Modeler surface model

Setting the Zero Point

Ensure that the zero point is correctly setup in Modeler. A consistent zero point and frame of reference
should be used for the model throughout the Bentley suite. In Stability you have the option of displaying
longitudinal measurements such as LCB or LCF from the model zero point or amidships.

Setting the Frame of Reference

It is vital that the Frame of Reference is correctly setup in Modeler before attempting to analyse the model in
Stability. The Frame of reference should not be changed in Stability. The frame of reference defines the fore
and aft perpendiculars, the baseline and the datum waterline; midships is automatically defined midway
between the perpendiculars. By convention, in the profile and plan views, the vessel’s bow is on the right.

The perpendiculars define the longitudinal positions of the vessel’s draft marks and cannot be coincident.
The base line is the datum from which the drafts and KG are measured.

The frame of reference cannot be changed in Stability. However it is possible to specify upto nine additional
locations at which the drafts should be reported. This is done through the Data | Draft Marks dialog.
Note: Draft and Trim specification

It should be remembered that the drafts specified for an analysis are the drafts at the
perpendiculars (or amidships) and the trim specified (and reported) is the difference between
the draft at the AP and draft at the FP.

Setting the Windage Surfaces

Windage areas and underwater projected areas definitions have been added to the vessel model. These data
may be defined and edited in both Modeler and Stability via the Windage Surfaces dialog in the Data menu.

Page 18
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Windage Surfaces dialog (Data menu)

If no Windage groups are defined, then the older system for the calculation of windage and lateral projected
underwater area is used. That is the hydrostatic sections are projected into the transverse plane. The outer
perimeter formed by joining the upper and lower limits of these projected sections is then used to calculate
both the windage area of the hull and the underwater projected area. The zero-trim waterline at the current
midship draft is used to determine which part of the projection is underwater and which part is windage
area. Because of these limitations, the effects of vessel trim and "holes" in the model are not accounted for
by this older method. The new method overcomes these limitations as well as adding new features.

Windage Groups

The concept of a Windage Group has been added. This groups together model surfaces which should be
treated as a single object. There are always at least two Windage Groups and the first one defines the
surfaces that should be used to calculate the underwater lateral projected area. Individual surfaces may be
included in multiple Windage Groups. Apart from the underwater group, Windage Groups have various
factors associated with them:
• F_drag: winage drag factor; default value 1.0
• F_shield: shielding factor; default value 0.0
• F_user: a user-defined factor; default value 1.0
• Ftotal = Fdrag .(1.0 − Fshield ).Fuser

Windage Groups may be added and deleted with the respective buttons in the dialog. The surfaces to be
included in each group are defined in selected by double clicking in the "Surfaces" cell in the table, in a
similar manner to the selection of boundary surfaces for Tanks and Compartments.

Page 19
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Windage Group definition and Surface selection

The color of the Windage Profile outline can be changed in the Colors dialog; the underwater profile is
shown using the "Immersed Sections" color.

Color selection

Page 20
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Wind direction

The Windage direction specifies the projection direction used for the surfaces: 90deg. gives a projection in
the lateral plane; 0deg. gives a direction in the longitudinal plane. Angles between 0 and 180deg are allowed
since the sign of the projection vector does not matter.

Note:

To improve performance, the projected windage contour uses a fairly coarse surface mesh. This
may result in the projected windage contour not exactly corresponding with the surface edges,
but the effect on projected area and center of area is negligible. Due to the calculation method
used for the projected conoturs, it is possible that some visual artifacts may be present but
again these have negligible effect on projected area and center of area.

Windage projections viewed in profile at 90deg (upper) and 70deg (lower)

Display

In Stability, when the vessel is at the DWL, the normal windage profile view is shown and the wind profile
groups may be modified. However once a Large Angle Stability analysis has been performed, it is possible to
select the windage profile used for any of the defined velocity profile wind heeling arms (see below for
deails).

Display | Windage Profile dialog

It is important to remember that the windage profile shown in the drawings and the windage area results
tabulated in the Large Angle Stability results table will correcpond to those of the selected wind heeling arm.
Thus is the wind heeling arm uses only the upright windage area, then the display will show the upright
windage area results also (even if the windage area was calculated for each heel angle).

In the example shown below, there are two wind heeling arms defined:

Page 21
Chapter 3 Using Stability

a) uses the “Actual heeled projected area”; and

b) uses the “Upright vessel projected area”.

WHA a) using “Actual heeled projected area”

WHA b) using “Upright projected area”

After calculating the GZ curve, the windage area profile and results will depend on which wind heeling arm is
selected for display.

So, if we choose to display the wind heeling arm that uses the actual heeled projected, it can be seen that
the tabulated reslts vary with heel angle and the actual projected windage profile at the selected heel angle
is drawn.

Page 22
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Displaying: WHA a) using “Actual heeled projected area” shows variation with heel angle
But if we choose to display the wind heeling arm that uses the upright windage area, then the at all heel
angles, the upright windage profie is drawn and the tabulated data are invariant with heel angle.

Displaying: WHA b) using “Upright projected area”; the windage profile is invariant with heel angle

Effect of heel

Stability has the option of using just the upright (zero heel) projected windage profile or calculating the
actual projection of the heeled vessel. The option is specified in Edit | Preferences dialog. It should be noted
that calculating the projected windage profile at each heel angle can add significantly to the time required to
complete the analysis. For criteria evaluation, the underwater lateral projected area and center of area for the
upright (zero heel) vessel is always used; however the wind heeling moment will use the actual inclined
(including heel) projected windage area if this option has been selected in the Preferences dialog.

Page 23
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Upright or heeled/inclined projected windage area calculation preference

Windage profile calclated for the upright vessel and used for all heel angles

Windage profile calclated using heeled/inclined projected windage area method

Page 24
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Surface Use

In Modeler you can choose between two types of surface use

Hull
Hull surfaces are used to define the watertight envelope of the hull.
Internal structure
Internal structure surfaces are used for all other surfaces (any surfaces which do not make
up the watertight envelope) and also surfaces which are to be used in Stability to define
the boundaries of tanks and compartments that have complex shapes.

The following table describes the difference between each surface use in Stability:

Included: Hull Shell Internal Structure

Hydrostatic sections

Selection of tank/compartment
boundaries
Skin thickness applied to the surface

Verify that all surfaces that are to be used as tank/compartment boundaries are defined as Internal Structure.
If a surface is defined as internal structure, it is not included as part of the hull shell by Stability, i.e. internal
surfaces will be ignored in the forming of hydrostatic sections.

Skin Thickness

If skin thickness is to be used in hydrostatic calculations, ensure that the thickness and projection direction
have been specified for the hull shell surfaces. Thickness can be specified differently for each hull surface,
resulting in more accurate hydrostatics. To activate skin thickness in Stability ensure that the “Include Skin
Thickness” option is selected when reading the file or calculating the hull sections.
Note:

Tank boundaries made from internal structures surfaces do not have skin thickness. To include
skin thickness, the internal structure surface should be placed to model the inside of the tank if
the tank wall has significant thickness.
Skin thickness for hull surfaces will be treated so that the hull sections go to the outside of the
plate whilst any tanks are trimmed to the inside of the plate.

Outside Arrows

The surfaces’ outside arrows define the orientation of the surfaces. Ensure that you have used the Outside
Arrows command from the Modeler Display menu to define which direction points outwards (towards the
seawater) for each surface. The surface direction may be flipped by clicking on the end of the arrow.

Trimming

Ensure that all surfaces are trimmed correctly. At any longitudinal position on the hull, you should have
completely closed transverse sections or sections with at most one opening (e.g. the deck).

Page 25
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Correct Section with no opening.

Correct section with one opening: this section will be closed across the top.

Also see:
Stability Sections Forming on page 32
Checking the Stability model on page 35

Coherence of the Modeler surface model

Stability will generally have no problem correctly interpreting your design as long as the following
requirements for the model are observed:
• Make sure that each surface touches its adjacent surfaces at its edge, preferably by bonding the edges
together
• Where surfaces intersect, trim away the excess regions of the surface; e.g. the part of the keel that is
inside the hull and the part of the hull that is inside the keel
• Do not have surfaces that cannot be closed in an unambiguous fashion, i.e. a maximum of one gap in a
transverse section through the hull.
• Remember that the inner portions of each intersecting contour will be trimmed off
• Check surface use; internal structure surfaces are ignored when forming the hull sections in Stability
Note:

For groups internal structure surfaces that will be used to define tank (or compartment
boundaries) the same requirements apply.
Also see:
Checking the Stability model on page 35.

Opening a New Design

File opening in Stability is window specific, i.e. Stability will automatically look for compartment definition
files when you are in a Compartment Definition window and a loadcase in a Loadcase window.

Page 26
Chapter 3 Using Stability

To open a design for analysis, ensure that the design view window is active, then select Open Design from
the File menu. Choose a Modeler design file (.msd).

The following dialog will appear:

Calculate new Sections

Choosing Calculate Sections will calculate the specified number of sections through the hull. These will then
be used for the Hydrostatics calculations.

The meaning of (ignore existing data, if any) is explained in Opening an Existing Stability Design File.

Include Plating Thickness

At this stage, any surface thickness specified in the Modeler Surface Properties dialog may be included.

Use Trimmed Surfaces

If the model has trimmed surfaces, the Use Trimmed Surfaces item should be ticked.

Stations

When calculating stations, you may select how many stations should be used. Reducing the number of
stations will speed up the analysis time but reduce the accuracy, conversely increasing the number of
stations will increase the analysis time but lead to higher accuracy results; the maximum number of stations
which may be used is 500.

The first option allows you to use the station grid created in Modeler. This is extremely useful for hulls that
have features such as keels or bow thrusters that need to be accurately modelled and may need a locally
denser station spacing to do so. It also allows designs with significant longitudinal discontinuities in their
sectional areas to have stations specified either side of the discontinuity, avoiding any errors inherent in the
integration of evenly spaced stations. For example, if it was known that a design had a significant
discontinuity in its sectional area curve at amidships, by specifying one station 1mm aft of amidships and
one station 1mm forward of amidships this discontinuity can be modelled very accurately.

Surface Precision

The Surface Precision options has two functions:

• Setting for calculating the hydrostatic sections
• Setting used to form new compartments or tanks.

Page 27
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The precision at which the design was saved in Modeler is included in the Modeler design file (.msd). Stability
recognises this precision setting and will and set the Surface Precision button accordingly.
Note:

Modeler surface trimming information may vary for different precisions. Therefore it is
recommended not to change the precision setting when opening the Modeler design file in
Stability.
The accuracy of the results depends much more on the number of sections than the accuracy at
which the sections are calculated. Reducing the precision of the sections can greatly improve
performance, usually at relatively small impact on the accuracy of the hydrostatics.

Opening an Existing Stability Design File

After saving the Modeler design file for the first time in Stability, a “Stability Design file” (.hmd) is created.
The Stability design file will consist of the hydrostatic sections and all input data such as loadcases,
compartment definition, key points, sounding pipes etc. Stability also allows saving of all input and output
files into individual files.

To open an existing design, there are two options:

• Double click on the .hmd file from any Windows explorer window
• Use the Stability Open command form the file menu and select the .msd file

An existing Stability design consists of a number of files with different file extensions.
When Stability opens a .msd file, it will look for a .hmd file with the same name as the .msd file. For example:
when opening [Link], the [Link] file is found. The Calculate Sections dialog now has the option to read
the sections from the file.

Page 28
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Ensure “Read existing data and sections” is selected and click OK.

Stability will now open the .hmd file. This contains hydrostatic sections information and all input information
from last time the .hmd file was saved, i.e. compartment definitions, loadcases, damage cases, key points etc.
Note:

1) When selecting “Read existing data and sections (do not update geometry)” the surface
information is not recalculated. This means that changes to the hull shape in the Modeler
Design file, are not automatically incorporated. You will load your existing sections, loadcases
and compartment definitions etc. See: Updating the Stability Model on page 32 for more
information.
2) Calculate new sections (ignore existing data, if any) means that Stability will recalculate the
hull sections and ignore any data stored in the .hmd file. You will have to reload your individual
loadcases and compartment definition files etc after you have selected this option and pressed
OK. Do not choose this option if you wish to keep the additional Stability data and you have not
yet saved them as individual files as if the model is saved in Stability the .hmd file will be
overwritten and any existing data lost. For more information on file properties and extensions in
Stability, please see: File Extension Reference Table on page 452.

Effect of Zero Point change

The description below relates to what happens in the following situation:

• A hull model is generated in Modeler
• Tank and load etc. data is then created in Stability and that data all saved in the .hmd file (as is done
when you chose Save when the drawing window is top most).
• The model is closed in Stability
• The model is opened in Modeler and for some reason the location of the zero point is changed
• The model is reopened in Stability and the tank and load etc. data is automatically read from the .hmd
file.

Stability 13 behaviour

It may sometimes occur that the model zero point location is changed in Modeler after tank, loadcase. Etc.
data is defined in Stability. In previous versions of Stability this could cause problems because the loadcase
and tank data maintained their position relative to the zero point, where as the key points and margin line
remained in the same position relative to the hull.

The two images from Stability 13 show this problem. The first image shows the model as initially defined in
Stability with the zero point amidships and at the baseline. In the second image, the zero point has been
moved (in Modeler) to the aft-perpendicular and the DWL. Note that whilst the margin line and key points

Page 29
Chapter 3 Using Stability

have remained in their same locations relative to the hull, the tanks and centre of gravity (from the loadcase)
have remained in their same locations relative to the zero point.

Original location of data as entered in Stability before zero point change in Modeler.

Effect of Zero point change in Modeler 13.

Stability 14 behaviour

To rectify this problem, when loading a .hmd file, Stability now detects if the zero point has been modified in
Modeler when the model is reopened in Stability. Note that this is only possible with Stability models that
have been saved from the new version of Stability (because the new version of Stability now saves the zero
point independently so that it can check for changes).

Page 30
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Original location of data as entered in Stability before zero point change in Modeler.

Now, if the zero point has changed, Stability will display the following message:

If the zero point is moved in Modeler, you will now be prompted.

Selecting “yes” will maintain the position all the Stability data relative to the hull; essentially just the zero
point it moved. This of course means that the numerical values of the various data are changed:

Click “yes” to maintain position of tanks, loads etc relative to the hull.
Selecting “no” will move all data other than the margin line with the zero point. Thus the tanks and loads etc.
will move relative to the hull, but their numerical values will remain the same: The example shown is quite
extreme, it is more likely that this option would be selected if it was realised that the zero point for the tank
plan were slightly different than the zero point of the lines plan and a small correction to the zero point was
required.

Page 31
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Click “no” to maintain position relative to zero point.

Updating the Stability Model

To update the hydrostatic sections to the latest Modeler Design File, select “Recalculate Hull sections” in the
analysis menu after reloading the Modeler Design File with the “read existing data and sections from file”
option selected. This function can also be used to include/exclude surface thickness or change the number of
sections and to change use/not use trimmed surfaces without reloading the Modeler Design File.

The “Recalculate Hull Sections” command recalculates Hull surfaces as well as Tank Boundary surfaces
(Internal Structure surfaces in Modeler). Any tanks and loadcases will also be updated with this command.
Note:

Changes to the design are only recalculated after the new design has been re-loaded into
Stability. This means that if the model is simultaneously being edited in Modeler and Stability, it
is necessary to:
1) save and close the model in Stability
2) save in Modeler
3) open in Stability, using “Read existing data and sections” to make sure the loadcase,
compartment definition etc remain part of the Stability design file.
4) use the “Recalculate Hull Sections” from the analysis menu.

Stability Sections Forming

Stability works by applying trapezoidal integration to data calculated from a series of cross sections taken
through the model surfaces. Stability will automatically form these sections, called “Stability sections”,
“hydrostatic sections” or just “sections”. Stability deals only with sections that are completely closed, or can
be unambiguously closed. This section outlines the section forming process used in Stability and may be
helpful when preparing a design for Stability. Whilst it is always preferable to give Stability a completely
closed model with no ambiguities, Stability will try to resolve any problems with the model definition in the
manner outlined in the following sections.
Note:

The golden rule is that for any longitudinal position, the section must be made up of closed,
non-intersecting (and non-self-intersecting) contours. In practice, one opening is acceptable
and this will be automatically closed with a straight line.

Page 32
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Furthermore, contours cannot be contained wholly within another contour.

The same is true for groups of internal surfaces that have been selected to define a tank
boundary.

Where a section consists of an open shell (e.g. a hull surface with no deck), Stability will automatically close
the section with a straight line connecting the opening ends.

Section forming process in Stability

If, however, the section is made up of two line segments, (e.g. having both a gap at the centreline as well as
an open deck), an ambiguity exists as to how the two line segments will be connected. This is not an
acceptable shape.

Insufficient data for Stability to interpret the section

Page 33
Chapter 3 Using Stability

In the example above, if either the top or bottom gap had been closed in Modeler the design would cease to
be ambiguous.

Multiple surfaces that are trimmed correctly, bonded together or use compacted control points will not
cause any problems when opened in Stability. Stability will form a closed section through multiple surfaces
by linking the curve segments together.

Stability closes the outside contour and trims remnants

A section through a multihull containing a single closed contour

A section comprising two closed contours

Stability will link curve segments together if they are only separated by a small amount. The
user cannot change these tolerances, because there are too many dependencies in the
program.

Page 34
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Where surfaces intersect, Stability will make an attempt to remove excess portions of the curve
to form a single continuous contour. However this is not always possible so it is much better
practice to trim the model correctly manually.

Ambiguous Sections (e.g. decks, bulwarks)

A common example of ambiguous sections is a model with multiple decks. Stability will have difficulties
distinguishing the intended main deck.

Avoid using "Hull" surfaces for intermediate decks

The example above has bulwarks; generally these will be treated correctly by Stability and
removed, but this depends on the height of the bulwark relative to the rest of the section. To
prevent ambiguities it is recommended to trim the bulwark in Modeler. If the bulwark’s volume
is expected to influence the hydrostatic calculations, the bulwark’s volume has to be properly
modelled in Modeler by modelling both the outside and the inside of the bulwark.

Checking the Stability model

Before starting any analysis you should check whether Stability has been able to correctly interpret your
design. The following tools are available to validate the Stability model.
• Show Single Hull Section
• Checking the Sectional Area Curve
• Using Rendering to Check the Model
Note:

Sections that are not formed correctly cause the majority of problems with Stability models.
Therefore, checking your sections after opening the design in Stability is strongly
recommended. Incorrect sections in the model will give incorrect results.

These sections should be continuous with no gaps and no unexpected lines. In particular, look
closely at intersections between surfaces to make sure that Stability has interpreted the shape
correctly.

Page 35
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Show Single Hull Section

In the body plan view, you can step through the sections one-by-one to verify that they have been correctly
calculated. This is done by selecting Show Single Hull Section in Body Plan view from the Display menu. You
can then click in the inset box to view the sections, the left and right arrow cursor keys will enable you to
step through the sections one-by-one. This works the same as the Modeler body plan window and is an
extremely powerful tool to validate your Stability model. For more information see the Modeler manual.

Checking the Sectional Area Curve

Another way of checking the Stability model is to perform a specified condition analysis at quite deep draft
and look carefully at the sectional area curve in the graph window. If this displays any unexpected spikes or
hollows Stability may not have correctly interpreted the hull shape. This is not a foolproof method since it
does not necessarily highlight problems in the non-immersed part of the hull.

Page 36
Chapter 3 Using Stability

This Cross Sectional Area curve indicates there may be a problem with section forming from 12 m to 16 m.

Using Rendering to Check the Model

The model may also be rendered, which makes it easier to see if there are any areas of the model which have
not been properly defined. Select Render from the Display menu whilst in the perspective view and turn on
the sections:

Note:

In rare instances incorrect rendering may occur. This does not necessarily mean that the model
is incorrect. As long as the sections are formed correctly, the model is correct.

Further detailed checking of hull and tank/compartment sections

When checking that your model is correct, you are interested in whether the sections are correct. To do this
go to the body plan view in Stability and select “Show Single Section”:

Page 37
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Then to check that the tanks are OK, leave the view as it is, but turn on the visibility of all the tanks of interest
(if there are few tanks, then you can show all of them, if there are many it may help to hide some and check a
few at a time).

In the single section view, only tank sections near the current hull section are shown:

Page 38
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Setting Initial Conditions

All Stability calculations are performed in the frame of reference of the model. Stability uses the aft
perpendicular and forward perpendicular together with the baseline and the zero point for all calculations
and gives the results in the units specified in the display menu.
Note:

Before you run any analysis using Stability, it is important that you set up the required initial
conditions for the design.

Coordinate System

Please refer to the section at the start of this manual explaining the differences between the different
versions of Stability for information relating to the coordinate system used in Stability.

Frame of Reference and Zero Point

It is essential that a frame of reference be specified. This should be done in Modeler and not in Stability.
Draft and trim are measured on the forward and aft perpendiculars. If these are not in the correct positions,
some analysis results will be meaningless or may even fail to complete.

See: Setting the Zero Point and Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18.

Page 39
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note:

Changing the zero point in Modeler will not update the compartment definition, loadcase and
other input values. Changing the zero point after you have started analysing the model in
Stability is not recommended.

Draft Marks

Drafts are automatically calculated at the perpendiculars and amidships, should you require drafts to be
calculated at other locations, you may specify upto nine additional locations at which the drafts should be
reported. This is done through the Data | Draft Marks dialog. Drafts are always measured to the Baseline in
the centre plane of the vessel. Immersed depth measurements are made perpendicualar to the free-surface.

Difference between “Immersed depth” and “Draft” measurements

User-defined Draft Marks

Note:

The Trim is still defined as the difference between the drafts at the perpendiculars and the
Midship draft (used to define the range of immersions for the Upright Hydrostatics analysis) is
the mean of the drafts at the perpendiculars; i.e. neither of these values has changed and
neither are affected by the user-defined draft locations. Drafts can only be defined when the
vessel is rotated to the DWL (Display | Set vessel to DWL).

Page 40
Chapter 3 Using Stability

User-defined draft locations and new toolbar button

The draft marks allow a user-defined datum to be specified. As with normal drafts measured to the Baseline,
these drafts are also measured perpendicular to the Baseline (i.e. perpendicular to the DWL of the vessel at
zero trim). (Noting that immersed depths to underside of keel –USK- are measured perpendicular to the
actual (trimmed, heeled) waterplane.

Custom Draft Marks extended to provide user-defined datum

Different types of user-defined draft measurements

Note: Draft and Trim specification

It should be remembered that the drafts specified for an analysis are the drafts at the
perpendiculars (or amidships) and the trim specified (and reported) is the difference between
the draft at the AP and draft at the FP.

Page 41
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Customising Coefficients

In Stability you may choose between the length between perpendiculars and the waterline
length for the calculation of Block, Prismatic and Waterplane Area Coefficients. You may also
select the draft, beam and sectional area to be used for calculation of these coefficients.

The LCB and LCF can be displayed in the Results windows relative to the specified Zero Point,
Amidships location, Aft Perpendicular, Fwd Perpendicular or from the Aft, Middle or fwd end of
the actual waterline. You can also specify whether you want the forward (towards the bow) or
the aft (towards the stern) to have a positive sign. Finally you can chose whether you want the
LCB and LCF to be displayed as a length or as a percentage of the waterline or LPP length as
specified in the Length for Coefficients.

Data | Coefficients dialog

Page 42
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Setting Units

The units used may be specified using the Units command. In addition to the length and weight
(mass) units, units for force and speed (used in wind heeling and heeling due to high-speed
turn etc. criteria) and the angular units to be used for areas under GZ curves, may also be set.
The angular units for measuring heel and trim angles are always degrees. Units may be changed
at any time.

Other Initial Conditions

See:
Fluids Analysis Methods on page 233
Density on page 236

Working with Loadcases

Loadcases define the loading condition of the vessel. Static weights that make up the vessel lightship are
specified here as well as tank filling levels, expressed as either a percentage of the full tank capacity or as a
weight.

Loadcases automatically contain all the tanks defined in the Tank definition. Loadgroups are special
loadcases that contain no tanks. These may be used to define groups of fixed weights (such as the steel
weight or lightship weight) in a single location which may then be cross-referenced into a loadcase. Any
changes to the loadgroup are then automatically incorporated into any loadcases that reference them.

A loadgroup is included in a loadcase simply by specifying the loadgroup name in the “Item Name” column.

The loadcase will normally update the column totals automatically as weights or tank loadings are changed.
The exception to this is if tanks have not yet been formed or the vessel is still rotated from the result of an

Page 43
Chapter 3 Using Stability

analysis. If the loadcase does not update, click on the update Loadcase button and ensure that the hull is at
the DWL by selecting “Set vessel to DWL”:

The individual loads can be displayed graphically:

Creating a new Loadcase File

To create a load case, switch to the loadcase view by selecting Loadcase from the Loadcase sub-menu in the
Window menu. Then select “New Load Case” from the File menu or press Ctrl+N. A new load spreadsheet
will be displayed in the Loadcase window. The default loadcase will contain a lightship entry and an entry for
each tank (with a default filling of 50%).

Page 44
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The tabs in the bottom of the window can be used to skip through the different loadcases in the design.

Create New Loadcases based on Template

To avoid rework, an existing loadcase may be used as a template when creating a new loadcase. To do this,
• In the loadcase window, select the Loadcase you wish to use as a template

Bring the loadcase you wish to use as a template to the front

for example by clicking on the tab on the bottom
• select File | New

Page 45
Chapter 3 Using Stability

First, you will be asked for a new Loadcase name after which the following dialog appears:

A new loadcase will appear in one of the blank (…) loadcase tabs. If there are no blank tabs left, you will
either have to close an existing loadcase, or add more loadcases using the Case | Max. Number of Loadcases
command.
Note:

The template is only used during the creation of the loadcase. Once a loadcase has been
created from a template loadcase, changes made in the template are NOT automatically
changed in the loadcase derived from it.

Naming and Saving a Loadcase

A loadcase can be given any name by saving it to a separate file where the loadcase filename will be used as
the loadcase name and displayed on the tab in the loadcase window. Alternatively,
• Select Edit Loadcase from the Case menu

• Changing the name in the Loadcase Properties dialog.

The next time you use the File | Save Loadcase command you will be asked to confirm the loadcase file
name.

Loading a Saved Loadcase

You can load a saved loadcase into your loadcase window by:
• Select an empty tab in the loadcase window that you wish to load the loadcase into

Empty tab.
If there are no empty tabs, you should either increase the maximum number of loadcases (see below), or
close an existing loadcase.

Page 46
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Select File | Open Load Case

• Select the .hml file you wish to open.

Setting the Maximum Number of Loadcases

The maximum number of loadcases (up to twenty-five) that can be loaded in Stability at any one time is set
by selecting “Max. Number of Loadcases” from the Case menu. You may then enter the maximum number of
load cases you require.

You must restart Stability for this change to take effect. In most cases, you will only need to set this once to
the maximum number of loadcases you are ever likely to use. For convenience of use, a sensible number is
recommended.

Each loadcase can be selected and used for analysis. Each may be saved and loaded independently,
effectively allowing you as many loadcases as you require.
Note:

When loading a design that has more loadcases than the maximum you have currently set in
Stability, you will receive a warning and the file will not be loaded. You must increase the
maximum number of allowable loadcases and restart Stability before you can load the design.

Closing a Loadcase

• Select the tab of the loadcase you wish to close in the Loadcase window
• Select File | Close Load Case

Adding and Deleting Loads

To add an extra load to the loadcase,

• Select Add Load from the Edit menu or press Ctrl+A.
A new load will be inserted into the table above the currently selected row. You can repeat this process for as
many loads as you wish.

If you want to remove a load from the table, simply click anywhere in the row you want to remove, and
choose Delete Load from the Edit menu (or highlight the complete row by clicking the grey cell to the left of
the row and press the Delete key). If you wish to delete several loads simultaneously, click and drag so that
all of the loading rows that you wish to delete are selected, then select Delete Load.

Editing Loads

Click on the cell containing the load name and type in a name for this load, for example "Lightship", and
press the Tab key to go to the next column in the table (or simply click directly in the cell you wish to edit).

For each item in the list you can specify a quantity. This is used to calculate the total weight of that item. For
example: if the item was “crew” with a weight per unit, you could specify the quantity and unit weight, and
Page 47
Chapter 3 Using Stability

the total weight of crew would be automatically calculated. The weight of each item should be entered in the
next column.

The weight must always be positive. If for some reason you wish to have an upward (negative) load, you can
do so by entering a negative quantity – this can be useful if you want to apply a pure moment to the model
by applying equal magnitude, but opposite sign loads to the vessel in the loadcase.

Tab to the next column and enter the horizontal lever for the item. After you type in this number, press enter
and the total LCG will be automatically re-calculated and displayed in the bottom row of the table. The CG
position will also be shown and updated in the View windows if Large Angle Stability, Longitudinal Strength
or Equilibrium analysis are selected.
Note:

Levers, as with all other measurements in Stability, are measured from the Zero Point.

Loadcase Sorting

A number of tools are available for controlling the order in which items and tanks occur in the loadcase. You
may move selected items and tanks up and down in the loadcase; you may also sort selected items by name,
fluid type (for tanks) etc.

Insert row | Delete row | Sort rows | Move row(s) up | Move row(s) down

Sort selected columns

After moving loads, subtotals and subsubtotals, you may have to use Analysis | Update Loadcase ( button)
to update the subtotals and subsubtotals. To ensure data consistency, Stability does this automatically prior
to running an analysis.

Loadcase Formatting

Stability allows you to improve the presentation of the Load Case window by adding blank, heading or sub-
total lines in the table.
Adding Component or Heading Lines
Components or headings can be included in a load case by preceding the text with a
period (.) character.

Page 48
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Adding Blank Lines

A blank line can be added into the load case by placing a dollar ($), apostrophe (‘) or full-
stop(.) character in the Item Name field.
Adding Totals or Subtotals
A subtotal can be displayed for several loads within a load case. To do this the item name
field must commence with the word ‘total’ or ‘subtotal’.
Sub-subtotals
Sub-sub-totals may also be inserted. Sub-subtotals must start with the text “subsubtotal”.

Grouping Similar Tanks

Use the move items UP or Down commands in the Edit menu to adjust the row order in
the loadcase.

Quantity and Unit mass for sub total rows

If a sub total includes only tanks, then the quantity and unit mass items will be included. The unit mass is the
sum of all the masses of the full tanks and the quantity is the sum of the masses divided by the sum of the
full tank masses. When tanks are grouped by fluid type this can be useful for calculating the total tank
capacity for that fluid type.

Loadcase Color Formatting

Different colors can be defined for fixed mass items and tanks; alternatively, tanks may be displayed in the
same color as the fluid they contain (As defined in Analysis | Fluids dialog).
• View | Colors and lines menu when Loadcase window is frontmost

Page 49
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Loadcase format

It is possible to select which columns are displayed in the loadcase window. Use the Display | Data Format
dialog:

The Relative density and Fluid Type which allow you to override the default tank densities as defined for each
tank in the Compartment Definition window. This can be useful for vessels such as product carriers which
may have cargos of different types of fluids with different densities.

Moment columns (mass * lever) can be displayed if desired.

Longitudinally Distributed Loads

Distributed loads can be entered in the Loadcase window in the aft limit and forward limit cells. The aft limit
and forward limit columns only appear when Longitudinal Strength analysis is selected and the distributed
loads will only have an effect on the results in this analysis mode. The “Long. Arm” column defines the
longitudinal position of the centre of the load; the fore and aft limits define the longitudinal extents of the
load.

If the longitudinal arm is changed in the Loadcase window, the forward and aft limits will be moved by the
same amount.

For an evenly distributed load, the centre of gravity should be midway between the forward and aft limits.

Page 50
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Evenly distributed loads. Red = green and divided in the centre.

For trapezium shaped distributed loads the centre of gravity is not midway between the boundaries, but
within the middle third 1/3 of the centre.

Trapezium shaped distributed load. Red = Green divided within middle 1/3 of centre.
Note:

Since the load is distributed as a trapezium, the centre of gravity should lie within the middle
third between the forward and aft limits of the load, at these extrema, the load distribution
becomes triangular.

Tanks will be automatically treated as distributed loads for the longitudinal strength
calculations.

Page 51
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Tank Loads

When you create tanks using the compartment definition, they will be automatically included in the
loadcases (but not in Loadgroups which do not contain tanks).

Tanks have a quantity value, expressed as a percentage of the full capacity and a weight column. Tank level
can be given as either a percentage of full capacity, volume, a sounding or a weight.

The tank Unit Mass is the tanks mass at 100% filling.

When a tank is changed in the Compartment definition table, question marks may be shown in the loadcase
momentarily while the tank’s new volumetric properties are being calculated. To update the loadcase for
changes in tank loads, select Update Loadcase from the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Updating tank values in the loadcase

Irrespective of whether you have updated the values in the Loadcase Condition, the Loadcase will be
automatically updated as the first step of any analysis using the Loadcase information.

Also see:
Update Loadcase on page 313

Loadcase cross-referencing; Loadgroups

It is possible to cross-reference one loadcase from another. This is useful if you wish to define a detailed
lightship mass distribution but do not want to have it displayed in full in each loadcase. It also means that
this lightship mass distribution would only need to be defined and edited in one location instead of in each
loadcase.

To prevent the problems of recursively including the same loadcase and also prevent tanks from being
included more than once, we have defined the following rules:
• A special type of Loadcase called a Loadgroup has been defined.
• A Loadgroup does not contain tanks
• Only a Loadgroup can be referenced
• Only a Loadcase can reference a Loadgroup.
• A Loadcase can reference any number of Loadgroups
• A Loadgroup is referenced in a Loadcase by typing the name of the Loadgroup to be referenced in the
Item column
• You can factor the referenced Loadgroup by changing the value of the Quantity column in the Loadcase.
• Loadgroups may be analysed in the same way as Loadcases – but remember the tanks are implicitly
empty in a Loadgroup.

For the example above this means that the lightship mass distribution would be defined as a Loadgroup and
then this Loadgroup could be referenced in any number of loadcases.
The Loadcase properties dialog (Case menu) is used to define a loadcase as a Loadgroup:

Page 52
Chapter 3 Using Stability

This lightship Loadgroup contains the lightship mass distribution along the ship. The Lightship load group
can then be cross-referenced into any loadcase

Page 53
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The referenced Loadgroup is automatically calculated and the appropriate values included in the Loadcase:

Note: Loadgroup naming

The cross-referencing of loadgroups in a loadcase is case insensitive.

Loadcase density override

It is now possible to override the default tank fluid densities as defined in the Compartment definition
window. This allows you to load the same tanks with different fluids in different Loadcases – as might be the
case for a product carrier, for instance.

By default use tank defined densities:

Page 54
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Type in a valid (>0.0) specific gravity and it will override the tank value:

Type in any string that doesn’t begin with an “L” for the fluid and it will revert back to the tank value:

Type in some thing that begins with an “L” and it will revert back to the “Private” density of the loadcase
item.

Free surface correction

If the corrected VCG fluid option has been chosen, the Loadcase will sum the free surface moments, divide
by the total displacement to obtain the VCG correction and adjust the VCG accordingly to obtain the
corrected fluid VCG.

Page 55
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Fluid simulation

If the Fluid simulation option is selected in the analysis menu, no correction is made to the
upright VCG. Instead, at every step of the analysis, Stability calculates the actual position of the
fluid in the tanks taking into account heel and trim, making the tanks’ free-surface parallel to
the sea surface, thus the actual vessel CG is recalculated accounting exactly for the static shift of
the fluids in slack tanks.
When the corrected VCG method is selected in the analysis menu, it is possible to choose the type of free
surface moment to be applied for each tank in a Stability Loadcase. The options available are
Maximum
Stability will use the maximum free surface moment of the tank in upright condition for
all fluid levels.
Actual
Stability uses the free surface moment for the current fluid level of the tank in upright
condition.
IMO
Stability uses IMO MSC75.(69) Ch 3.3 for the calculation of the free surface moment. This
method approximates the movement of fluid due to heeling and is based on the fluid
shift in a 50% full rectangular, box-shaped-tank. For other shapes and fillings of tanks it
will not correctly approximate the free surface moment.
User specified
A user specified value is used for all levels and heel angles.

Workshop structure

Workshop can save a Loadgroup that contains the masses of all the structural parts. This can be loaded into
Stability and referenced in any Loadcase.

Auto ballasting

Auto ballasting is a tool which facilitates adjusting a Loadcase to give a desired vessel draught, trim and heel.
This command allows users to select up to eight tanks who’s fluid levels will be varied automatically to obtain
a loadcase which approximately matches the vessel hydrostatics at the specified draught, trim and heel.

First ensure that the loadcase window is at the front and then that the “Auto ballast” column is visible in the
loadcase (Display | Data format dialog):

Page 56
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Ensure “Ballasting” column is visible for automatically ballasting the Loadcase

Now, in the Loadcase, select the tanks that may have their filling levels varied. Do this by typing “auto” in the
“Ballasting” column (auto complete is used, so just “A” is sufficient). You may select at most 8 tanks to be
varied, but in practice, it is best to manually adjust as many tanks as possible and then use the automatic
ballasting to set just the last few tanks to the required level. This is because there are multiple combinations
of filling levels which will give the desired vessel attitude; however in the automatic ballasting, no attempt is
made to lower the centre of gravity or minimise the bending moment is made – simply the best solution that
the software can find is given.

Select those tanks whose levels can be automatically adjusted.

Finally in the Case | Auto Ballast dialog you can specify the draught, trim and heel required for the vessel.
Note that the untrimmed LCG and LCB are matched which means that if trim has been specified, there will be
difference between the equilibrium vessel condition and the specified trim due to the vertical separation of
CG and CB.

Page 57
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Specification of the vessel condition to be matched by the Auto Ballast command

When completed, an additional row will be shown at the bottom of the loadcase, this shows the target
displacement and CB of the vessel at the condition specified in the Auto Ballast dialog.

Target displacement and CG is displayed when the Auto Ballast command is used
Note:

If the desired draught cannot be obtained with the selected tanks completely full or completely
empty or there are no tanks selected for Auto Ballasting, you will receive an appropriate
warning. In some cases, a solution may not be found, try changing the Auto Ballast tanks and
recomputing. When a solution has been found, a dialog is displayed which confirms the
required and actual displacement, LCG and TCG; the error tolerances are based on those
defined in the Edit | Preferences dialog.

Confirmation of Auto-Ballasting results

If there are errors, these will be highlighted in red in the loadcase “Target disp.” row:

Page 58
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Warning when Auto-Ballasting cannot achieve required values

Modelling Compartments

This section will describe in detail how to model different types of tanks and compartments.

Besides a general explanation on how to model tanks using the compartment definition table, this section
contains a number of important sections that the user should be aware off when modelling tanks:
• Number of Sections in Tanks on page 76
• Tank and Compartment Permeability on page 67

Creating a Compartment definition file (.htk)

• Select the Compartment Definition table by clicking on the Compartment Definition tab at
the bottom of the Input window.
• Select New Compartment Definition from the File menu
This will give you a new set of compartment definitions with one default tank.

Adding and Deleting Compartments

Before you can start adding compartments, make sure you have created a Compartment definition file, see
above.

Compartments may be added or deleted by

• Select Add or Delete Compartment from the Edit menu.
Add will add a tank after the currently selected compartment and Delete will delete the currently selected
compartment(s). The accelerator keys Ctrl+A and the Delete key may also be used to add and delete entries
respectively.

Page 59
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Modelling Box Shape Tanks

Simple tanks and compartments are created by specifying six values that define a box-shaped boundary for
the tank. This box will be called the Boundary Box. The boundary box is made up of the fore and aft
extremities of the tank, the top and bottom, and the port and starboard limits of the tank. Each value defines
one of the six planes of the tank.

The column headings in the Compartment Definition table include terms such as 'F Bottom, 'A Top', 'F Port'
and 'A Starboard'. The 'F' and 'A' abbreviations stand for Forward and Aft, in other words the two ends of the
compartment. You will notice that aft columns contain the word "ditto". This means that the value is identical
at the aft end of the tank to the forward end, resulting in a parallel tank.

When the “Update Loadcase” command from the Analysis menu is used, or an analysis started, Stability will
form the sections that define the tanks and compartments. This is done by finding the intersection of the
tank bounding box and the hull. Thus it is not necessary to make the tanks fit the hull manually – this is done
automatically by Stability.

Box shaped compartments can be formed from the numerical values in the compartment definition table.
See Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 77 for some recommendations regarding setting the
boundary box.

Modelling Tapered Tanks

The default is for compartments to have parallel sides. If you wish to define tapered compartments, it is
possible to enter different transverse and vertical values for the points defining the forward and aft ends of
the compartment.

If a different value is entered in one of the “ditto” columns, a tapered tank will result. Tanks can be tapered or
sloped in Plan or Profile views. Stability does not have a mechanism for creating a sloped tank boundary in
the Body Plan view.

Page 60
Chapter 3 Using Stability

By changing the “ditto”-input fields, tapered tanks can be formed

Note:

Tapering can be done in Plan and in Profile view. Tapered tanks in Body Plan view have to be
created using a boundary surface. See Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces on page 62.

Linked Tanks

Tanks and compartments may be linked. This means that although they are defined as separate tanks, they
act as a single tank with a common free surface. To link tanks, compartments or non-buoyant volumes, first
make them the same type as the parent and give them the same name. The easiest way to do this is to copy
and paste the name from the Name column of the parent row into the Name column of the linked tank row.
They may then be linked to the parent by typing l or linked in the Type column. Linked tanks and
compartments do not have to be physically linked in space. However, the fluid in a linked tank or damaged
compartment is always assumed to be able to flow freely between the linked volumes.

Page 61
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces

Tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes may have their boundaries defined by surfaces as well as
being constrained to particular dimensions. This allows for the modelling of arbitrarily shaped tanks.

Forming tanks using boundary surfaces

The surfaces to be used to define the tank boundaries are selected by clicking in the Boundary Surfaces
column in the middle of the Compartments Definition table. A dialog will appear that allows you to select
which surfaces form the boundary of the tank. If a tank uses boundary surfaces, the cell in the Boundary
Surfaces column is colored blue.

If you wish to use a surface to define a tank or compartment, tick next to the surface name in the Boundary
Surface list. Note that symmetrical surfaces appear twice as there will be a starboard and a port side copy of
the surface. The Starboard surface is first in the list and the Port surface second. The port surface is also
identified with the suffix (P) after the name.
Note:

Only internal structure surfaces appear in the boundary surfaces list.

Symmetrical surfaces are duplicated, with the port-side surface having “(P)” appended to the
surface name.

Page 62
Chapter 3 Using Stability

After selecting the internal surfaces, it is necessary to type in the extents of the boundary box.
Stability will automatically set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits of the boundary box to just within the
longitudinal limits of the Boundary Surface. This ensures that at least 12 sections are inserted in
the tank.
A short-cut way of creating a tank from a set of boundary surfaces is to select the required surfaces in the
Assembly tree and select “Create Tank from Surfaces” in the right-click popup menu:

Create Tank from (selected) Surfaces using the Assembly tree

Also see:
Forming Compartments on page 70
Number of Sections in Tanks on page 76
Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 77

Modelling External Tanks

External tanks may not be modelled in Stability. However, it is normally possible to add "Hull" surfaces in the
model, which will enclose the external tanks. The tanks can then be modelled in Stability.

Additional box-shaped hull surfaces used to define deck tanks

Modelling Non-Buoyant Volumes

Non-buoyant volumes are effectively permanently flooded compartments. These parts of the hull can
normally be modelled using trimmed hull surfaces. However, there are occasions where it is more convenient
to use non-buoyant volumes. In some cases, where the volume to be flooded forms sections within the
hydrostatic section, this is the only option, e.g. waterjet ducts. The choice whether to use trimmed surfaces or
non-buoyant volumes is primarily determined by the length of the non-buoyant volume relative to the
length of the vessel.
Page 63
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Using trimmed hull surfaces

When the length of the non-buoyant volume, relative to the length of the model, is large
enough; the non-buoyant volume can be calculated accurately from the hull sections. If
possible, trimmed surfaces should be used. The picture below is a good example of when
to use trimmed surfaces.

Propeller tunnels modelled with trimming surfaces

Using tank type: Non-buoyant volume
In some cases using trimmed surfaces is just not possible. For example, when the sections
of the non-buoyant volume are entirely enclosed within the hull sections (as is the case
for a water jet duct) the use of a non-buoyant volume is the only way in which these
features can be modelled.

Water-jet ducts modelled as non-buoyant volumes

Another occasion when non-buoyant volumes should be used, is when the length of the
compartment relative to the length of the hull is too small to calculate its volume from
the hull sections. A good example of this is a bow thruster on a long ship. If the vessel is
very long, and the thruster duct is of small diameter, there may not be sufficient sections
to model it accurately (even if you use the maximum of 200 sections for the Stability
model). In this case you are better off modelling the thruster duct as internal structure

Page 64
Chapter 3 Using Stability

and using these surfaces to define a non-buoyant volume. For example: in the image
below the bow thruster volume is only calculated with one section.

For more information, see Number of Sections in Tanks on page 76.

Tip: Besides increasing the number of sections through the bow thruster from 1 to 12, modelling the thruster
duct as a non-buoyant volume has the additional advantage of being able to specify a Tank and
Compartment Permeability, and hence also account for the thruster.

Bow thruster tube modelled as two non-buoyant volumes

Conditional flooding of Non-Buoyant Volumes, Tanks and Compartments

It is possible to conditionally flood a Non-Buoyant Volume (NBV). Normally NBVs are permanently flooded,
this new feature makes it possible to flood the BNV only when a specific Key Point is immersed. This feature
can be used to model the flooding of a yacht’s cockpit for example. Similarly, conditional flooding may be
applied to Compartments and Tanks.

Tanks within Compartments

When a tank is defined within a compartment, Stability will automatically deduct the volume of the tank from
the compartment volume using a “linked neg. (negative) compartment”. This is necessary for damage cases
where the compartment is flooded and the volume of the tank should be treated completely separately from
the compartment.

Linked negative compartments are deleted and recreated whenever a tank or compartment is added, deleted
or modified. Negatively linked compartments are displayed on the bottom of the Compartment Definition
table solely for reference purposes and are not under direct user control. This means that linked negative
compartments cannot be added, deleted or modified.

Page 65
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Linked negative compartments are named based on both the parent compartment as well as the tank from
which the linked negative compartment was derived. For example a linked negative compartment might be
named “Compartment3 (Stbd Hydr Oil)” to reflect that it is derived from the intersection of Compartment3
with the Stbd Hydr Oil tank.

Tanks Overlapping

As mentioned earlier in this manual, only compartments and non buoyant volumes or tanks can overlap with
each other. Tanks or compartments of the same type (eg two tanks) can not overlap. A tank and a non-
buoyant volume are also not allowed to overlap.

Stability will first try to form tank sections and then check whether these sections overlap tank sections of
adjacent tanks. When two conflicting or overlapping tanks or compartments are detected during the forming
process, you will receive an error message:

Notice that the compartment definition row number of the tank is given in brackets
i.e. tank #8 intersects tank #3.
Troubleshooting Overlapping Tanks
Sometimes the reason for the conflict can be quite simple: eg an overlapping boundary box. However, when
you are modelling tanks using boundary surfaces, the surface boundaries act as a boundary between two
adjacent tanks and the bounding box extents are allowed to overlap. In these cases, it can be quite difficult
to see why the tanks overlap, especially if you have a large number of tanks already defined.

By temporarily deleting all tanks except for the one that does not form, it often becomes clear why the tank
overlaps. In the case of the image above, the tank’s fwd most section goes all the way to the CL (probably
because the fwd boundary box extent is just fwd of the boundary surfaces or exactly on the edge of a
boundary surface). This causes this particular tank to “overlap” with surrounding tanks.
Procedure to Fix Overlapping Tanks:
• Save Model
• Go into Comp def window
Page 66
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Save comp def

• Delete all tanks except for one you wish to investigate
• form tanks, inspect tank sections
• Try to fix tank definition, eg by selecting additional boundary surfaces
Now that you know how to fix it..
• Close comp def file. Do NOT save!!
• Open saved Comp def file
• Fix compartment.
• Save & move on to next compartment.

Tank and Compartment Permeability

Tanks may have two permeabilities; one, which is used when the tank is intact, and the other when it is
damaged. Compartments and non-buoyant volumes have only one permeability, thought it is listed in both
columns. The compartment permeability is applied when the compartment is flooded in a damage condition
and the non-buoyant volume permeability is applied at all times since it is always flooded.

In the case of damaged tanks and compartments, the permeability fraction is also applied to the free-
surface-moment contribution of that tank or compartment.
Permeability of Compartments
As opposed to tanks, compartments typically have structure (other than plate stiffeners)
and equipment inside. In case of large variations in permeability within a compartment it
is recommended to model separate linked compartments with separate permeability to
increase accuracy.
For example an engine room with engines and auxiliaries at the tanktop could be divided
up in a lower- and an upper engine room compartment. The lower compartment will
have a permeability of, for example, 60% and the upper compartment a permeability of
95%. Depending on the level of accuracy required, the engines and equipment could also
be modelled individually as empty tanks.

Relative Density of Tank Fluids

Relative Density (Specific Gravity) values can be typed directly into the Relative Density column of the
Compartment Definition table.

Alternatively the fluid type can be entered into the Fluid Type column, either as the name or as one of the
single letter codes (when entering the name, auto complete is used, so it is normally only necessary to type
the first few letter of the name). If a fluid type is entered, the relative density value is obtained from the value
specified in the Density dialog. Whenever values are changed in the Density dialog (see Density of Fluids on
page 236), all entries for that fluid in the compartment definition are automatically updated.

If the tank defines a cargo tank that will carry different liquid cargoes, the default density specified here in
the compartment definition may be overridden in the loadcases.

Page 67
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Tanks and Surface Thickness

If you have specified that Stability should include the surface thickness, the tanks, compartments and non-
buoyant volumes will correctly account for the surface thickness and its projection direction: the tanks will go
to the inside of the hull shell.
Note:

Thickness of boundary surfaces are not taken into account, hence you should design these
surfaces to the inside of the tank.

Compartment and Tank Ordering

The tank definition order can be adjusted in a similar way to loads in the loadcase. Select the rows you wish
to use and use the Edit | Move Items Up or Down commands (there is no provision for sorting tanks
alphabetically). Groups of linked tanks and compartments will be moved together.

Compartment and Tank Visibility

When creating complicated tank plans, it is often useful to check individual tanks. You can either control the
tank visibility through the Assembly window, or if you prefer, you can use damage cases to quickly change
the display to show certain tanks.

Assembly view can be used to show and hide tanks/compartments

Using damage cases, selected tanks may be displayed in the following manner:
• Define a damage case
• Select only damaged tanks and compartments for display, turn off the display of intact
tanks and compartments.
• Select whether you want to see the tank outline or the tank sections (tanks sections are
preferable when checking that tanks have been formed correctly since it is these sections
which are used to determine the tank volume and other properties).
• Choose the damage case from the Analysis toolbar
• Set any of the tanks and compartments you wish to be visible to damaged in the damage
case window.

You can make the damage case window quite small and tile it next to the perspective view. Use this to
quickly turn tanks on and off by changing their damage status.

Page 68
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Using a damage case to quickly change the tank and compartment visibility

Compartment and Tank Display Options

Tanks may be displayed with a transparent, shaded representation of the fluid-plane in the tank (or
floodwater plane in the case of a damaged compartment) and/or with a cross-hatch of the tank extremities.
The shaded fluid level is shown in the Plan and Perspective views only. The tank-filling levels are taken from
the currently selected loadcase.

Shaded tank fluid-planes

Shading of damaged floodwater-planes

Page 69
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Tank cross-hatching in Plan and Profile views

Tank sections

When in Tank Calibration mode, tank sections are also displayed in the Bodyplan view when the “Show single
section” option is selected. Only tank sections that lie on or near the current station are shown – this makes it
easier to verify that the tanks have been formed.

Forming Compartments

Tanks and compartments are formed automatically by Stability (once the tank extents and any boundary
surfaces have been defined) by selecting Recalculate Tanks and Compartments from the Analysis menu. The
formed status of a tank (yes or no) is shown in the last column of the compartment definition table.

This section describes the internal tank-forming process that Stability uses to form tanks. First a step-by-step
outline of the tank forming process is given, followed by the tank section insertion process. Understanding
these processes may assist you in rare situations where the tank forming does not work as expected.

Step-by-Step Tank Forming Process

As an example, the starboard waterballast tank below will be created using boundary surfaces.

Page 70
Chapter 3 Using Stability

An example of a port and starboard waterballast tank with a pipe tunnel at the centreline. The water ballast
tanks have a margin plate on the side.
Stability uses three input items to form the compartment
• Boundary surfaces (if defined)
• Boundary box
• Stability Hull sections

Starting position
The starboard tank margin plate is modelled using an Internal Structure surface in Modeler.

Starting point: Stability Hull sections with an internal surface and a bounding box
Also see:
Modelling Tanks Using Boundary Surfaces on page 62 and the Modeler manual on
internal structure surfaces

Step 1: Close Internal Structure Surface

Stability will close the Internal Structure Surface contour by drawing a straight line between the ends of the
opening.

Page 71
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Stability uses the same method for forming the tank section from the boundary surfaces as for forming the
hydrostatic sections through the hull. As with the hull sections, the surfaces selected to form the tank
boundary must form closed section contours at all longitudinal positions through the tank. The area inside
the selected surfaces will define the tank contour.

Make sure that the boundary surfaces:

• Form a closed section contour, or
• There is no more than one opening – the opening will be closed with a straight line
Note:

Stability will close the section contour of the selected boundary surfaces only. Often a tank is
not formed as expected because only one side of the internal structure surface was selected for
example the portside (p).

Another common cause of unexpected results is trimming. If you selected “use trimmed
surfaces” while opening the model, Stability will use the trimmed internal structure surface.
Usually the internal structure surfaces are best to be left untrimmed.
Step 2: Clip to Boundary Surface
Using the closed surface section contour Stability can now form a closed compartment section. The tank or
compartment looks like this at this stage:

Step 3: Clip to Hull

Stability will clip the compartment section to the hull.

Page 72
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Step 4: Clip to Boundary Box

Finally the compartment section is clipped to the boundary box. The boundary box is formed from the
numerical input in the Compartment definition table.

More realistic surface-bounded tanks

Whilst the above example shows the principles by which surface-bounded tanks are formed, it is not really
realistic because it would not be possible to define a tank above the surface-bounded double bottom tanks.
In practice additional surfaces would be required. A more realistic example is shown in the following section.

In this example the vessel has both wing and double bottom tanks with non-rectangular cross-sections thus
requiring them to be defined by boundary surfaces – see blow:

Sketch of tank cross-sections

Five surfaces have been defined to define the tank boundaries:

Page 73
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Tank Boundary surfaces defined in Modeler

The following surfaces need to be selected for the different tanks so that closed sections are generated (or at
most one section)
Hold (C) TankWing, TankWing (P), TankTop, TankTop (P)
Double Bottom (P) TankTop (P), BottomClosure (P), TankBilgePlate (P)
Double Bottom (S) TankTop (S), BottomClosure (S), TankBilgePlate (S)
Wing Ballast (P) TankWing (P), OuterClosure (P), TankBilgePlate (P)
Wing Ballast (S) TankWing (S), OuterClosure (S), TankBilgePlate (S)

Page 74
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Stability tank definition

Surfaces for Hold (C) (top is closed automatically)

Page 75
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Surfaces for double bottom tanks

Surfaces for wing tanks (top is closed automatically)

Number of Sections in Tanks

The volume of a tank or compartments is calculated by integrating section properties along the length of the
tank. Thus it is important to have a sufficiently large number of sections to accurately model the tank.
Stability will normally place twelve sections between the forward and aft limits defining the tank. If this
results in a section spacing greater than the spacing for the hull spacing, additional sections will be inserted
into the tank so that the tank section spacing match the hull section spacing.

Also see
Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box on page 77

Page 76
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Longitudinal Extents of Boundary Box

For tanks near the ship’s extremities it is good practise to set the “Fore” and “Aft” limits in the compartment
table to just inside the hull surface (say 1mm). In most cases, this will be done automatically by Stability. The
following example illustrates why:

• If the boundary box is set like this:

The number of hull sections is dependent on the section spacing in the model.

• But if the boundary box is set just inside the forward limit of the bulbous bow:

To recap – Near the ship’s extremities, the longitudinal extents should not be set to extreme values, they
should be set to just inside the extents of the hull surfaces to ensure that at least 12 sections are used to
calculate the tank volumes.

For internal structure surfaces that are used as boundary surface, Stability will automatically set the “Fore”
and “Aft” limits of the boundary box to just within the longitudinal limits of the boundary surface. This
ensures that at least 12 sections are inserted in the tank.

Note that transversely and vertically there are no such restrictions.

Also see
Number of Sections in Tanks on page 76
Forming Compartments on page 70

Page 77
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Compartment Types

Five compartment types can be created using the Compartment Definition table - tanks, linked tanks,
compartments, linked compartments and non-buoyant volumes.

Tanks
Will be included in the tank calibration output and are automatically added to the
loadcase.
Linked Tanks
Will have their volume added to the parent tank with the same tank name. They do not
have a separate entry in the loadcase. In addition, if a tank is damaged, any tank that it is
linked to will also be regarded as damaged. Tanks need not be adjoining to be linked,
they can be remote from one another. In this case the tank linking simulates tanks with
cross connections.
Compartments
Are only used to specify compartmentation for damage. They are not included in the tank
calibration output and will not be added to the loadcase.
Linked Compartments
Work in the same way as linked tanks. This allows you to damage a complex
compartment configuration by linking compartments together and damaging the parent
compartment.
Non-Buoyant Volumes
Are only used to specify compartments of the vessel which are permanently flooded up
to the static waterline. They are ideal for defining water-jet ducts, moon pools, etc. and
essentially behave as damaged compartments. They are not included in the tank
calibration output and will not be added to the loadcase.

To change the type of a tank, type the first character of the tank type (t, c or n) in the Type column of the
Compartment Definition table and then press Enter. This will automatically set the tank/compartment to the
correct type.

Sounding Pipes

Stability allows sounding pipes to be defined for each tank. One sounding pipe per tank is permitted and up
to nine vertices per sounding pipe, allowing inclined, bent or curved sounding pipes to be modelled.
Sounding pipes must be defined with the first point at the top of the sounding pipe and the last point at the
bottom.

Stability creates a default sounding pipe when the tank is formed (either by running an analysis, or using one
of the following commands: Analysis | Recalculate Tanks and Compartments; or Analysis | Update Loadcase.
The default sounding pipe is placed at the longitudinal and transverse position of the lowest point of the
tank. If the lowest point of the tank is shared between several locations (e.g. the bottom of the tank is flat
either longitudinally or transversely) the default sounding pipe location is placed at the aft-most low point
and as close to the centreline as possible. The top of the sounding pipe is taken to be level with the highest
point of the tank and the default sounding pipe is assumed to be straight and vertical. Automatically created
sounding pipes will be recalculated if the tank geometry changes. However, once the sounding pipe has
been edited manually, any changes to the sounding pipe due to tank geometry changes will also have to be
made manually.

Page 78
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Edit Sounding Pipes

To customise a sounding pipe, you need to use the Sounding Pipes table in the Input window, shown below.

You can activate this window by selecting from the Windows | Input | Sounding Pipes menu, by clicking on
the tabs at the bottom of the Input window, or by clicking on the icon in the window toolbar.

To add vertices to create a bent sounding pipe, make the sounding pipe type User Defined, then click on the
first row of a particular sounding pipe and choose Edit | Add or use the Ctrl+A key combination. A new row
will be added to the sounding pipe and the longitudinal position, offset and height of the vertex can be
edited. Unwanted vertices can be deleted by clicking on the relevant row in the table and selecting Edit |
Delete or by hitting the Delete key. Note that each successive vertex in a sounding pipe must be no higher
than the previous vertex i.e. it is not acceptable to have S-bends in the sounding pipes.

Calibration Increment

Stability allows user definable increments (or: intervals) for tank soundings. This is done by specifying a
numerical value for the increment for each tank in the Calibration Spacing column of the Sounding Pipes
Input window.

• Type the value of the desired calibration increment in the Calibration Spacing cell for the
tank calibration you wish to modify.
If no increment is entered, Stability uses its default value based on a reasonable division of the depth of the
tank. In this case the Sounding Pipes table will display “Auto” in the Calibration Increment column for the
tank.
Page 79
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note:

Increments are measured along the sounding pipe, not along the vertical axis of the tank. If the
sounding pipe is inclined or if it has multiple angles, soundings will step evenly along the
inclined length of the sounding pipe.

Room display

Here we will show the various ways in which Rooms (Tanks, Compartments, Non-buoyant volumes, etc) can
be displayed.

Visibility Toolbar

The Visibility toolbar is the easiest way to select which type of Rooms are visible and which parts of the
Rooms are drawn. The Visibility toolbar is shown below, with the first six buttons used to select which Room
types are visible and the last eight buttons used to select which parts are drawn:

Tanks | [Link] | Comparts. | [Link]. | Neg-Linked-Comparts. | Non-Buoyant volumes

Room names | Fuild Centroids | Fluid Levels | Sounding Pipes | Sections | Outline | Shading | Hatching
Visibility toolbar in Maxsurf Stability

Formed and Unformed Rooms

Unformed Rooms will show as a box (or potentially longitudinally tapering box) with diagonal hatch:

Unformed tanks shown as box with diagonal hatch

Once the Rooms are formed, they conform to the hull shape and the other display options will be available:

Unformed tanks shown as box with diagonal hatch

Name and Centroid

The Room name may be displayed (or just the centroid). If an analysis which uses a Loadcase is active, the
name/cg will be displayed at the location of the cg of the Tank at the filling level of the active Loadcase;
otherwise it will be shown a the centre of the Room.

Page 80
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Displaying Tank CG or Name for different analysis types

Fluid Level

The Tank fluid level corresponding to the active Loadcase can be displayed. This is most meaningful when an
analysis which uses a Loadcase is active.

Displaying Tank CG or Name for different analysis types

Sounding Pipes

Sounding pipes are drawn with a small circle at the top. For user-defined sounding pipes the first point must
be the highest. Sounding pipes are only shown for Tanks

Example of a Tank Sounding Pipe

Page 81
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Sections and Outline

One or both sections and outlines must be shown, they cannot both be turned off. The sections are what are
used to calculate the Room properties, under some circumstances, there may be visual artifacts in the Room
outline (this is a visual issue only and will not affect the Room properties).

Room sections and outline

Shading

Shading is useful for especially for illustrating flooded areas. Different shading are shown in different views.
The shading shows the actual fluid in the Tank at the levels specified in the current loadcase. In the case of
damaged Rooms the floodwater level will be shown. Empty tanks are not shaded. This is the same for Plan,
Profile and Body plan views. Note that when shading is turned on the “Labels” color is used for Room names
(otherwise the Room color or the color of the tank fluid type is used).

Plan and Profile with Shading on

Body plan with Shading on.

In perspective view, the fluid plane is shown.

Page 82
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Perspective with Shading on, showing the fluid plane in the tanks.
If the “Corrected VCG” method is selected, the fluid is assumed “frozen” in the tank and is simply rotated
from the upright. If the “Simulate fluids” option is chosen, the fluid will flow so that the fluid plane is parallel
to the seawater surface:

Shading with “Corrected VCG” and “Simulate fluids” options

For some tanks which narrow towards the top, when they are near full, the fluid plane is a small portion of
the filled part of the tank when viewed in Plan view. In this case, the parts of the tank that are pressed full are
shaded in a slightly lighter color:

Plan view of tank with tapering top; dark shading indicates fluid plane, lighter shaded area indicate parts of
the tank which are completely filled
Similarly where a damaged Room lies completely submerged, this is shaded in a lighter color than where it
cuts the free-surface:

Page 83
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Plan (top) and Profile (bottom) views of a flooded Room which intersects the free-surface. Those parts which
are fully submerged are shaded lighter than the part which intersects the free-surface.
Finally when water on deck is analysed, different colors are used to show the water on deck accumulated in
the Room and any submerged parts of the Room:

Body plan view: accumulated water on deck shown in blue with flooded part of Room shown in red.
In the perspective view the shading shows the free-surface of the accumulated water on deck (blue) as well
as the waterplanes of the damaged Rooms (red)

Page 84
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Perspective view of shading with water on deck analysis

Hatching

The Hatching simply draws diagonal lines across the full extents of the formed tank in all three orthogonal
views. The lines do not depend on the loadcase or tank filling level or damage. The color used reflects the
type of Room (Tank, Compartment, Damage, Non-Buoyant volume); the color of the fluid in tanks is not
used, (you should use the shading instead for this).

Tank Hatching in Profile, Plan and Body Plan views

Page 85
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Cross-Flood Device Connections

Cross flood connections between pairs of rooms can be defined in the Cross-Flood definition table in the
input window. Multiple connections between the same pairs of rooms or multiple connections to a single
room should not be used (if such connections are defined, use the Active column to select which
connections are active so that at most, there is only one connection to each cross-flooding room; it is
possible having several connection connected to an initially damaged room with these connecting to
separate cross-flooding rooms).

Allowable cross-flooding connection configurations

(only one active connection per cross-flooding room)

Page 86
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Indamissable cross-flooding connection configurations

(two or more active connectors leading to a single cross-flooding room)

Cross-flood connection definition table

Location
Each connection has a name; then the two connected rooms and the locations of the emds of the
connection, A and B, are specified (End A, connects to Room A at Point A; End B connects to Room B at Point
B).
Physical Properties
Each connection has an associated cross-sectional area and friction coefficient.
Connectivity
Page 87
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Each connection device has three possible connectivity options (used to model one-way valves in the device).
A→ B floodwater can flow in either direction; ie Room A can be damaged with
cross-flooding into Room B or vice versa.
A→B floodwater can flow only from the damaged Room A to the cross-flooding
into Room B
B→A floodwater can flow only from the damaged Room B to the cross-flooding
into Room A
Initial condition
If the cross-flooding connection device is considered “initially full”, the initial head will be measured at the
entry point to the cross-flooding room. Conversely, if the cross-flooding connection device is considered
“initially empty”, the intial head will be measured at the exit point of the damaged room.
Active
This allows numerous connections to be defined but only a sub-set to be active at any one time; only active
connections connecting damaged rooms to intact rooms are considered for the analysis.

Damage Case Definition

In all but the floodable length and tank calibration analysis modes, Stability is capable of including the
effects of user-defined damage. Stability allows the user to set up a number of damage cases. Volumes that
are permanently flooded should be defined as non-buoyant volumes.

Adding a Damage Case

To add a damage case, make the Damage window active and select Add Damage Case from the Case menu.
You may specify a name for the Damage Case in the dialog. Each new damage case will have a column in the
Damage Window and a tick may be placed to indicate which tanks and compartments are damaged for that
particular Damage Case. The new damage case is added after the currently selected damage case column, to
insert a damage case immediately after the intact case, select the intact case column. Several damage cases
may be added in one go by selecting a number of columns.

Damage case specification (normal view)

Note that if “partial flooding” is not enabled in the Case menu,

Page 88
Chapter 3 Using Stability

then the text description of the “Case type” cannot be displayed:

• a tick indicates final stage;
• no tick indicates intermediate stage.

When text is not displayed in the Damage case table, Final stage damage is indicated with a tick.

When Water on Deck (WoD) has been selected, the Damage Case window changes and allows the
specification of there parameters required for WoD. Editing the extents of damage will not update the
damaged condition of the tanks and compartments (this is done only if the damage extents are set through
the Case|Extent of Damage dialog).

Enhanced Damage window when WoD analysis is selected

Page 89
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Dagage Case Type

There are are three different types of damage case; for each different type, alternative sets of Key Points and
Stability Criteria may be defined for analysis. The different types are:
1. Intact. Only one Intact case may defined. All rooms are intact (areas of lost buoyancy
should be defined as non-buoyant volumes). Only Key Points and Criteria selected for
the Intact condition will be used when the Intact case is selected.
2. Damaged – Final Stage. Any number may be defined. This is a damage case where
the damaged rooms may be select. It also represents final stage damage and only Key
Points and Criteria selected for Final Stage Damage will be used when this type of
Damage case is selected.
3. Damaged – Intermediate Stage. Any number may be defined. This is a damage case
where the damaged rooms may be select. It also represents an intermediate stage of
damage and only Key Points and Criteria selected for Intermediate Stage Damage will
be used when this type of Damage case is selected.

Deleting a Damage Case

To delete damage cases, simply select the columns to be deleted in the Damage Window and select Delete
Damage Case from the Case menu. Note that it is not possible to delete the intact case.

Renaming a Damage Case

The name of the current damage case may be changed by selecting Edit Damage Case when the damage
case window is active, the current damage case is selected from the Analysis toolbar – see below.

Re-ordering a Damage Case

Damage cases can be re-ordered by clicking in the damage cases you wish to move (a single case or several
adjacent cases). Then click on the Edit Left / Right toolbar buttons to move the selected damage case(s) left
or right. Note that the intact case cannot be moved.

Selecting a Damage Case

The current damage case is selected from the Analysis toolbar.

The Loadcase and View windows will reflect the damage defined in the current damage case. To perform
analyses for the intact vessel, select Intact as the current damage case.

Any subsequent analyses will take into account the damaged compartments. Note that carrying out a Tank
Calibration analysis will force the intact case to be selected. This is also the case for the Floodable Length
analysis which effectively sets up its own longitudinal extent of damage.

Page 90
Chapter 3 Using Stability

When tanks have been damaged, their weights and levers are no longer displayed in the Loadcase window
and the word ‘Damage’ is displayed in the quantity column. This is because Stability uses the “Lost
buoyancy” method rather than “Added mass”.
Note:

Stability uses the “Lost buoyancy” method rather than “Added mass”.

Flooding is considered to be instantaneous up to sea level. Any tank fluids are treated as having
been completely replaced by seawater up to the equilibrium waterline.

Stability assumes that all compartment definition has been done after the tanks have been
defined. If you have linked tanks or compartments or added tanks within compartments after
the definition of a damage case, you should toggle the damage status of the damaged tanks.
This is simply done by copying all the damage case data to a spread sheet, turning off all
damage in all the damage cases (use the fill down command) and then pasting back in the
original data from where it was stored in the spreadsheet.

Displaying Damage Cases

When a damage case is selected, all damaged tanks and compartments will be displayed in damaged tank or
damaged compartment color respectively. These colors can be specified in the View | Colors and lines menu.

In the Loadcase Window damaged tanks are displayed with the label 'Damaged' in the Quantity column, and
all values set to zero.

The Loadcase Window displays damaged tanks and excludes them from any calculations.

Page 91
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Extent of Damage Cases

The damaged compartments can automatically be set by using the Case | Extent of damage command.
Select the column of the damage case you wish to specify the extent of damage for and choose Extent of
Damage from the case menu:

Defining the damaged compartments by specify the extent of damage.

Specify the extent of the damage – any tanks or compartments that lie partially or wholly within the extent of
damage will be automatically flagged as damaged:

Automatically generated damage case from using Extent of Damage command.

The volume of seawater in damaged tanks can be seen in the Compartments table in the window.

Page 92
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Cargo Dropout

It is possible to select whether cargo is lost or retained in damaged cargo tanks: Case | Empty Damaged
Tanks menu.

In the case where “Empty Damaged Tanks” is selected, cargo is removed from damaged tanks (as was the
case with all previous versions of Stability). Now damaged tanks are highlighted in Red in the Loadcase table:

However, if the option to Empty Damaged Tanks is turned off, the cargo masses of the damaged tanks will
be retained in the loadcase, but will be highlighted in red to indicate that they are also damaged

If the “Simulate fluid movement” option is selected, the cargo in the damaged tanks will be shifted as the
vessel heels and trims to maintain the cargo waterline parallel to the sea waterline, as would be the case for
the intact vessel.

Page 93
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Damage Analysis and Partial Flooding

To help clarify the way that Stability works, a number of terms are defined in the following sections.

Room

A room is any space defined in the Compartment definition table in Stability. Normally a Tank or a
Compartment (but may also include a Non-Buoyant Volume – NBV).

Fluid simulation

In Stability fluid cargos in tanks can be modelled exactly. That is for any orientation (heel and trim) of the
vessel, the fluid level in tanks is always parallel to the external sea surface. Whilst keeping the fluid level
parallel to the external sea-surface, the height is iterated so that the volume in the tank matches the volume
specified in the Loadcase. This simulates the quasi-static movement of the cargo fluids in tanks; thus at a
specified vessel orientation, the actual quasi-static centre of gravity is calculated, hence the righting moment
can be calculated directly without adjustment. This analysis option is known as “Simulate fluid movement”:

Analysis | Fluids dialog

Lost-buoyancy method for damage analysis

The lost-buoyancy method for damage stability is always used in Stability. That is, flooded portions of the
hull are removed from the intact buoyant volume of the hull envelope. The same method is used for Non-
buoyant volumes (which are essentially permanently flooded spaces). It is quite easy to visualise this method
for fully-flooded spaces (i.e. spaces that are either completely flooded or flooded up to the external sea-
waterline). However, the same principles, of removing flooded spaces from the intact hull, can be applied to
partial flooding. In this case, the top of the lost-buoyancy volume (damaged space) is a waterline parallel to,
but below the external sea-waterline. Because the lost-buoyancy waterline is always parallel to the external
sea-waterline, the centre of the lost-buoyancy moves as the vessel orientation changes (in a similar way to
the fluid simulation of filled tanks).

Added mass method for damage analysis

In contract to the lost-buoyancy method, the added-mass method adds floodwater to the damaged rooms.
In fact if a quasi-static fluid-simulation method (as described above) is applied to the floodwater the righting
moment calculated by both lost-buoyancy and added-mass methods are the same. However, because the
vessel displacement is different, the righting arm (GZ) is different for both methods.
Page 94
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Stability does not use the added-mass method for damage stability. However, it is possible to simulate this
manually by running an intact analysis and adding sea-water to the flooded rooms and turning on the Fluid
simulation option. Care should be taken to ensure that the tank sea-water levels do not exceed the external
sea-waterline; this must be done my manual iteration. Further, to flood compartments in this manner, it will
be necessary to change them to Tanks so that they appear in the Loadcase.

Partial flooding

Partial flooding is where the lost-buoyancy in a damaged space does not necessarily extend up to the
external sea-waterline. The waterline of the lost buoyancy may be below, but never above the external sea-
waterline. Thus in Stability, the partial flooding is specified as a maximum allowable percentage of the room
which may be flooded; noting that under some circumstances, it may not be possible to achieve this level of
flooding if the room is too high compared with the external sea-waterline.

In Stability, the partial flooding is specified as percentage of the full geometric volume of the room. The
geometric volume being the volume without applying a permeability. This is because:
a) It allows for specification of lost buoyancy in a room for an intermediate stage
even if the room is not immersed in final stage of flooding.
b) The analysis is quicker because it is not necessary to compute the final stage
first.
c) The room capacity is known and does not change; the final stage flooded
volume changes for any change in analysis condition.
d) The “final stage” is not an unambiguous term. For instance during the
calculation of a GZ curve, does this refer to the final stage flooding at zero heel,
equilibrium heel or at each heel angle for which the GZ curve is calculated?
e) The resulting flooded lost buoyancy data are available as results, thus it is
possible to specify as a percentage of final flooded volume if required.
f) Because Stability has intact and damaged permeabilities for tanks, it was felt to
be less confusing simply to use the geometric volume.

Constant displacement

Constant displacement is sometimes taken to mean Lost buoyancy (as defined above); however in Stability,
constant displacement is taken to mean that the Loadcase does not change under damage, and refers as to
whether or not liquid cargo in damaged tanks should be left in, or removed from the Loadcase. In fact
previous versions of Stability always removed the liquid cargo of damaged tanks from the Loadcase, resulting
in a lighter displacement for the damaged vessel (i.e. constant displacement was not being used). In version
18 of Stability a switch has been included and the constant displacement method can now be used if desired
(turn off the “Empty damaged tanks” option in the Case menu):

Page 95
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Variable or constant displacement options for the damaged Loadcase

Partial Flooding – Modelling and Analysis

Partial flooding is available in Stability Ultimate. It is possible to only partially flood a room in Stability. Partial
flooding can be enabled in the Case menu.

Enable Partial Flooding

With Partial Flooding enabled (and also for Water on Deck), the Damage case list changes so that text data
may be entered (rather than check boxes). Type “I” for intact rooms, “D” for damaged rooms or specify the
maximum percentage of the total room volume that can be flooded:

Page 96
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Specifying Partial Flooding

Generating a partial case based on an existing case

If you have an existing case, it is quite simple to generate a partial case based on the damage specified by
the existing case:
• Add a case next to the intact case by selecting the column of the existing case and then choosing Add
Damage Case from the Case menu.
• Give the new case a name and click OK in the dialog
• Copy all the damage from the original case to the new one
• Select the new case and choose Edit Damage Case from the Case menu.
• Check the “Set flooding” option and specify the partial flooding percentage, and click OK; all the
damaged tanks will now have the specified filling level:

Partially flooded room waterline

For fully damaged rooms, the lost buoyancy extends up to the external sea-waterline (or the top boundary of
the room in question). In the partially flooded case, the lost buoyancy in a room does not necessarily extend
all the way up to the external sea-waterline. Two options are proposed:
1. All rooms defined as partially flooded in a Damage case share a common upper limit of lost buoyancy
(effectively share a common flooded waterline). In this case the lost buoyancy percentage is common for all
partially flooded rooms and the lost buoyancy is this percentage multiplied by the aggregate full room

Page 97
Chapter 3 Using Stability

volumes of the partially flooded rooms. When this option is selected, all partially damaged rooms have the
partial flooded percentage written in italics.
2. All rooms defined as partially flooded in a Damage case have individual upper limits of lost buoyancy as
defined by their individual maximum lost buoyancy ratios.

By default, damage cases take the first option, this may be changed in the new Damage Case Properties
dialog (Case | Edit Damage Case). It is also no longer necessary to select the whole damage case column to
edit its properties (selection of any cell in the damage case is sufficient):

Enhanced Damage Case Properties dialog

Note:

1. The percentage specified is the percentage of the full room volume (not the percentage of
the final damaged lost buoyancy).
2. The percentage specified is the maximum the room can flood, it is possible that due to the
trim and heel of the vessel that the room will not flood to this level – remember that the room
cannot flood above the exterior waterline.
3. As with ordinary damage cases, partial flooding cases are still treated as lost buoyancy, not as
an added mass.

Here it can be seen that the lost buoyancy (red shaded areas) does not extend all the way to the external
waterline (yellow line)

Page 98
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Flooded results

Remember that the lost buoyancy may be found in the Compartments results table. This table now also
contains the intact full volume of the compartment. For rooms made up of linked parts, the parent row
shows two values: the first is the parent component only; the value in parentheses is for the sum of all the
linked components. Remember that the “lost buoyancy / full volume” percentage is based on the geometric
volume, that is the volume ignoring permeability. The percentage is calculated without including
perrmeabilities to avoid possible confusion as to which permeability -intact or damaged- is used.

Lost buoyancy volumes reported in Compartment results table

Examples

Below are shown the differences of the two waterline options:

Common partially flooded waterline in all damaged rooms

In the first example the partial flooding is specified to use a common waterline. It can be seen that the
damage has a common water line. In the results it can be seen that the “100 Forepeak” and “200 DB ballast
No1 S” rooms exceed the damaged percentage whilst the “105 Focsle” is empty because it is above the
external sea-waterline. When the total flooded volume, 2787m 3, is compared with the total volume of the
damaged rooms, 6130m3, the specified percentage of flooding has been achieved: 45%. (Sometimes there
can be a fraction of a percent difference, this is because the floodwater level is calculated to the nearest
0.1mm, but this can still represent a large volume if the flood-waterplane is large.)

Page 99
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Example 1: Common waterline

Page 100
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Individual partially flooded waterlines in each room

In the second example the partial flooding is specified to use individual waterlines. In this case all but the
“105 Focsle” are flooded to the specified percentage. The “105 Focsle” is not sufficiently immersed to achieve
the specified percentage because it is not allowed to flood above the external sea-waterline.

Page 101
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Example 2: Individual waterlines

Batch analysis results file and Report

Because of the introduction of partial flooding, there have been some minor changes to the format of the
batch analysis results file where the room damage status is listed:

New format of Batch results (shown in MS Excel for clarity)

Similarly, there have been changes to the Report; additional information is included and is tabs delimited to
facilitate making into a table if so desired.

New Report format for Room damage

Key Points (e.g. Down Flooding Points)

Key points such as downflooding points and hatch openings can be defined in Stability using the Key Points
window. The points may be displayed in the Design View window and will be displayed in different colors
depending on whether or not they are immersed. Immersed key points will be displayed in the same color as
flooded tanks or compartments.

Key points may be placed asymmetrically, a positive offset is to starboard and a negative offset is to port.
Vessels which have symmetrical key points on starboard and port sides must have both key points added to
the table.

There are essentially two basic categories of Key Points:

1. Key Points that are used purely to measure the angle at which they submerge or emerge during heel-
based analyses (e.g. Large Angle Stability, Limit KG, Cross curves, etc). Or which are used to measure
freeboard during equilibrium-based analyses (e.g. Equilibrium or Specified Condition). In this first category,
the different Key Point types are simply a way to be able to group different Key Points so that they can be
applied to different stability criteria.

• Down Flooding points

• Potential Down flooding points
• Embarkation points
• Immersion points
• Weathertight openings

2. Key Points which have a specific use within Stability:

Page 102
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Water on Deck Freenboard points

• Outflow points
• Conditional flooding points

The first category of Key Points are grouped by Type so that they can be used in different stability criteria;
normally the Key Point with the minimum (or sometimes maximum) value within the specified type will be
used to evaluate the stability criterion. For example you may have (say) 10 downflooding points defined,
then a criterion which requires the downflooding angle will take the minimum dowflooding angle of those
10 points. The type of Key Point used to determine the downflooding angle, which is then used in stability
criteria may be selected individually for each criterion.

Key Points definition table

Adding Key Points

To start adding downflooding points go to the Key Points table, select New Key Points from the File menu.
You will be given a default point. To add additional key points to the table, choose Add from the Edit menu
or press Ctrl+A. A new point will be inserted below the currently selected row in the table.

Deleting Key Points

To delete a Key point, click anywhere in the row of the point to be deleted and select Delete. To delete more
than one point at a time, click and drag over the rows you want deleted.

Page 103
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Select Delete from the Edit menu, and the selected rows will be deleted.

Editing Key Points

Key points are defined by entering a name, a longitudinal position, a transverse offset from the centreline,
and a height. Click in any cell and enter the name or value you require. All points are entered relative to the
zero point.

The type of Key Point may be selected from the combo-box in the Type column of the Down Flooding Points
table in the Input window:

Linked to and Flood from

For the first category of Key Points (Down Flooding points; Potential Down flooding points; Embarkation
points; Immersion points and Weathertight openings) the ‘Linked to’ and ‘Flood from’ columns can be used
to filter which Key Points should be included and excluded from the analysis for the current damage case. A
key point will be excluded from the analysis If in the current damage case, its ‘Linked to’ room is damaged
(because the room is already damaged immersion of the key point is of no significance). Similarly if the
‘Flood from’ room is intact then the key point will excluded (because there is no seawater in the room to
flood through the opening).

Downflooding points may be linked to tanks or compartments. Select the tank or compartment from the
combo-box in the Linked to column of the Down Flooding Points table in the Input window:

Downflooding points that are linked to tanks or compartments, which are damaged in the currently selected
damage case, will be ignored when computing the downflooding angle. These downflooding points will

Page 104
Chapter 3 Using Stability

appear italicised and an asterisk (*) is postfixed to the downflooding point’s name in the DF Angles table of
the Results window:

The downflooding angles for each of the points are displayed in the results window. The downflooding
angles are computed during a large angle stability analysis; the freeboards after an Equilibrium or Specified
Condition analysis. Immersed points are highlighted in red in the Freeboard column. In addition to the Key
Points results, immersion angles or freeboards (depending on the analysis) are also given for the margin line
and deck edge. In the Name column the longitudinal position where immersion first takes place (or the
lowest freeboard) is given.

For the second category of Key Points which have a specific use within Stability (Water on Deck Freenboard
points; Outflow points; and Conditional flooding points) the ‘Linked to’ column has specific meaning and
these are described in greater detail in the following sections.

Flow into Tank when immersed

The last column of the KeyPoints definition table ‘Flow into Tank when immersed’ is only applicable to
“Outflow” Key points. This allows the option of refilling the Tank to the height of the outside sea-water level
if the lowest Outflow point is immersed. Note that the fluid refilling the tank is the same as that specified for
the tank in the Loadcase –it is not refilling with seawater. This is because it is not possible to mix or have
multiple fluids in a single tank; also it is filling (added mass) not flooding/damage (lost buoyancy) that is
being modelled in this situation. For more information on “Outflow” Key points, please see the section on
Spilling Tanks

Condition Use

You may select under what conditions each Key point is to be used; at least one must be selected:
• Intact: include and evalaute when the intact condition is being analysed.
• Damage: include and evalaute when a final stage damage case is being analysed.
• Int’md: include and evalaute when an intermediate stage damage case is being analysed.

Page 105
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Select the conditions when the Key Points should be included

Opening Area

The STIX criterion uses the Key Point opening cross-sectional area to determine downflooding. One of the
STIX downflooding angles is determined as the angle which some critical area of openings has been
submerged. This area is always spedified in cm2 (metric length units) or inch2 (imperial length units).

Key Point opening cross-sctional area

Note that when plotted the cumulative immersed area of the openings is a step function. When evaluating
the downflooding angle by this approach, Stability finds the angle which the accumulated submerged area
of immersed key points is equal to, or exceeds the critical area. The key Point is still considered as a point
irrespective of the cross-section area that is associated with it.

Water on Deck (WoD) freeboard point

These points are used to define where the freeboard should be calculated when a comparment is included in
water on deck analysis

Outflow point

These points are used to specify the point at which fluid in a tank will flow out of the tank (the fluid level is
limited by the lowest of these liked to the tank in question). Fluid outflow is only taken into account when
the Fluid Simulation opton is turned on.

Page 106
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Conditional flooding point

These points are used to control whether the linked room (non-buoyant volume, compartment or tank)
should be considered flooded or not. If a room has associated conditional flooding points, then it will only
be considered flooded if one of these points immersed. For non-buoyan volumes this will be the case
irrespective of wheter the analysis is for the intact vessel or a damage case; for tanks and compartments,
they will only be considered flooded if they are also damaged in the current damage case being considered.
Please see the “Conditional Flooding Examples” below for further details.

Margin Line Points

The margin line is used in a number of the criteria. Stability automatically calculates the position of the
margin line (normally 76mm) below the deck edge when the hull is first read in. If necessary, the points on
the margin line may be edited manually in the Margin Line Points window (the deck edge is automatically
updated so that it is kept the specified distance above the margin line). If the now Deck Edge (after editing a
Margin Line point) is above the hull surfaces, it will be projected vertically from the automatically identified
deck edge point.

It is only necessary to modify the height value of the margin line points. Once this has been done for all the
points that need to be changed, selecting Snap Margin Line to Hull in the Analysis menu will project all of
the points horizontally onto the hull surface, ensuring that the margin line follows the hull shape precisely.
The Margin Line is always symmetrical port and starboard and it is the starboard offset that is specified in the
table; asymmetric margin lines and deck edges are not supported.

Points may be added or deleted as required using the procedure described in Adding Key Points and
Deleting Key Points on page 103.

For most vessels the Margin Line is located 76mm vertically below the bulkhead deck at side. Maxsurf
Stability attempts to automatically locate the position bulkhead deck at side by looking at each section and
identifying the transition from the deck to the sideshell. The Margin Line is then place 76mm below this
point and snapped horizontally to the sideshell.

The Data | Margin Line depth dialog allows you to specify the vertical distance between the Deck Edge and
Margin line (for some special vessels, this is different from the standard 76mm).
• The Reset button will revert the value back to the standard 76mm.
• When you click OK in this dialog, you have the choice of adjusting the Margin Line or
the Deck Edge to give the specified vertical separation.
• Finally you may also make the specified value the default for all new models opened
in Stability when calculating the hydrostatic sections.

Page 107
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Data | Margin Line depth dialog

The Deck Edge and Margin line are normally drawn as continuous lines, but if the View Single Section option
is selected in the Body Plan view, only the points, close to the current section, of each line is drawn are
drawn.

Single points of Margin Line and Deck Edge displayed in Body Plan view with ‘View Single Section’ option
Left: ML is 76mm below automatically identified DE – Right: DE is projected 150mm above the ML

Spilling Tanks

Cargo outflow to model spilling from open-top tanks can be included for both Large Angle Stability and
Equilibrium analyses; spilling is only included when the Fluids method is set to simulate fluids. To include the
effects of spilling you must:
• Define tanks as normal
• Define “Outflow” keypoints for the tanks which can spill cargo
• Select either Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses
• Set the Fluids method is set to simulate fluid

Define “Outflow” Key Points

Once the tanks have been defined in the Room definition wondow, define appropriate Key Points that are
“Outflow” points linked to the tanks. For a rectangular tank spilling from a completely open top, you could
put 4 points on each of the corners; otherwise specify the location of the outflow point from the tank. (The
three columns: “Flood from”, “Intact” and “Damage” have no effect for “Outflow” key points).

The last column of the KeyPoints table “Flow into Tank when immersed” is only applicable to “Outflow” Key
points. This allows the option of refilling the Tank to the height of the outside seawater level if the lowest
Outflow point is immersed. Note that the fluid refilling the tank is the same as that specified for the tank in
the Loadcase –it is not refilling with seawater. This is because it is not possible to mix or have multiple fluids

Page 108
Chapter 3 Using Stability

in a single tank; also it is filling (added mass) not flooding/damage (lost buoyancy) that is being modelled in
this situation.

“Outflow” keypoint specification

Effect of “Flow into Tank when Immersed” option:

When not selected (left) tank will continue to spill even if below external seawater level
When selected (right) tank will refill upto external seawater level (but with fluid as specified in loadcase)

Spilling Tank example

Initial tank loading as specified in the loadcase is 60%

Page 109
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Initial tank loading of 60% specified in loadcase

Perform a Large Angle Stability analysis for the vessel. After the analysis has completed, you can use the
Condition pull-down in the Results toolbar to select the view and data for a specific heel angle. In the Rooms
tab of the Results window, you will see the condition of the tank; the cargo columns will match the
corresponding datain the loadcase. In the example below, at the small heel angle of 10deg, the fluid level in
the tank has not yet reached the outflow points so the tank filling level is still at 60%.

Page 110
Chapter 3 Using Stability

At 10deg heel the fluid level does not spill and tank loading remain at 60%, as specified in loadcase
At higher heel angles (as show below) the fluid in the tank spills out so that the fluid level as at the height of
the lowest outflow point connected to that tank. In the example below the fluid level has spilled out so that
the tank is only 47% full – these data are shown in the Room results and the loadcase tables.

Note that each heel angle is considered independently so the fluid level depends only on the actual heel
angle considered (not a ny previuous heel angles).

Page 111
Chapter 3 Using Stability

At 40deg heel the fluid level reaches the outflow points and is spilt from the tank

Spilling is also applied to an Equilibrium analysis, as shown in the example below:

Page 112
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Spilling during an Equilibrium analysis

Conditional Flooding example

It is possible to conditionally flood Compartments, Non-Buoyant Volumes (NBV) and Tanks. Normally NBVs
are permanently flooded, this new feature makes it possible to flood the BNV only when a specific Key Point
is immersed. This feature can be used to model the flooding of a yacht’s cockpit for example. In the example
below, some of the cockpit volume is below the waterline, however it is not considered flooded because the
associated Key Points are not immersed. Then at 40deg heel the edge of the cockpit (modeled with a Key
Point) is immersed and the cockpit is considered flooded. This step at 40deg heel, can be seen in the plots of
trim and draft against heel angle:

Page 113
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Step in trim and draft at approximately 40deg heel as the cockpit floods
due to immersion of the cockpit edge Key Point.

Cockpit NBV conditional flooding:

Left – just prior to Key Point immersion at 39.8deg: Cockpit not flooded
Right – just after key Point immersion at 40.0deg: Cockpit flooded

In this example, four Conditional flooding Key Points have been defined around the edges cockpit. the Type
should be set to “Conditional flooding point” and they should be linked to the NBV which they will cause to
be flooded when immersed. Since the cockpit has straight edges, this is sufficient to define when flooding
will occur and capture the heel / trim combinations where seawater will start to slow into the cockpit. If you
wish to have stability criteria which use the immersion angle of these points, then you must add extra Key
Points at the same locations and assign them to the appropriate type (e.g. Immersion point).

Page 114
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Set up the Conditional flooding Key Points around the edges cockpit from which flooding can occur
Conditional flooding of Compartments and Tanks are very similar. The difference being that Tanks and
Compartments will also have to be selected as damaged in the current damage case to be flooded.
Conditional flooding, points to remember

There are a few special points to remember when using conditional flooding:

Conditional flooding will only apply to a room when one or more Conditinal Flooding Key
Points are “Linked to” a room. You may have several Conditional Flooding key points connected
to the same room (for example if there is a large opening – eg a yacht’s cockpit).

A Conditinal Flooding Key Point may only be linked to a single Room. If you want more Rooms
to flood when the same point is immersed, add more key points at the same location.

Rooms will display their normal behaviour if there are no linked Conditional Flooding points

For Rooms with linked Conditional Flooding points:

Non-buoyant: will only be flooded if linked Conditional Flooding points are immersed
Compartments and Tanks: will only be flooded if damaged in the current damage case and
linked Conditional Flooding points are immersed.

The mass of Tanks damaged in the current damage case are always removed from the
Loadcase, irrespective of whether the Tank is subject to Conditional Flooding. However, as with
the other Room types, the tank is only considered as damaged and having lost buoyancy if the
linked Conditional Flooding points are immersed.

Conditional Flooding: Multiple solution

Another very important thing to consider is that when conditional flooding flooding is applied there are
situations where several solutions to the vessel equilibrium are equally valid. Because Stability uses a
Newton-Raphson like iterative solver to find vessel equilibrium (with the possibility of one or more
constrained degrees of freedom) it is possible that it can converge on any one of the multiple valid solutions;
the one it will coverge on will depend on the exact starting point, the convergence tolerance etc. So you
might find, when doing a Large Angle Stability analysis for example, that depending on the heel angles
chosen you will get a different immersion angle of the key points. The effect is demonstrated in the graph
below, where for different runs of the same analysis the height of the Conditional Flooding Key Point above
the WL is plotted against heel angle. It may be seen that depending on the starting point for the iterations,
the angle at which the Key Point immerses is between about 23.5 and 24.7 degrees. In fact the immersion
angle depends on whether we start the iterations with the point immersed and the room flooded, which
leads to the emergence angle being 23.5 degrees; or if the iteration starts with the point above the WL and
the room not flooded in which case the immersion angle occurs later, at 24.7 deg.
Page 115
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Height of Conditional Flooding Key Point above WL vs heel angle

using several different heel angle ranges for the analysis
The situation gets even more complex if there are several rooms subjected to conditional flooding. For
example a coonditon may be investigated where the vessel has two rooms with conditional flooding: one
near the bow and one near the stern. In this situation there may be four equally correct solutions (depending
on the starting point of the iteration):
1. both flooding points above the WL and there is sufficient buoyancy for both points to stay above the
WL at equilibrium;
2. both points submerged: the lost buoyancy of the flooded rooms at each end of the vessel is just
sufficient for both points to be immersed;
3. aft point immersed: the lost buoyancy at the stern results in the bow point being above the WL with
the bow room not flooded
4. oppositeof 3 with the bow point immersed and loast buoyancy at the bow resulting in the stern
point being above the WL resulting in the corresponding room not being flooded

Modulus Points and Allowable Shears and Moments

The Modulus window can be used to enter maximum allowable shear forces and bending moments for each
section. One or more points can be entered in this window. Allowable shear force and/or bending moment
can be specified at each point. The modulus value is not currently used as deflections are not calculated.

To start a table of allowable shear forces and bending moments, bring the Modulus table to the front and
choose New Modulus Points from the File menu with the Modulus window frontmost. The allowable values
can be saved and recalled as text files by using Open and Save from the File menu. New allowable values can

Page 116
Chapter 3 Using Stability

be inserted by selecting Add from the Edit menu and entering a longitudinal position as well as an allowable
shear and/or moment.

Points may be added or deleted as required using the procedure described for the key points.

These allowable values are displayed as lines on the longitudinal strength graph.

Floodable Length Bulkheads

Bulkheads entered in the Input window are used for Floodable Length analysis in order to optionally plot the
compartment lengths in the floodable length graph for easy verification that the critical compartment
lengths are not exceeded.

The Bulkheads are automatically sorted by longitudinal position. For more information see Floodable Length
on page 154.

Stability Criteria

Stability criteria may be evaluated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and after an Equilibrium analysis.
Stability criteria are required to perform a limiting KG and Floodable Length analysis. Please refer to Chapter
4 Stability Criteria starting at page 257 for information on defining and selecting criteria.

SACS Cargo Import

In MOSES Stability only, topsides models defined in SACS may be imported into Stability. These are imported
(one per row) into the first table of the Loadcase window.

Use the Add command or Ctrl+A to open the Add Cargo dialog when in the Cargo table of the Loadase
window.

Joints 1 and 2 define the origin of the cargo. The x- and z-values or the cargo origin point are those of Joint
1; the y-value of the cargo origin point is the average of the y-values of Joints 1 and 2. The vector Joint1-
Joint 2 now defines the port-direction of the cargo and Joint 3 is used to define the horizontal plane and
longitudinal direction.

Page 117
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Once imported the cargo may be referenced in any loadcase. The location of the cargo can be modified in
the table entry, but to change the orientation, the cargo must be removed and then added with the new
joint references.

Page 118
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Analysis Types

After specifying the input values and checking the Stability model, the analysis can be performed. In this
section the different analysis types available in Stability will be described.

The following analysis types are available in Stability:

• Upright Hydrostatics
• Large Angle Stability
• Equilibrium Analysis
• Specified Conditions
• KN Values Analysis
• Limiting KG
• Floodable Length
• Longitudinal Strength
• Tank Calibrations
• MARPOL Oil Outflow
• Cross-Flooding
• Probabilistic Damage

Also, some general information is given on:

• Starting and Stopping Analyses
• Batch Analysis

The required analysis settings and environment options will be discussed separately and in more detail in the
next two sections of this chapter.

Following each analysis, one or more graphs may be shown – select the graph to be displayed from the pull-
down menu in the Graph window. The Data Format dialog can be used to specify what is displayed in some
graphs and tables; the available options depends on the current results table or graph:

Data format dialog for Upright hydrostatics table and graph

It is also possible to save the current Data Format setting making it very easy to revet back to a preferred or
standard layout; these files can be shared on other computers for consistent formatting on several
computers and also imported through the COM automation interface.

Page 119
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Upright Hydrostatics

Upright hydrostatics lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the hull at a range of drafts, at zero or
other fixed trim.

Choosing Upright Hydrostatics

Select Upright Hydrostatics from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Upright Hydrostatic Analysis Settings

The following analysis settings apply for Upright Hydrostatic Analysis:

• Draft from the Analysis menu, specify range of drafts for analysis
• Trim from the Analysis menu, you may specify a fixed trim for all drafts

A range of drafts for upright hydrostatic calculations can be specified using the Drafts command from the
Analysis menu.

Initial and final drafts can be entered, together with the number of drafts to be used. The Vertical Centre of
Gravity is also required for the calculation of GM etc (if the vessel is trimmed, the LCG also affects these
measurements).

When a design is first opened, the initial draft defaults to the draft at the DWL in Modeler. Similarly the VCG
defaults to the height of the DWL.

Upright Hydrostatics Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the upright hydrostatics analysis:

• Density from the Analysis menu
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar

Page 120
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Upright Hydrostatic Results

The curves of form are shown on a separate graph and the sectional area may be show for any of the drafts:
see Select View from Analysis Data on page 249.

Bonjean Curve Data

Bonjean curve data is calculated as part of a standard Upright Hydrostatics Analysis. Bonjean curves are
curves generated at station locations showing sectional area variation with draft. Bonjean curve data is

Page 121
Chapter 3 Using Stability

calculated at sections and drafts according to the Design Grid station locations and waterline locations. The
results are displayed in the Graph widow and the data may be accessed by double clicking the graph.

Large Angle Stability

Large angle stability lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the hull at a range of heel angles
either with or without trim or free-to-trim.

Choosing Large Angle Stability

Select Large Angle Stability from the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Large Angle Stability Settings

The following analysis settings apply for Large Angle Stability Analysis:
• Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window
• Heel from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis
• Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu

If criteria are being evaluated, the heel range and heel angle steps should be chosen accordingly, to ensure
accurate evaluation of the criteria.
Note:

You can select positive heel direction (port or starboard). However, you can enter negative
values and test full 360 degrees of stability if you wish. Some criteria require calculations of GZ
at negative heel. The criteria are only evaluated on the side of the graph that corresponds to
positive heel angles.

For example: when using a -180 to 180 heel range, the results may be two angles of vanishing
stability, the one that would be reported in the criteria would be the one with a positive heel
angle (even if the one at negative heel occurred at an angle closer to zero).
Page 122
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Also see: Heel on page 227 in the Analysis Settings section.

Large Angle Stability Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the large angle stability analysis:
• Fluid simulation of tank fluids centre of gravity
• Density
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar
• Stability Criteria
• Water on Deck (WoD) – Stockholm Agreement

Large Angle Stability Results

Large Angle Stability Analysis results are:

• Hydrostatic data table for each angle of heel
• GZ curve
• Dynamic stability (GZ area) curve
• Graph of hydrostatic parameters against heel angle
• Graph of max. safe steady heel angle
• Stability Criteria evaluation
• Downflooding angles to key points, deck edge and margin line
• Freeboard of key points, deck edge and margin line at each non-negative heel angle
• Curve of areas at each heel angle

Tabulated GZ and hydrostatics

Page 123
Chapter 3 Using Stability

GZ curve with criteria curves (if applicable)

Tabulated immersion and freeboard data

Dynamic stability Graph
A graph of the GZ area integrated from upright may be plotted, features such as
downflooding angle are also included on the graph.
Curve of Areas
Shows the curve of areas for the currently selected heel angle (use Display | Select view
from data to chose the heel angle from the GZ results table).
Large Angle stability Graph; Curves of Form;
Shows the variation of hydrodynamic properties with heel angle.
Graph of maximum safe steady heeling angles for sailing vessels
These calculations are derived from the value of GZ at a critical heel angle, for example
the angle of downflooding or angle of deck edge immersion.

Once a GZ curve has been calculated, you can display the maximum safe heeling angle
curves by selecting the graph type in the pull-down menu.

Page 124
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The parameters for the calculation can be modified in the Display | Data Format dialog
(this graph must be selected in the topmost window):

Page 125
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Analysis options for the calculation of Maximum steady heel angles (Display | Data Format).
The first part of the dialog is almost exactly the same as the “Angle of equilibrium -
derived wind heeling arm” criterion. This allows you to specify the critical condition that
should not be exceeded due to a gust or squall. MCA require downflooding but you can
include additional criteria if desired. You can also change the shape of the heeling arm
curve and the gust ratio.

In the lower-left, you can specify the squall wind speeds (you can add any number) The
default gives three wind speeds of 30, 45 and 60kts. Finally you can adjust the axis limits.
This is because normally you will have computed a GZ curve for a wider heel range than
you would wish to display in this graph – it is uncommon to sail a vessel with a steady
heel angle of greater than 40 degrees.

It can often be useful to duplicate this criterion in the GZ criteria that are evaluated. This
will give you the same result as for the gust limiting line.

Page 126
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The same safe angle of heel to prevent downflooding in the event of a gust (16.5 deg) is found.
To obtain smooth curves, the GZ curve should be calculated at small intervals of heel,
especially at the lower heel angles – typically steps of 1degree. Under some
circumstances, it may not be possible to evaluate the curves, the most common reason
for this is that the GZ curve has not been calculated up to a sufficiently high angle of heel
and downflooding angle cannot be found.

Full details of the calculations can be found in:

Page 127
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Sailing Yacht Design: Practice. ed. Claughton, Wellicome and Shenoi. Adison Wesley
Longman 1998. ISBN 0-582-36857-X

STABILITY INFORMATION BOOKLET available from the MCA. [Link]

Stability Criteria Evaluation

The criteria results are displayed in the Criteria tab in the results window. For more
information on how to customize the display of the criteria results, please refer to the
Results Window on page 281 in the reference section.
Important:

For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria, see: Important
note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 358.
Downflooding Angle
After a Large Angle Stability analysis, the Key Points Data table lists the downflooding
angles of the margin line, deck edge and defined Key Points. In addition, the first
downflooding point is marked on the large angle stability graph. Only the positive
downflooding angles are displayed, hence if there is any asymmetry, the large angle
stability analysis should be carried out heeling both to starboard and to port. For the
margin line and deck edge the longitudinal position at which immersion first occurred is
provided.

Downflooding points that are linked to tanks or compartments that are damaged in the
currently selected damage case, will be ignored when computing the downflooding
angle. These downflooding points will appear italicised, and an asterisk (*) is postfixed to
the downflooding point’s name in the Key Point Data table of the Results window.

Emergence angles of the key points is also calculated – this is where they cross the
waterline in an upward direction to become dry; as opposed to the immersion angle
which is when the cross the waterline in a downward direction, becoming wet.

A downflooding angle of zero degrees indicates that the key point is immersed at zero
degrees of heel.

Also see:
Select View from Analysis Data on page 249.

Page 128
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Water on Deck – Stockholm Agreementt

Water on deck – Introduction

Water on Deck (WoD) requirements as described by the Stockholm Agreement may only be applied when
doing Large Angle Stability analysis. During the development of this analysis capability, reference has been
made to the following documents as well as direct correspondence with the MCA:

Agreement Concerning Specific Stability Requirements for Ro-Ro Passenger Ships Undertaking Regular
Scheduled International or Domestic Voyages between European Ports: MCA MSN 1790(M) –which
supersedes MSN1673(M).
[Link]

Guidance Notes On The Stockholm Agreement SLF 40/Inf.14 ANNEX 1

[Link]

Water on deck – Technical Explanation

The effect of water on deck is calculated, in Stability, using the procedure outlined below:

For a range of heel angles, the vessel is balanced to the loadcase displacement. Any damaged areas of the
hull below the waterline are treated as lost buoyancy. These areas also include the areas where water on
deck is specified but are below the waterline. The user may decide whether the vessel should be free-to-trim
(i.e. the vessel is trimmed so that the rotated CG aligns longitudinally with the CB) or the vessel is held at a
specified fixed trim and this longitudinal balance is not performed.

At each heel angle, the vessel is balanced without the effect of water on deck (i.e. hull mass –as specified in
the loadcase– is balanced against hull buoyancy and the longitudinal positions of the CG and CB are aligned
if the user has selected a free-to-trim analysis). The minimum freeboard, within the specified damage extent,
is then obtained with the vessel in this condition and used to determine the height of water on deck in the
areas that the user has specified as accumulating water on deck.

The mass and centre of gravity of the water on deck is computed. Note that no further balance of hull mass
vs hull buoyancy or CG vs CB is performed at this point. The modified vessel centre of gravity, CG*, due to the
additional mass of water on deck is then computed as follows:

where: CGWoD is the centre of gravity of the accumulated water-on-deck; CG is the centre of gravity of the
vessel without water-on-deck; MWoD is the mass of the accumulated water-on-deck; and M is the mass of the
vessel without water on deck.

The modified righting arm is computed by adjusting the original righting arm (without water on deck) by an
amount corresponding to the transverse shift of the centre of gravity:

and the metacentric height is modified by the vertical shift.

Given that y is positive to starboard and z is positive up and the vessel is heeling to starboard.

The GM value is also modified to account for the transverse second moment of area of the WoD free-surface
(using the vessel displacement, without including the mass of WoD). GZ is not modified because the actual
centre of gravity of the WoD is calculated at each heel angle (similar to the "Simulate Fluid Movement"
option for normal tanks).
Page 129
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Change in GZ due to water on deck

In Stability only the modified CG, GZ and GM due to the accumulated water on deck are computed. Neither
the displacement nor any other hydrostatic parameters are modified nor is the vessel orientation (sinkage
and trim) adjusted to take account of the water on deck.

Water on deck – Using the Water on Deck analysis in Stability

The following section describes how to use the Water on Deck option in Stability.

Specifying Water on Deck

Currently the water on deck (WoD) option may be applied only to the Large Angle stability analysis. The
WoD option is an "Environment modifier" similar to the application of a Waveform. To turn on the WoD
option. Select "Water on Deck" from the Analysis menu or toolbar:

Water on Deck menu item in the Analysis menu and corresponding WoD dialog.
In the WoD dialog you can specify whether WoD should be applied and if so, the significant wave height.
The significant wave height to be used depends on the sea-area in which the vessel is operating and is used
(along with the freeboard) to compute the height of the WoD to be applied. It is possible to choose whether
the height of water on deck to be applied should be calculated from the minimum freeboard at each
individual heel angle or from the minimum freeboard of the vessel at equilibrium.

If the freeboard at equilibrium option is used, then the same vessel trim constraint specified for the Large
Angle Stability analysis is used for finding the equilibrium condition (i.e. if fixed trim is specified for the Large

Page 130
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Angle Stability analysis, fixed trim is also used for the equilibrium calculation and the longitudinal CG vs CB
balance is not satisfied).

The height of the water on deck is applied measured from the highest of either the waterline or the actual
minimum freeboard point at the current heel angle. (i.e. if the heeled minimum freeboard point is immersed,
the height of water on deck is applied above the waterline and the immersed part of the water on deck room
is considered as flooded lost buoyancy). See the example below with a calculated height of water on deck of
0.368m.

Heeled minimum freeboard point is above the waterline so height of water on deck is applied from the
heeled minimum freeboard point

Heeled minimum freeboard point is below the waterline so height of water on deck is applied from the
waterline

Specifying areas where WoD is to be applied

Stability uses normal compartments (and tanks) to specify the areas of the vessel which are subject to water
on deck. When the WoD option is turned on (see above) the display in the damage window will be modified.
The longitudinal extents of damage are now displayed and instead of displaying check-boxes to select
damaged areas, text is used to specify Intact, Damaged or WoD areas (only the first letter is required when
modifying entries).

Page 131
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Enhanced Damage window when WoD analysis is selected

When entering the extents of damage in the table, the damage status of tanks is not modified. If the dialog is
used (Case | Extent of Damage), all the extents may be specified and the damage status of tanks and
compartments for the selected damage case will be updated depending on whether or not they are inside
the rectangle defined by the damage extents. The fore and aft limits of the damage extent define the SOLAS
damage length and it is the minimum freeboard in this range which is used to determine the height of the
WoD. The extents of damage can be displayed by turning on the display of the Damage Zones. WoD areas
are also treated as damaged and show in the color of other damaged areas. The damage extent box is only
shown when the vessel is at the DWL (i.e. not during analysis).

Extents of damage (thick line) and damaged areas (red)

Specifying freeboard calculation points

Due to the fairly complicated rules dictating the effective deck edge of WoD areas to be used for measuring
the residual freeboard, Stability uses a new type of Key points to define the location at which the freeboard
should be calculated. These are defined in the Key Points table:

Page 132
Chapter 3 Using Stability

WoD freeboard Key Points used to specify the freeboard deck height
The WoD freeboard key points are defined in the same way as other key points but should be linked to the
compartments they define the deck for. You can define as many as required, depending on the hull
curvature, but a minimum of two is recommended: one at the forward and one at the aft end of the
compartment. As with other key points these are asymmetrical and it will be necessary to define key points
on both sides of the vessel if the compartment is symmetrical. It is now possible to transversely snap Key
points to the hull: simply specify the longitudinal and vertical coordinates, then select the rows of the key
points you wish to snap and use the "Analysis | Snap margin line (or selected key points) to hull" command. If
the margin line window is selected, then the whole margin line will snapped to the hull.

When the analysis is started, Stability will automatically linearly interpolate extra points at the forward and aft
extents of the damage and add these to the list of points used to find the minimum freeboard. The points
used for determining the minimum freeboard are drawn in circles instead of crosses, see below:

Extra freeboard points are interpolated automatically at the ends of the extent of damage.
The points used to determine the minimum freeboard are shown with circles instead of crosses.

Page 133
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Water on deck information during analysis

During the analysis several additional items of information are displayed. First a dashed line shows the
minimum freeboard. A second solid line of the same color shows the height of WoD which has been applied.
In addition, the centroid of the added mass of the water on deck and the lost buoyancy of any immersed
damaged areas of each compartment are shown; the WoD centroid has "WoD" appended to the name of the
compartment and the flooded volume has "LostB". The overall centre of gravity of the total WoD is show and
labelled "WoD"; the modified centre of gravity of the vessel is also show, and is labelled "CG WoD"

Additional information shown in the drawing window

Height of water on deck

The vertical position of the water on deck waterline is the greater of the “height of water on deck” added to:
a) the waterline;
b) the water on deck critical freeboard point (the lowest of the water on deck freeboard
points)

hw measured from the waterline when freeboard points are immersed

Page 134
Chapter 3 Using Stability

hw measured from the lowest freeboard point when not immersed

Water on deck results

With WoD applied, the GZ graph shows the modified GZ curve in addition to the normal GZ curve if desired
(see Data | Data Format dialog)

The WoD data may also be included in the GZ tabulated results:

Large Angle Stability results with new WoD results displayed.

Page 135
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Stability criteria and Water on Deck

An additional check box has been added to the criteria dialog. This allows the user to specify that criteria
should be evaluated and use the WoD-adjusted GZ curve. If WoD is select, damage will also be selected
since WoD is only available for non-intact cases.

Criteria that have the WoD option selected will only be evaluated if WoD is active and will use the WoD-
adjusted GZ curve; if criteria should also be evaluated using the normal (unadjusted) GZ curve, copies of the
criteria, without the WoD option selected, should be made.

Page 136
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Water on Deck option for Stability Criteria; Criteria selected for WoD use the adjusted GZ curve

Volume of Water on Deck

The volume of water on deck in the compartments selected for WoD, as well as any flooded volumes of
these and damaged compartments, are given in the new "Compartments" table in the Results window; use
the pull-down toolbar to select the heel angle to be viewed – see following section for more details.

Page 137
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The volume of WoD and lost buoyancy is given in the Compartments table in the Results window
When rooms are made up of multiple linked sub-rooms, the first line shows the total for the complete room
in brackets with the individual components listed below. This will be soon changed to show a completely
separate row for the total room and below all the individual room components in grey.

Rooms with linked components

Page 138
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Equilibrium Analysis

Equilibrium analysis lets you determine the draft, heel and trim of the hull as a result of the loads applied in
the table in the Loadcase window. The analysis can be carried out in flat water or in a waveform.

Choosing Equilibrium Analysis

Select Equilibrium from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu.

Equilibrium Analysis Settings

• Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window

Also see:
Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18

Equilibrium Analysis Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the Equilibrium analysis:

• Fluid simulation of tank fluid centre of gravity
• Density
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar
• Grounding (if any)
• Criteria

Equilibrium Results

Equilibrium Results are:

• Hydrostatic data
• Freeboard of key points, deck edge and margin line
• Criteria evaluation
• Wave phase animation
• Curve of areas

Page 139
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Hydrostatic data
Height/freeboard above free surface
The freeboard of each Key Point is also calculated. The freeboard is for the vessel
condition currently displayed in the Design view and is recalculated after each Equilibrium
and Specified Conditions analysis. The freeboard calculated is the vertical distance of the
Key Point above the local free surface; hence the local free surface height if a waveform is
selected will be taken into account.

Freeboard of key points.

Negative freeboards, i.e. where the Key Points are immersed are displayed in red. The
longitudinal positions at which the minimum freeboard for the margin line and deck edge
occurred are also specified.
Stability Criteria Evaluation
The criteria results are displayed in the Criteria tab in the results window.

Page 140
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Equilibrium Animation in Waves

If performed in conjunction with analysis in waves, the Equilibrium analysis will
automatically phase-step the waveform through a complete wavelength. This gives ten
columns of results, one for each position of the wave crest. If necessary the results of this
phase stepping can be animated giving a simple, quasi-static simulation of the hull
motion in waves (Display | Animate).
Note:

This simulation only includes static behaviour at each wave phase, and does not cover dynamic
or inertial forces. This can be done using Seakeeper.

Equilibrium Concept

The definition of equilibrium is “Position or state where object will remain if undisturbed”. You can
distinguish equilibrium into two types:
• Stable, when disturbed the object will return to its equilibrium position
• Unstable, when disturbed the object will not return to its equilibrium position

Stable equilibrium Unstable equilibrium

With ships, an unstable equilibrium can exist when the KG > KM, i.e. the centre of gravity is above the
metacentre (negative GMt). In real world a ship in unstable equilibrium will roll from the upright unstable
equilibrium position to a position of stable equilibrium and assume an “angle of loll”. Since Stability starts
the equilibrium analysis in upright position, it has no way of determining whether the equilibrium is stable or
unstable. This means that unstable equilibrium may be found instead of the stable equilibrium. Therefore it is
recommend to check the value of GMt yourself after doing an equilibrium analysis or perform a Large Angle
Stability analysis and look at the slope of the GZ curve through the equilibrium heel angle.

Page 141
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Unstable equilibrium

Stable equilibrium
”Angle of loll”

The graph above shows the results of a Large Angle Stability analysis for a vessel with negative initial GMt. In
practice this vessel would have a loll angle of approximately 25 degrees. If an equilibrium analysis is
performed for this vessel with the transverse arm set to zero, Stability will find the unstable equilibrium
position with zero degrees of heel.

In practice, it is desirable to find the stable equilibrium position. To do this, first ensure that the tolerances
(Edit | Preferences) are set as sensitive as possible. This will ensure that the smallest possible heeling moment
is required to find stable equilibrium position. Then create a very small heeling moment by offsetting one of
the weight items in the loadcase window TCG by just a fraction. The equilibrium analysis will now find the
stable equilibrium position.
Note:

It is good practice to always perform a Large Angle Stability analysis as well as the equilibrium
analysis to check if the vessel is in stable or unstable equilibrium. This is most likely to occur if
the VCG is too high and the vessel has negative GM when upright. The problem can be
overcome by offsetting the weight of the vessel transversely by a small amount.

Specified Conditions

Specified Condition analysis lets you determine the hydrostatic parameters of the vessel by specifying the
heel, trim and immersion. Heel can be specified by either the angle of heel or the TCG and VCG. Trim can be
specified by the actual trim measurement, or the LCG and VCG. Immersion can be specified by either the
displacement or the draft.

Choosing Specified Conditions

Select Specified Conditions from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Specified Conditions Settings

The settings required for Specified Condition analysis are:

Page 142
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Specified Conditions from the Analysis menu

Three Sets of variables are provided, labelled Heel, Trim and Immersion. One choice must be made from
each of these groups. Stability will then solve for the vessel hydrostatics at the conditions specified.

Values from the current loading condition can be inserted into the Centre of Gravity and Displacement fields
by clicking on the Get Loadcase Values button.

Also see:
Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18
Specified Conditions on page 231 in the Analysis Settings section.
Note:

If the fluid simulation has been turned on in a previous analysis mode, then the VCG obtained
from the loadcase will not include the free surface correction; the “Get Loadcase Values” button
will return exactly the displacement and CG as displayed in the current loadcase window.
The specified condition analysis itself ignores tank fillings and does no correction to VCG.

Specified Conditions Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the Specified Condition analysis:

• Density
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar

Specified Conditions Results

The specified conditions results are the same as equilibrium analysis results except that criteria are not
evaluated, i.e. hydrostatic data and key points freeboard are calculated.

KN Values Analysis

KN Values Analysis allows you to determine the hydrostatic properties of the hull at a range of heel angles
and displacements to produce the cross curves of stability diagram.

Page 143
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Choosing KN Values Analysis

Select KN Values from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

KN Values Analysis Settings

The analysis settings required for KN Values analysis are:

• Heel from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis
• Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu
• Displacement from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis and specify estimate of VCG if known

The heel angles used may differ from those used in the Large Angle Stability and Limiting KG analyses. To set
the range of angles, select Heel from the Analysis menu.

A range of displacements for KN calculations can be specified using the Displacement command from the
Analysis menu. Initial and final displacements can be entered, together with the number of displacements
required.

Displacement range dialog

Trim dialog
Page 144
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The VCG can also be entered (specified from the vertical zero datum). Traditionally, KN calculations are
calculated assuming the VCG at the baseline (K). However if the analysis is being calculated free-to-trim and
an estimate of the VCG is known, the accuracy of the KN calculations (for VCGs in the vicinity of the
estimated VCG) may be improved by calculating the GZ curve using the estimated VCG position – this will
reduce the error in the trim balance due to the vertical separation of CG and CB because this vertical
separation is specified more accurately than simply assuming the VCG at the baseline.

If a VCG estimate is specified, the KN values are still presented in the normal manner with the KN values
calculated as follows:
KN(φ) = GZ(φ) + KG_estimated sin(φ)

For information on Trim settings for KN Analysis, see: Trim on page 228

Also see
KN Value Concepts on page 146

KN Values Analysis Environment Options

• Density
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar

KN Values Analysis Results

KN curves calualated at each heel angle

Page 145
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Immersion angles calculated at each displacement

Key Point immersion angles as function of displacement during KN analysis

KN Value Concepts

The righting lever, GZ, may be calculated from the KN cross curves of stability (at the desired displacement)
for any specified KG using the following equation: .
GZ = KN - KG sin(φ)

Page 146
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note:

Z
G

B’
B
N
K

KN values can also be referred to as “Cross curves of stability”.

Limiting KG

Limiting KG analysis allows you to analyse the hull at a range of displacements to determine the highest
value of KG that satisfies the selected stability criteria. GZ curves are calculated for various KG values. After
each cycle, the selected criteria are evaluated to determine whether the CG may be raised or must be
lowered.

When comparing the results of a limiting KG analysis to that of a Large Angle Stability analysis, it is essential
that the same heel angle intervals are used and that the free-to-trim options and CG are the same. Some
criteria, notably angle of maximum GZ, are extremely sensitive to the heel angle intervals that have been
chosen.

Choosing Limiting KG

Select Limiting KG from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Limiting KG Settings

The initial conditions required for Limiting KG analysis are:

• Displacement from the Analysis menu, select range for analysis
• Heel from the Analysis menu, select range for calculation of GZ curves
• Trim (fixed or free) from the Analysis menu

The range of displacements to be used is set in the same way as they are set in the KN analysis.

The heel angles used may differ from those used in the Large Angle Stability and KN analyses. To set the
range of angles, select Heel from the Analysis menu. See Large Angle Stability on page 122 for further
details.

For information on Trim settings for Limiting KG Analysis, see: Trim on page 228

Page 147
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note:

Since Limiting KG can be quite a time consuming analysis, you may wish to use a smaller
number of heel angles than for the Large Angle Stability calculations. (However this will cause
some loss of accuracy.)

Limiting KG calculations will be significantly faster if the trim is fixed.

Limiting KG Environment Options

• Density
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar
• Criteria

Limiting KG Results

Limiting KG analysis results are

• Limiting KG values, for each displacement and the limiting criterion.
• Limiting KG vs displacement graph

The Limiting KG value is measured from the baseline, which is not necessarily the same as the zero point. As
well as the limiting KG, the minimum GM, draft amidships, trim and centre of gravity are given in the results
table.

The Limiting KG analysis also checks that any selected equilibrium based criteria are passed at each VCG that
it tries. However, you must still have at least one Large Angle Stability criterion selected.

Criteria are only evaluated on the positive side of the GZ curve, so if there is any form of asymmetry, it may
be necessary to run the analysis heeling the vessel to both starboard and port (this can be done
automatically in the Batch Analysis).

Page 148
Chapter 3 Using Stability

After a Limiting KG analysis has completed, the results in the Criteria results table display “Not Analysed”, this
is because they do not necessarily refer to the final KG and would be misleading. If you require the limiting
KG for each criterion individually or wish to perform a Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analysis at each
of the displacements and the corresponding limiting KG, this can be done in the Batch Analysis.

Some criteria may depend on the vessel displacement and or vessel’s VCG. Where these values are explicit in
the criterion’s definition in Stability, the correct values of displacement and VCG will be used in the
evaluation of these criteria. However, problems can arise if the criterion is only available in its generic form –
most commonly heeling arm criteria where the heeling arm is specified simply as a lever and not as a
moment. In this case, since the heeling arm is not related to the vessel displacement in its definition within
Stability, the heeling arm will remain constant for all displacements (where it is perhaps desired that the
heeling arm should vary with displacement. For example in the case where the heeling moment, rather than
the heeling arm is constant).
Important:

For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria see Important note:
heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 358.
Also see:
Convergence Error on page 232 in the Analysis Settings section.

Limiting KG Concepts

Stability will iterate to a KG value that just passes all criteria you have specified in the criteria dialog. Stability
will start with a set start KG value (e.g. 1 meter), run a large angle stability analysis and check the selected
criteria. If any of the criteria fail, Stability will lower the KG and try again. If the criteria pass, Stability will raise
the KG value and try to make the criteria fail. Stability will continue doing this until the limiting KG value has
been iterated to within 0.1mm. If this tolerance is not achieved in a certain number of iterations, Stability will
move on to the next displacement.

When performing a Limiting KG analysis, Stability will evaluate any equilibrium-based criteria that are
selected for testing and act accordingly. However, at least one GZ-based criterion must also be selected. This
is because to perform a sensible search, Stability must have at least one criterion that will improve by
reducing the VCG; Stability assumes that raising the VCG will make criteria more likely to fail and that
reducing the VCG will make the criteria more likely to pass. This is not necessarily the case for equilibrium-
Page 149
Chapter 3 Using Stability

based criteria such as freeboard requirements or for GZ-based criteria such as Angle of maximum GZ; if only
these types of criteria are selected, Stability may have difficulty in finding a true limiting KG and specify
convergence errors.

Limiting KG for damage conditions with initially loaded tanks

The set up of the Limiting KG analysis parameters has been modified to facilitate setting up the required TCG
when calculating the Limiting KG for a damaged vessel where liquid cargo tanks initially carrying cargo or
ballast water are damaged.

Stability assumes that damaged tanks lose all liquid cargo or ballast that they may have been carrying and
their buoyancy is lost from the vessel – analysis is done by the lost buoyancy method rather than the added
mass method.

For Limiting KG calculations for a damaged vessel where some of the damaged tanks were initially non-
empty, it is often required to specify a required TCG. This is because under most circumstances, the intact
vessel is upright (zero heel). The tanks would generally provide a transverse moment that must be balanced
by the mass of the vessel, which must therefore be offset. Note that we are only concerned about the tanks
that will be damaged and that initially contain cargo or ballast; this is because when they are damaged the
ballast or cargo is assumed to be totally lost from the vessel. (Although seawater enters these damaged
areas, this is not seen as an additional mass because damage is computed by the lost buoyancy method.)

Two methods of specifying the required TCG are possible. The second method was available in older versions
of Stability and it is the first method that provides the additional functionality:
1. Current loadcase specifies initial loading of damaged tanks: This means that the
currently selected Loadcase will be used to define the volume of cargo or ballast in
tanks before damage is applied. If this method is selected Stability will look at the mass
and CG of cargo or ballast in tanks which will be damaged during the analysis. This is
used to compute required TCG. Note that all results and input data will be assumed to
be for the intact vessel. That is the specified displacement will be that of the intact
vessel and that the resulting LCG, TCG and KG will also be for the intact vessel. If the
vessel has an off-centre intact TCG, this can be specified below (if the vessel is
symmetrical and initially upright, this should be zero).
2. The second option is for the used to specify the required TCG directly. This functionality
has been in Stability for many years. In this case, however the specified displacement
and CG corresponds to that of the intact vessel with damaged tanks empty. i.e. the
mass and CG of the intact vessel after deducting the masses of cargo or ballast in any
tanks that will be damaged.

Example calculations

It is probably simplest to explain this functionality by means of an example.

The following sample calculations demonstrate how the new Limiting KG options may be used. A vessel with
a port-side tank that are initially full will have this tank damaged. We wish to find the maximum VCG that the
intact vessel may have in order to pass the selected stability criteria.

Page 150
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Initial tank loadings

First we need to define how much cargo is in the tanks that will be damaged. This is done by defining a
loadcase and switching to the intact mode to specify the tank filling levels. Here we have specified that the
tank is 80% full before the damage is applied.

Use a loadcase to specify the initial quantities of fluids in tanks

Setting the Displacements

Secondly we need to define the displacement range we wish to calculate the Limiting KG for. This is done in
the Displacements dialog:

Displacement dialog

Setting the Trim options

We now need to specify the trim options we wish to use. In this case we shall use free to trim, but with an
initial vessel trim of 0.25m by the stern. Importantly we shall also specify that the current loadcase should be
used to determine the required TCG and because the vessel is symmetrical, the specified TCG is zero:

Page 151
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Trim and TCG specification

Running the Analysis

We now need to select the damage case to be evaluated, the stability criteria that need to be passed and a
suitable range of heel angles to be computed to evaluate the criteria. We also need to determine which way
we should heel the vessel and in doubt should try heeling the vessel in both directions to see which will give
the worst result. In this case large port-side tanks are to be damaged; these are filled significantly above the
waterline so loss of ballast from these tanks will cause a list to Starboard, so the analysis should be done in
this direction.

Results from Limiting KG analysis

Limiting KG results

Validation of results

The results can be validated by completing a Large Angle Stability analysis with the specified displacement
and CG. It must be remembered that these are KG results not VCG so when checking the VCG must be
calculated. In this case the baseline (K) is at –356.845mm

Page 152
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Model baseline

Computed VCG values

We can now set up a loadcase for one of the displacements. Remember that these are the intact vessel
displacement and CG:

Loadcase to check calculated Limiting KG

When the analysis is run, it can be seen that (as expected) the stability criterion is passed with a very small
margin.

Page 153
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Criterion is passed with a small margin

Floodable Length

The Floodable Length analysis allows you to calculate the longitudinal distribution of maximum length of
compartments that can be flooded with the vessel still passing specified equilibrium criteria. The results are
presented as the maximum length of compartment plotted (or tabulated) against the longitudinal position of
the compartment’s centre. Traditionally the criterion of margin line immersion is used to compute the
Floodable Length curve. The Floodable Length may be computed for a range of displacements and
compartment permeabilities.

Choosing Floodable Length

• Select Floodable Length from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Floodable Length Analysis Settings

The initial conditions required for Floodable Length analysis are:

• Trim (free-to-trim, either initial trim or specified LCG)
• Displacement, select range and specify VCG
• Permeability, select range
• Bulkhead location (if applicable)

1. The analysis is always carried out free-to-trim, but the centre of gravity can either be
specified directly in the Trim dialog or it is computed from the specified initial trim. For
information on Trim settings for Floodable Length Analysis, see: Trim on page 228.

The range of displacements to be used is set in the same way as they are set in the KN and Limiting KG
analyses. The VCG must also be specified since the Floodable length analysis is very sensitive to accurate trim
calculations. This means that the vertical separation of CG and CB is accounted for in the trim balance.

The permeability dialog is used to specify the permeabilities to be used for the Floodable Length analysis;
the permeability is applied over the entire length of the vessel and is also applied to the free-surface when
calculating the reduction of waterplane area and inertia.

Page 154
Chapter 3 Using Stability

This permeability is unrelated to the permeability when defining compartments and is only used for
floodable length calculations.

Floodable Length Environment Options

• Density
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage: no damage case may be selected as this is automatically defined by the analysis. The Intact
condition is automatically selected and the Damage toolbar is disabled
• Criteria from the Analysis menu, select which criteria should be evaluated

Criteria must be specified from the analysis menu. These are used to compute the Floodable Lengths.

Note that internally, Stability will treat the vessel sinking or the trim exceeding +/-89º as a criterion failure.

Floodable Length results

The results of the analysis are given in tabulated format at the stations defined in the Modeler Design Grid as
well as graphical format. The tabulated data is linearly interpolated from the graphical data. (The raw graph
data can be accessed by double clicking the graph.)

There are several graph plot options available in the Data | Data format dialog (when the floodable length
graph is topmost). The vessel profile (centreline buttock) may also be displayed. All compartment standards
up to the maximum specified will be plotted.

Page 155
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Floodable lengths graph options:

• Fix the y-axis so that it is the same scale as the x-axis.
• Plot the different compartment standards up to a specified maximum value.
• Vessel profile (shown in light grey)
• Floodable Length Bulkheads locations are specified in a table in the Input window. The graph updates in
real time as you adjust the bulkhead locations so once you have calculated the floodable lengths, you
can quickly adjust the bulkhead locations so that the vessel meets the required compartment standard.

If the analysis is unable to find a condition where the vessel passes the selected criteria, the following dialog
will be displayed. The vessel sinking or the criteria failing in the intact condition could cause this.

Floodable Length Concepts

The analysis is performed by defining a flooded compartment, with the centre of the compartment at a
section under investigation. The length of this flooded compartment is increased section-by-section until
one of the criteria is failed. The compartment is then moved progressively forward along the vessel. This
process may be visualised by turning on the display of the Stability sections.

Page 156
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note: Speed versus Accuracy

The analysis will be both considerably more accurate and slower with a larger number of
sections in the Stability model; it is recommended that a minimum of 100 sections be used for
most situations.

The speed of the analysis can be increased quite considerably by increasing the allowable
tolerances in the Edit | Preferences dialog.

Longitudinal Strength

Longitudinal Strength lets you determine the bending moments and shear forces created in the hull due to
the loads applied in the Loadcase window. The analysis can be carried out in flat water or in a specified
waveform.

Choosing Longitudinal Strength

Select Longitudinal Strength from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Longitudinal Strength Settings

The initial conditions required for Longitudinal Strength analysis are:

• Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window
• Distributed loads using the Loadcase window

When the Longitudinal Strength analysis mode is selected, two extra columns appear in the Loadcase
window. These are used to specify the longitudinal extents of the load. A trapezium shaped distributed load
is derived from the centre and fore and aft extents of the load. See the Loadcase Longitudinally Distributed
Loads section on page 50 for more details.

Longitudinal Strength Environment Options

• Density
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage (or Intact) from the Analysis toolbar
• Grounding (if any)
• Criteria, allowable shears and moments from Input window

Page 157
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note

Stability will always use the fluid simulation method when performing a longitudinal strength
analysis. For more information on how Stability can take fluids in tanks into account see Fluids
Analysis Methods on page 233.

Longitudinal Strength Results

The output from the longitudinal strength calculations is a graph of mass, buoyancy, damage and non-
buoyant volumes and grounding loads. From these, the net load, shear force and bending moment along the
length of the hull are computed. If defined, allowable shear forces and bending moments are overlayed on
the graph.

Downward acting masses, such as normal masses in the loadcase or lost buoyancy due to damage, are given
positive values. Upward acting forces such as buoyancy and grounding reactions are given negative values.

Page 158
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Name of Curve Description

Mass Vessel mass / unit length
Buoyancy Buoyancy distribution / unit length = immersed cross sectional
area * density. Damaged tanks and compartments reduce the
buoyancy.
Grounding Grounding reaction
Damage/NBV Loas buoyancy due to damaged tanks and compartments and
Non-Byoyant Volumes (NBV)
Net Load Mass + Buoyancy + Grounding + Damage (and NBV)
Shear x
Shear Force =  NetLoad ( x)dx
AftSt

Moment x
Bending Moment = −  ShearForce ( x)dx
AftSt

Allowable shear Allowable shear and bending moments as specified in the input
and moment Modulus table.

This data is also displayed in the “Long. Strength” tab in the Results window. You can display
this table by choosing Longitudinal Strength from the Results sub-menu under the Window
menu; alternatively double-clicking in the graph will give you all the data as plotted.
Note

Make sure you have defined sections in your model in Modeler. Without this, the longitudinal
strength table will be empty.

Note:

For the purposes of strength calculations, any point loads in the loadcase will be applied as a
load evenly distributed 100mm either side of the position of the load.

Tanks are taken into account as distributed loads as well based on their mass distribution that is
calculated from the tank sections.

Tank Calibrations

Tank Calibration allows you to determine the properties of the tanks you have defined in the Compartment
window, at a range of capacities.

Page 159
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Choosing Tank Calibrations

Select Tank Calibrations from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Tank Calibration Input

• Tank definitions and boundaries

• Permeability
• Fluid type

The above data are specified in the Compartment and Sounding Pipes definition tables.

Also see:
Relative Density of Tank Fluids on page 67

Tank Calibration Settings

• Trim range, angle or trim measurement

• Heel angle range
• Which items to be calibrated: Analysis | Calibration options dialog

Analysis | Calibration options dialog: Compartments and Non-buoyant volumes may be calibrated if desired

Tank Calibration Environment Options

• Calibration intervals – see Sounding Pipes

Tank Calibration Results

If a range of heel (and / or trim) angles have been defined, you may select which are displayed in the results
table and graph using the Results toolbar. If Compartments or Non-buoyant volumes have also been
calibrated, they are shown in grey.

Page 160
Chapter 3 Using Stability

You may chose which columns are displayed using the Data Format dialog:

In the Window | Graphs menu each tank can be selected for display in the Graph window. For more
information see Chapter 5 Stability Reference.

Page 161
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Tank calibration calculations

A number of data are calculated for the tanks. These include the tank inertias about their centre of gravity,
the wetted surface area of the tank and the free-surface area.

The wetted surface area of the tank includes only that part of the tank that is wet by the fluid in it at the
corresponding sounding level, the top of the tank is only included when the tank is pressed-full.

The inertias are in fact “volume inertias” in that they are not multiplied by the density of the fluid in the tank.
The following notation is used:
x longitudinal-axis
y transverse-axis
z vertical axis

Page 162
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Calculation of tank inertias, where M and dm indicate an integration over the volume of fluid in the tank.

Sounding pipes and tank calibration results

If the vessel is trimmed, there are ranges of tank volumes that will show the same sounding/ullage. (The
same effect can occur if the sounding pipe does not reach the lowest or highest point in the tank –
remember that this can change as the vessel trims, which is effectively what is happening in the figures
below). These points occur when the tank is near empty or near full, see below (increasing the trim, will
exacerbate this phenomenon):

Figure a Figure b Figure c

Zero trim Trim by bow, near-empty tank Trim by bow, near-full tank

Figure a shows a sounding pipe that extends the whole height of the tank, with the vessel at zero trim. Here
all tank filling levels will have a valid sounding.

Figure b shows the vessel with (bow down) trim and a small amount of fluid in the tank. Here there will be a
range of tank filling levels which all show zero sounding.

Figure c shows the vessel with the same trim, but with the tank nearly full. Here there will be a range of tank
filling levels that all show maximum sounding.

These effects will be noted in the tank calibration results if they are extreme enough since Stability always
adds calibrations at 1%, 97.9%, 98% and 100% full; if the 1% level does not intersect the sounding pipe, the
sounding will be given as zero. Similarly if the 97.9%, 98% and 100% full levels do not intersect the sounding
pipe, the maximum sounding will be displayed, see below. In the results out lined in red, there are four
results which all have a sounding of 1.0m but different capacities – the fluid levels are all above the top of
the sounding pipe. In the blue results, the last two results are below the bottom of the sounding pipe, giving
soundings of 0.0m but different capacities (the last but one calibration point is the fluid remaining in the
tank when the sounding is 0.0m).
Page 163
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Tank calibrations for severely trimmed vessels; sounding pipe does not cover full range of tank capacities.
The profile view of the tank in the trimmed vessel is shown on the right; the sounding pipe is in the middle of
the tank and extends from the bottom to the top of the tank.
In a similar way, if the sounding pipe extends above or below the maximum and minimum fluid levels, you
will get readings which have the same capacity but different soundings.

Sounding intervals

The sounding intervals for the calibration table may be:

• Automatic,
• User defined
• Fredyn – {0%, 0.1%, 5%, 10%, … , 85%, 90%, 95%, 99.9%, 100%}
• Max. only – {100%}
In automatic mode the increments along the sounding pipe are chosen depending on the height of the tank
to give approximately 20 soundings. Alternatively you may specify a precise sounding step (this is the step
along the sounding pipe, not the vertical step of the tank level). Finally a “Fredyn” sounding list may be
generated, this gives intervals of {0%, 0.1%, 5%, 10%, … , 85%, 90%, 95%, 99.9%, 100%} of the full capacity of
the tank. To specify the interval, type “A”, “F”, “Max” or a numerical value in the “Calibration Spacing” column
of the Sounding Pipe definition table.
Note: Backward compatibility with earlier versions of Stability

If the model is saved with Fredyn calibration intervals and is loaded into an earlier version of
Stability, you must change the calibration intervals to Automatic or a positive value otherwise
Stability will crash during the tank calibration analysis.

Fredyn calibration intervals

The tank calibrations normally follow regular length intervals along the sounding pipe. A common sounding
pipe is used for “Fredyn tanks”, this sounding pipe starts at the vessel zero point and projects vertically
upwards; all soundings for “Fredyn tanks” use this common sounding pipe.

Page 164
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Fredyn sounding pipe

The tank calibration intervals required by Fredyn are (as a percentage of full capacity) {0.1, 5.0, 10.0, …, 90.0,
95.0, 99.9}. To use these intervals, type “Fredyn” in the Calibration Spacing column of the Sounding Pipes
Definition table:

Specification of Fredyn calibration intervals

Note that Compartments and non-buoyant volumes are always calibrated at the calibration intervals
required by Fredyn. If only the 100% full values are required “Max” may be specified for the calibratin
spacing.

MARPOL Oil Outflow

MARPOL probabilistic oil outflow calculation may be computed according to the following MARPOL
regulations:
Resolution MEPC.141(54), Regulation 12A: Oil fuel tank protection
Resolution MEPC.117(52), Regulation 23: Accidental oil outflow performance

Define the tanks in the Compartment definition window then choose the MARPOL analysis mode. Seltect the
Reolution and tanks to be included in the analysis in the MARPOL options (Analysis menu) dialog (see
below).

MARPOL Options dialog (Analysis menu)

The MARPOL options dialog allows the user to select the tanks that should be included in the analysis for
both MARPOL Regulations.

Page 165
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Tank selection for the MARPOL analysis

The list of selected tanks is different for both Regulations since Regulation 12A is for fuel tanks and
Regulation 23 applies to cargo tanks. Further each tank has the option for being included in the computation
for outflow due to side- and bottom-damage. When you select a Regulation with the radio buttons, the
corresponding list of selected tanks will be displayed in the grid.

MARPOL Tank measurements

If the “Update all tank measurements” check-box is ticked, then Stability will attempt to measure the
required tank parameters (over-writing any that have previously been manually edited).

Due to the nature of some of the measurements, it is not possible to guarantee that Stability will be 100%
accurate in interpreting the measurements as defined in the MARPOL documents, for this reason the user
should carefully review the values generated by Stability.

MARPOL Results and additional Input

Because the calculations of the MARPOL analysis are very quick they are done in real-time as input data is
edited by the user. For this reason the data input and results are combined in one table. The table is in the
MARPOL tab of the Results window:

Page 166
Chapter 3 Using Stability

MARPOL calculations: Results Window

The table is split into three parts: main Hull parameters, oil outflow due to Side damage and finally oil
outflow due to Bottom damage. Parameters that can be edited are shown in black; those which cannot are
shown in grey.

Main Hull Parameters

Different parameters are shown depending on the Regulation being used. Regulation 23 calculates the
nominal oil density as the deadweight divided by the total tank capacity; the deadweight is computed as the
difference in displacements between the deepest loadline draft and the lightship draft (or may be specified
directly). For Regulation 12A, the nominal fuel oil density is specified by the user, the default being
1000kg/m3. Furthermore the inert gas overpressure may be specified for Regulation 23.

The deepest loadline draft is taken as the DWL draft; the lightship draft is used to calculate the deadweight
for Regulation 23 and the partial draft, which affects bottom-damage outflow in Regulation 12A.

If a parameter is modified, it is possible to revert back to the Stability calculated value or default by typing ‘H’
or double clicking:

Reverting back to default/calculated parameter values

For full definitions of the parameters, please refer to the relevant IMO instruments.

Page 167
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Main hull parameters required for each Regulation

Tank Parameters

Calculations are shown further down; listing first side-damage tanks, then bottom-damage tanks. The user-
editable tank parameters are the main dimensions which affect the probability of damage. These should be
carefully checked since these can be difficult for Stability to automatically measure in some cases. For tanks
which are to be considered for both side- and bottom- damage, these values are linked so it is only
necessary to edit them in one location.
Note: Stability will overwrite user-edited tank parameters!

Remember that any data that you change manually will be overwritten by Stability if the
“Update all tank measurements” option is ticked in the MARPOL options dialog.
It is advisable to copy any manually edited data to a spreadsheet or text file if you only want to
update the measurements of some tanks.

For full definitions of the parameters, please refer to the relevant IMO instruments

Small tanks

MARPOL RESOLUTION MEPC.141(54), Regulation 12A – Oil fuel tank protection allows for the contribution of
small tanks to be excluded provided the total capacity of these small tanks is less than 600m 3; small tanks are
defined in 3.12.

Page 168
Chapter 3 Using Stability

It is now possible to exclude these tanks in Stability by specifying the maximum volume of “small tanks”.

Stability uses the geometric volume multiplied by the MARPOL permeability of 99% to calculate the
“maximum capacity” of the tank. Any tanks which are above this limit do not provide a contribution to the
calculated outflow parameter. The show “Small tank” in the OS.P(S) column along with their “maximum
capacity” (note that the loading volume is taken at 98% full).

Page 169
Chapter 3 Using Stability

There is no automatic check for the aggregate capacity of these excluded “small tanks”. However if it exceeds
the 600m3 limit, the user can reduce the capacity that defines “small tanks” to bring it under this limit.

Saving

With the MARPOL sheet active, the MARPOL data may be saved; it is also saved in the main .hmd file when
the design is saved.

Cross-Flood MSC.362(92)

The Cross-Flood analysis calculates the time to cross-flood and the vessel condition at specified time
intervals after the commencement of cross-flooding according to the IMO MSC.362(92) formulation.

As has been mentioned earlier in the section describing the setting up of the cross-flood devices, any room
which is to be cross-floodded from a dmaged room may have only one active cross-flooding connection
device entering it.

Choosing Cross-Flood

Select Cross-Flood from the Analysis Type option in the Analysis menu or toolbar.

Cross-Flood Analysis Settings

The following analysis settings apply for Cross-Flood Analysis:

• Displacement and Centre of Gravity using the Loadcase window
• List of intermediate cross-flood times at which the vessel condition should be calculated (Analysis |
Cross-Flood dialog)

Page 170
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Cross-Flood Analysis Environment Options

The following environments can be applied to the Cross-Flood analysis:

• Fluid simulation of tank fluid centre of gravity
• Density
• Wave Form (if any)
• Damage condition that specifies the initial damage on the vessel before cross-flooding commences; from
the Analysis toolbar
• Grounding (if any)

Specification of intermediate cross-flood stages

Cross-Flood Results

Cross-Flood Results are:

• Hydrostatic data: before and after cross-flooding and at any intermediate stages
• Time for complete cross-flooding of all the affected rooms
• Details of flooded rooms at all stages (Rooms results table)
• Curve of areas

Once the analysis has completed you will have a table that looks something like this:

We have the selected hydrostatics for the initial (before) and final (after) cross-flooding conditions in the first
few columns.

Then we have the data for all the cross-flood connections. Notice the pull-down results selection toolbar.
This will select which condition is displayed in the graphical view as well as which condition will be displayed
for the cross-flooding results data. Note that selecting either the After or Before cross-flood condition will
show the data and time (T_f) to reach the final condition of cross-flooding.

Page 171
Chapter 3 Using Stability

If an intermediate stage is selected, the graphical view will show this intermediate condition and the cross-
flood connection results will also be displayed for the selected condition. (You can do the same by selecting
one of the hydrostatics results columns and using Select View from Data button or menu)

In the example below we have chosen the middle intermediate condition and it can be seen the cross-flood
room (right on screen) is partially cross-flooded:

Notice also that the connection column titles have also changed. We now have:
• W_i which is the cross-flooded volume (note that this is equivalent to W_f – W_theta using IMO
notation);
• H_i which is the head from the partially cross-flooded waterplane to the exterior seawater waterplane
(this is the same as IMO H_theta)
• T_i is the elapsed time from start of cross-flooding (which is equivalent to T_f – T_theta in IMO notation –
T_theta being the time required to get to the final condition).

The results in the Key Points and Room tables and the Sectional Area graph all update as the condition is
changed.

Cross-Flood Concept

The analysis starts by performing an equilibrium analysis for the selected loadcase and initial damage case.
Then the rooms which will be cross-floodded are determined by examining the active cross-flood
connections which link rooms that are damaged in the initial damage case to intact rooms.

The final condition after complete cross-flooding is then computed by performing another equilibrium
analysis with the cross-floodded rooms considered as damaged (lost buoyancy). The time for complete
cross-flooding for each room is computed according to IMO MSC.362(92)

Intermediate stages are computed by simultaneously adjusting the partial flooding in each of the cross-
flooding rooms and performing an equilibrium analysis. The partial flooding volume in each cross-flooding
room is automatically adjusted to try to find the parameters which give the specified time after initial
damage according to IMO MSC.362(92) equations. Because the IMO MSC.362(92) method assumes that the
vessel does not heel, trim or sink during cross-flooding and that the cross-flooding rooms have constant
waterplane area with height, it is often the case for more general arrangements, that the algorithm has
difficulty finding the exact partial flooding levels that correspond to the specified time interval after initial
damage – for this reason it may be found that the reported intermediate cross-flooding times are not exactly
those specified. The problem becomes more and more complicated to solve as the number of active cross-
Page 172
Chapter 3 Using Stability

flooding devices increases. (The same problems may be found if the waterplane area of the cross-flooding
rooms varies significantly with height or the vessel heels, trims or sinks to a significant degree as cross-
flooding progresses.)
Note:

The IMO MSC.362(92) equations can be extremely sensitive to the cross-flooded volume and
initial and final fluid heads, for this reason specifying very low tolerance values in the Edit |
Preferences dialog can help find the intermedialte conditions at the specified times after initial
damage. This is because the solution to the Equilibrium analysis is more accurate (this does
however, slow down the speed of the analysis)

Note on nomenclature and Outflow parameter

IMO changed their nomenclature between 2007 and 2013 – we retained the 2007 notation (so as not to
break compatibility with files saved with earlier versions of Maxsurf) where the value k includes the final
outlet value of 1.0. The value you enter under column "k" should include the final outlet value for k of 1.0 –
Maxsurf uses the value in that column when evaluating F as per equation 2.4 in MSC.245(83):

Page 173
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Probabilistic Damage

IMO Probabilistic damage

Stability support for Probabilistic damage according to IMO MSC.421(98) , MSC.216(82) and IMO
MSC.19(58) . MSC.216(82) can be applied to both dry cargo and passenger ships whilst MSC.19(58) is
applicable to dry cargo vessels only.

Definitions

It is useful to clarify some of the terminology used in the Stability documentation:

The following definitions have been taken from MSC.216(82) and MSC.281(85):

Room

Watertight space -- this would be a Stability Compartment or Tank. Note that in Stability a complex tank
geometry can be defined by a parent and a number of Linked Tanks -- these Linked Tanks are considered to
be joined allowing free movement of water from one part to another (there is no requirement in Stability
that the individual linked parts be physically adjacent. Thu a tank made up of multiple linked parts is
considered that all parts flood (or fill) together and share a common waterline. It should also be noted that
the individual parts making up a Linked tank may have different permeabilities (this differs slightly from the
IMO definition above).

Space

We use the same definition as IMO “a combination of rooms”. Under most circumstances, this would be a
contiguous group of rooms (i.e. spatially adjacent to one another -- though given that Stability linked tanks
are not necessarily adjacent, this spatial adjacency is not enforced.)

Damage

Again we use the same definition as IMO “3D extent of breach of the ship” but in the Stability context the
extent is always cuboid: defined by planar fwd, aft, port, stbd, top and bottom limits. This may be a full

Page 174
Chapter 3 Using Stability

longitudinal zone or may be limited in transverse and/or vertical extent by longitudinal bulkheads and/or
decks; there may also be multiple adjacent zones damaged.

Damage Space

We use this definition in Stability to specify which rooms will be breached when a given damage occurs.

Damage Case

A specific instance of flooded compartments for which the vessel GZ curve is to be calculated. During the
Probabilistic damage analysis in Stability, Damage cases are assembled from the definition of the Damage
Spaces for different combinations of damage.

Probabilistic damage – Principles

Essentially the probabilistic damage analysis performs a number of large angle stability analyses and uses the
IMO criterion to determine an s-factor that depends on certain parameters of the GZ curve. The GZ curves
are calculated for a large number of different damage conditions and several load cases. For each condition,
a p-factor can be calculated. The vessel’s attained subdivision index is the sum of the products of the p-
factors with their corresponding s-factors. The attained subdivision index can then be compared with a
required subdivision index to see if the vessel achieves a sufficiently high degree of safety.

Flow through – Typical Use-case

The following section shows how the probabilistic damage analysis might typically be used.
• Modeler model is loaded as normal
• User defines (first selecting File | New to open the Probabilistic damage data table) other ship data
required for the probabilistic damage analysis in the Damage window | Global table.
• User defines the damage zones they wish to consider in the Damage window | Zones table
• Once 2 and 3 have been completed, the p-factors Damage window | p Factors table are automatically
calculated and displayed as the zone data is modified. It is useful to have this interaction because if the p
Factor is too large for a particular zone, the user may decide to refine the zone arrangement.
• User defines the bulkheads and deck values for single and groups of adjacent zones.
• When the Zones have been defined the user can then define which tanks are damaged in each zone in
the Damage window | Zone damage table. A first pass at this can be automatically generated using the
Case | Extent of damage command.
• The user can then perform the probabilistic damage analysis. Stability runs a large angle stability analysis
for each combination of loadcase and damage and collates the results to calculate the attained index.
This is then compared with the required index.

During the analysis each GZ curve and details on the evaluation of the s-factor may be saved in a log file. The
same log file is used for each analysis so it is important to either change the name or copy the file at the end
of the analysis if the results are to be kept. The log file parameters may be specified in the Edit | Preferences
dialog:

Page 175
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Probabilistic damage result logging options (Edit | Preferences)

Finding the probabilistic damage input sheets.

The probabilistic damage input sheets are in the damage window after the normal damage condition sheet.

Page 176
Chapter 3 Using Stability

A Probabilistic Damage toolbar button is available in the Windows toolbar which will take the user back to
the last used probabilistic damage input table:

Probabilistic damage – Saving input parameters

The probabilistic damage data is saved in the .hmd file. However this is new to version 14.1 and if the file
were read into an earlier version of Stability and saved, these data would be lost. For this reason it is also
possible to save the probabilistic damage data as a separate file (in a similar way to the other Stability input
data). To load or save the probabilistic damage data as a separate file, ensure that one of the probabilistic
damage data sheets in the Damage window is on top.

Bring one of the probabilistic damage tables to the front to enable File menu items

Probabilistic damage – Inputs

In this section we shall look at the input parameters required for the probabilistic damage analysis.

Settings for Probabilistic damage GZ curve calculation

Since the analysis essentially consists of a large number of GZ curve calculations, most of the settings that
are applicable to the Large Angle Stability analysis are also applicable to the Probabilistic Damage Analysis.

Chose the Probabilistic Damage analysis mode from the pull-down or Analysis menu:

Page 177
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Selecting Probabilistic Damage anlysis mode

Once you have selected the probabilistic damage analysis mode, you can define the heel angle range and
trim settings to be used as well as any environmental parameters such as waveform (as well as the fluid
analysis method to be used).

During probabilistic damage analysis, it is possible to check the vessel heeling to both port and starboard.
This is useful if the tanks contain ballast or cargo and it is uncertain in which direction the vessel will list
when damaged (or indeed the vessel may list to different directions depending on the loadcase and
damage). Stability will calculate the GZ curve in both directions and, if the criteria can be evaluated in both
directions, the lowest s-factor will be taken. If the criteria can only be evaluated in one direction, then this
value for the s-factor will be taken.

It is recommended to evaluate at least one negative heel angle and the direction of heel should correspond
to the side of the vessel that is being damaged (see below):

Page 178
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Heel angle specification (as per Large Angle Stability)

Use either fixed trim or free to trim to loadcase.

s-factor calculation

The s-factors are calculated by stability criteria. The Probailistic damage analysis has its own set of criteria
(though the same parent criteria are also available in the large angle stability analysis criteria). When the
analysis mode has been set to Proababilistic Damage, you will see the criteria that are used for this analysis.
The number of parent criteria is reduced to only those which can calculate the s-factor. Also some “Default”
criteria are supplied, you can add or modify these should you so desire. When running the analysis, Stability
will look at the probabilistic criteria that have been selected and warn you if there are any problems.

Page 179
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Probabilistic Damage Criteria Manager with Parent and Default criteria

The following rules should be observed when defining the probabilistic damage criteria:
• As with the normal criteria manager, changes made to the parent (bold) criteria are not saved. If you
need to modify any of the criteria you should make your own copies of the parent criteria
• A set of Default criteria are provided – these can be modified and changes will be saved.
• Only one criterion should be selected and it should correspond to the IMO Resolution being used.
(Strictly, you may have up to one of each MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) criteria selected and Stability will
automatically use the appropriate one – according to the selected Resolution in the Global sheet – but
for clarity, it is probably best practive to just have a single criterion selected.)
• The criteria should always be selected for Damage analysis.
• Stability will automatically update some of the criteria parameters according to corresponding
parameters in the probabilistic damage setup. However it is still good practice to review criteria
parameters before starting the analysis. This is particularly true for the MSC.216(82) Resolution where the
vessel type and heeling moments must be defined correctly.
• The criteria window can be closed with either of the close buttons.

For further information on how the s-factors are calculated and the different parameters, please refer to the
Criteria Help section for the appropriate criteria (and heeling arms).

Main parameters and calculation of required subdivision index

The other parameters required for the probabilistic damage analysis are defined in the last four tables in the
Damage window:

Page 180
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Additional tables in the Damage window define the remaining Probabilistic damage input data
Depending on the selected IMO Resolution, different rows and columns will be displayed in the tables; both
MSC.216(82) and MSC.19(58) are provided, A.265 VIII is not included.

Tool tips have been added to provide a more detailed explanation of the input parameters and also the
options available.

Tool tips for Global data sheet

Global table

This table is used to define the main parameters for the probabilistic damage anlysis as well as provide some
intermediate calculations. Input data are shown in black whilst results are shown in grey. Depending on the
Resolution and vessel type, some rows may be hidden.

Page 181
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Global table – MSC.216(82) Dry Cargo vessel and Passenger vessel

Page 182
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Global table – MSC.19(58) Dry Cargo

Row Description
Resolution – IMO Resolution to be used.
MSC.421(98),
MSC.216(82) or
MSC.19(58)
Do equilibrium Perform Equilibrium analysis at final damage condition? Yes / No
analysis ?
Do automatic Automatically generate all the alternative damage combinations for
combinations of vertical subdivision due to intermediate decks? Yes / No (see section
vertical damage ? below for further details)
Deepest subdivision Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the deepest subdivision
draft (summer draft. You may select whether each load case should be included in the
loadline) Loadcase analysis, this is useful if only one load case has been changed and
needs recalculating. When the loadcase is selected the vessel draft
amidships will be computed and displayed.
Partial subdivision Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the partial subdivision
draft Loadcase draft.
Light service draft Name of loadcase that defines the vessel at the light subdivision draft.
Loadcase not required for MSC.19(58).
Type -- Cargo or Vessle type.
Passenger not required for MSC.19(58).
Fitted with cross- For cargo vessels under MSC.421(98): defines if cross-flooding devives
flooding devices are fitted or not; if fitted then s Intermediate is computed.
Lifeboat capacity N_1 Number of persons for whom lifeboats are provided.

Page 183
Chapter 3 Using Stability

required for MSC.216(82), pax. Vessel only.

Permitted max. num. Number of persons inclusing officers and crew that the vessel is
of persons in excess permitted to carry in excess of N_1.
of N_1: N_2 required for MSC.216(82), pax. Vessel only.
max. moulded Parameter not currently used.
breadth at or below
deepest subdivision
draft: B
max. number of Specifies the upper limit of the number of adjacent zones that should
adjacent zones to be damaged. If you wish to limit the analysis by p-factor only, then
consider specify the number of zones here (see min p-factor below).
min. p-Factor of Specifies the minimum p-factor for which an analysis should be
damage to consider performed. The maximum a condition can contribute to the attained
index is the p-factor. If the the p-factor is very small the contribution to
the attained index will be negligible and there is little point in carrying
out the analysis. Conditions whose p-factor is below this minimum will
not be evaluated; this can speed up the analysis. If you wish the analysis
to be purely limited by the number of adjacent zones (see above) then
specify a small negative value. This will ensure that conditions with zero
p-factor will still be evaluated.
max. trim angle to If the vessel trim exceeds this value, then the s-factor will be taken as
consider zero (irrespective of the GZ curve). This can speed up the analysis.
Limit vertical extent If desired the vertical extent of damage (when automatically generating
of damage? the zone damage) can be limited.
max. vertical extent of If desired the vertical extent of damage (when automatically generating
damage the zone damage) can be limited.
Damaged side -- Specifies which side of the vessel will be damaged (when automatically
Starboard or Port generating the zone damage). The extent of damage is assumed to go
all the way to the centreline but you may specify which side of the
vessel is damaged. The heel direction in the Heel setup should
correspond to the side of the vessel being damaged.
Zone 1 located at It is normal to begin the Zone numbering at the stern, but the option to
bow or stern? start from the bow is also allowed in Stability

To compute and display the results for the final equilibrium state of the vessel at each of the damage and
loadcases tested, type “yes” in the corresponding row of the Global sheet in the Probabilistic Damage inputs
window:

Enable equilibrium analysis results

An option of which allows only selected Loadcases to consider when running a Probabilistic Damage analysis
is available. Results will only be calculated for the selected Loadcases; and are not collated with any
previously run results. If you wish to recomputed the Attained index for a change due to a single Loadcase
you should copy the relevant results to a spreadsheet and recomputed the Attained index taking account the

Page 184
Chapter 3 Using Stability

updated results for the recomputed Loadcase(s) manually. This option is found in the Global Probabilistic
Damage input table:

Chooses which Loadcases to include during the analysis

Longitudinal Zone definition

The next table (Zones) allows for the definition of the longitudinal damage zones. Fore and aft extents of the
zone boundaries are input by the user and the length and centre of the zone is automatically calculated; the
boundaries of adjacent zones are automatically updated if required, as are the zone names. The subdivision
length is taken as the limits of the length defined by the zones. As for other similar tables, use Edit | Add or
Delete (or Ctrl+A or Del key, with a number of complete rows selected) to add or delete zones.

Damage zones defined by fwd and aft boundaries

Zones may be shown in the drawing views (this display option is only available in Probabilistic Damage
analysis mode):

Page 185
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Probabilistic damage zones (stbd. side damage) shown in pink.

P-Factors

From the damage zone calculations, the probability of damaging a longitudinal zone or group of adjacent
zones is calculated as well as the cumulative probability. The columns displayed depends on the choice of
Resolution: MSC.216(82) or MSC.19(58) made in the Global table.

All combinations of adjacent zones are calculated at this point. A subtotal for the p-factor for a given
number of adjacent zones is given as well as a cumulative to total for all the p-factors. This will help the user
to determine the maximum number of adjacent zones that should be analysed. In practice, it probably makes
more sense to limit the analysis by specifying a desired minimum p-factor rather than a number of adjacent
zones. This can easily be done by specifying the maximum number of adjacent zones as the number of zones
defined. The last column shows whether a particular condition will be tested (if the p-factor is sufficiently
large and the maximum number of adjacent zones is not exceeded).

Page 186
Chapter 3 Using Stability

p-factor calculations for individual and groups of zones

To clarify the calculations being made and provide intermediate data, an additional table has been added.
The pertinent tables are described below. The nomenclature used is as follows:
p(sz,naz): pFactor (for pure longitudinal subdivision), where: sz is the start zone; and naz is
the number of adjacent zones considered. ‘multiple zone’ means the pFactor for just that
specific damage occurring; ‘single zone’ means that the probability is calculated treating
the entire damage as a single zone of length including all the adjacent zones.

pi(sz,naz; b): This now includes the effect of transverse subdivision and the rFactors are
calculated to the transverse penetration depth b.

pFactor table gives the p- factor for each zone for each number of adjacent zones. Two pFactors are listed,
the single-zone pFactor value is calculated considering the full extent of damage as a single zone; the second
(multiple zone) value is the pFactor for just that specific zone and number of adjacent zones.

Thus (taking the numerical values from the highlighted cells in tables below):
p(10,4) multiple zone = p(10,4) single zone
- p(10,3) single zone - p(11,3) single zone
+ p11,2) single zone

p(10,4) multiple zone = 0.196024

- 0.131549 - 0.115869
+ 0.056332

= 0.004938
or visually:

Page 187
Chapter 3 Using Stability

- -

Visual representation of the calculation method for probability of multiple adjacent zone damage.
The areas represent the probabilities pi(sz, naz; b)

pFactor for longitudinal subdivision and all combinations of adjacent zone damage

Page 188
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Sub zones due to transverse and vertical subdivision

As well as the main longitudinal subdivision, it is also possible to define sub-zones due to longitudinal
bulkheads (transverse subdivision) and decks (vertical subdivision).

Transverse sub-zone definition and R-Factors

Transverse sub-zone definition allows the user to limit the damage penetration to a certain distance into the
vessel towards the centerline, measured from the side-shell. I have followed IMO notation by specifying the
penetration depth from the side-shell (rather than specifying the offset from the centerline). A column is
provided for the user to specify the side-shell offset (from the centerline) and this is used only to draw the
transverse extents of the damage zone, the inner limit being at a distance side-shell offset minus b from the
centreline. The side-shell offset value defaults to the maximum half-beam of the vessel.

R-Factors MSC.421(98) and MSC.216(82)

The rFactor table shows the rFactors for all possible b values for each of the zone and adjacent zone
combinations. These data are required when calculating the combined pi = p.r probabilities for multiple
adjacent zone damage.

rFactor for transverse subdivision for all possible values of b

Page 189
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The p.r = pi table gives the probability of each zone and number of adjacent zones for each of the transverse
bulkhead locations that apply. These probabilities are obtained by combing the pFactors and rFactors in the
appropriate manner.

Thus using the same sample as previously:

pi(10,4; b=1) = p(10,4) single zone * r(10,4; b=1)
- p(10,3) single zone * r(10,3; b=1)
- p(11,3) single zone * r(11,3; b=1)
+ p11,2) single zone * r(11,2; b=1)

pi(10,4; b=1) = 0.196024 * 0.270060

- 0.131549 * 0.276209
- 0.115869 * 0.278583
+ 0.056332 * 0.297232

= 0.0010678

pi = p.r for combined longitudinal and transverse subdivision

for each value of b in the longitudinal extent of damage being considered

And it can be seen that the cumulative sum of the pi probabilities for all conditions is unity:

Page 190
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Cumulative sum{pi} = 1.0

In the results table, the pi=p . r value is given in a single column rather than two separate columns of p and r

Modified Probabilistic Damage results table

R-Factors MSC.19(58)

The r-factors are then calculated for each of the b-values that have been defined. Note that there is one
extra r-factor than the number of bulkheads – this represents the probability of damaging to the centerline.
The sum of all r-factors should be unity (a check is provided).

The b-values are defined for each individual zone, the b-values for multiple adjacent zones are calculated
automatically.

Page 191
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Longitudinal bulkhead definition and corresponding r-factors

Page 192
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Visualisation of zones and sub-zones: sub-zones shown dashed; selected zone shown in bold.
The currently selected zone or sub-zone is shown in bold as well as any damage for that zone. This can also
be seen in rendered view to quite effectively visualize the damage.

Clicking in a zone or sub-zone in the table highlights the zone graphically

Vertical sub-zone definition and V-Factors

Similarly decks may be defined to create vertical subdivision of the zones. The corresponding v-factors are
calculated, but these also depend on the draft of the vessel. Thus we introduce the concept of the currently
selected Loadcase for the displayed v-factors. The loadcase for v-factor calculations is selected by clicking on
the desired loadcase in the Global table. Note that during the full probabilistic damage analysis, the v-factors
will be automatically recalculated for the loadcase under consideration.

Page 193
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Loadcase for v-factor calculations is selected by clicking on the desired loadcase in the Global table.

Deck definition and corresponding v-factors

Damage Specification

The damage to be used for the Probabilistic analysis is done in two stages. The first stage is to define the
“Damage Spaces”. These are the compartments that are breached when the damge extends to fill the
damage space defined by the longitudinal, transverse and vertical zone extents. The second stage is to
determine the actual damage case that occurs when one or mode adjacent damage spaces are combined.

Page 194
Chapter 3 Using Stability

“Damage Spaces” and “Prob. Damage Cases” tables

Damage Spaces

“Damage spaces” are defined as the rooms that are wholly, or partially, contained within a cuboid defined by
three pairs of orthogonal planes: aft, forward; top, bottom; and port, starboard. That is the rooms which will
be breached if the vessel experiences damage to the cuboid defined by the planes. Both transversely and
vertically the damage space is defined between adjacent boundaries (rather than in from the side-shell or up
from the baseline). This will enable automatic generation of alternative damage cases, particularly in the
event where there are rooms which span a longitudinal or horizontal boundary.

Because of the definition of the Damge Spaces, there is no case which gives the full damage of the zone
(ignoring transverse and vertical subdivision. For this reason it is necessary to define two damage spaces: one
that defines the damage due to full transverse penetration; and a second for full vertical penetration.
Damage spaces limited by transverse boundaries, these are listed b1, b2, etc as the penetration passes
successive transverse boundaries (longitudinal bulkheads) and the final case, for full transverse penetration is
labelled bx. Similarly, for vertical subdivision due to horizontal decks, these are labelled H1, H2, ... Hx; where
Hx it the final Damage space corresponding to full vertical penetration.

Once the zones, bulkheads and decks are defined the user can select the Case | Extent of damage command
and this will automatically detect the breached rooms for a selected damage space according to which tanks
lie (fully or partially) within the damage space boundaries. Once the automatic damage is defined, this can
be modified by the user should this prove to be necessary (or it can be defined from scratch by the user). The
“Damage Sapces” tab of the Damage window must be on top to enable this command and the columns to
be updated selected.

Automatic definition of damage for each zone

Page 195
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Alternative damage for vertical subdivision

Probabilistic damage requirements, as defined in Resolution MSC.216(82) and also MSC.19(58), allude to the
fact that different combinations of damage should be considered.

MSC.216(82) Regulation 7-2, Calculation of the factor si; p32:

This is expanded a bit in the explanatory notes:

MSC.281(85): Regulation 7-2.6; p26

The way this has been implemented in Stability is that alternative damage space definitions may be made for
a given damage occurrence. Stability will then test the vessel under the different damage cases and select
the one with the worst survivability factor. Although it is envisaged that this will be applied to cases where
there is vertical subdivision due to horizontal watertight decks, the mechanism within Stability allows for the
definition of alternative damage for any damage space.

Page 196
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Some examples of the interpretation of this rule for single and multiple adjacent zone damage are shown
below.

Single zone flooding to uppermost deck:

Consider damage of Zone1 up to deck H13. Then all the rooms below this deck should be considered
damaged:

But in addition, the lesser damage with C1 intact and also B1, C1 intact should also be considered to see
which gives the lesser s-factor.

Similarly, if Zone2 is considered damaged, the alternative damage cases of A2 and B2 damaged and A2 only
damage should be considered to find the minimum s-factor:

Multiple adjacent zone damage

For multiple adjacent zone damage, the damage location and extent must breach both zones. But the
vertical extent may be varied. Zones 1 and 2 damaged up to deck H13 (=H22) gives four alternative damage
cases that should be considered to find the minimum s-factor.

Page 197
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Definition of alternative Damage Spaces

The alternative damage cases due to vertical subdivision by horizontal decks is created automatically. Should
you wish for a certain damage case not to be evaluated, this can be achieved by deselecting the appropriate
row in the Damage Case sheet. If all alternative damages should be excluded, this can be easily done with
the option in the Global Probabilistic Damage table:

Alternative damage results

In the results, the alternative damages tested are shown. The damage case which gives the smallest s-factor
is listed first and the alternatives shown below (in grey). The p, v, r values which are the same, are not
repeated; the A-factor is given only for the damage case with minimum s-factor.

Page 198
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Alternative damage cases tested

Probabilistic Damage Cases sheet

Probabilistic Damage Cases sheet allows a review of all the damage cases to be evaluated during the
probabilistic damage analysis to be made. Note that some damage cases may not be evaluated for all load
cases. This could be because of minimum probability or maximum damaged length constraints or the fact
that the watertight deck is below the upright, intact waterline for a given loadcase. If desired, it is possible to
prevent selected damage cases from being evaluated. Because of the number of different damage cases, the
data is shown transposed compared with the normal damage case presentation with one row, rather than a
column, for each damage case.

The cases are generated from the damage space definition using the “List [Link] cases” or by running the
analysis.

Page 199
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Copying Probabilistic Damage Cases sheet

Additionally the user may automatically generate standard damage cases for the Probabilistic Zone damage
that has been defined. Damage configurations within the maximum number of adjacent zones range and
above the minimum p-factor will be added. This stage is not required for the probabilistic analysis, but has
been added for convenience should the user wish to manually run large angle stability analyses for the same
damage cases.

The Damage window must be on top for this command to work. Damage cases will be added up to the
maximum number of adjacent zones specified in the Global tab, if the p-factor exceeds the minimum values
specified (again in the Global tab).

Automatic creation of damage cases using the damage defined for each zone

Visualization of damage

When in Probabilistic damage analysis mode the damaged tanks and compartments displayed are not those
of the current damage case, but those of the currently selected data in one of the Probabilistic Damage
sheets:

Page 200
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Clicking on a row in the “Zones” or “p Factors” tables will show the damge for a
completely damaged longitudinal zone. Similarly when selecting a complete row in the
“[Link]” or “Decks” tables

Clicking on a single cell in the “[Link]” or “Decks” tables will select the damage in the
space defined by the corresponding longitudinal bulkheads or decks (depending on the
table)

Selecting a column in the “Damage Spaces” table will show the damage for that particular
damage space:

Page 201
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Finally selecting a row from the “[Link] Cases” table will show the damage for that
particular damage case:

Probabilistic damage permeabilities

It is possible to define different permeabilities to be used for tanks and compartments for the different load
conditions – as required for “cargo compartments” in MSC.216(82) Regulation 7-3.2:

MSC.216(82) Regulation 7-3.2

Thess values are defined in the Permeabilities table in the Probabilistic Damage window. By default, the
permeabilities are the same as the damage permeabilities given in the Compartment Definition table, but
these can be overridden (for the probabilistic damage analysis only) for each draft if desired. When you
generate new probabilistic damage data, the permeability values are copied from the Compartment
definition, but they are not updated if they are then changed in the Compartment definition window.

Page 202
Chapter 3 Using Stability

In the log file, the permeability used for any damaged tanks is shown:

Immersion of critical points at equilibrium

MSC.216(82) requires the s-value to be zero if, at equilibrium, certain critical points are immersed (Regulation
7-2 5.2 and 5.3:

Page 203
Chapter 3 Using Stability

It is possible to include this check with the following two rows in the MSC.216(82) criterion:

New immersion criterion options for MSC.216(82) Probabilistic Damage

If rows 17 or 18 are ticked, Stability will compare the angle of equilibrium to the angle of immersion of the
type of KeyPoints or KeyLine selected. If the equilibrium angle is not less than (>=) the immersion angle, the
survivability index will be zero.

Any type of KeyPoint (Downflooding, Potentinal downflooding, Immersion, etc.) or KeyLine (Deck edge,
Marginline) may be selected (autocomplete is used).

A results column gives the (minimum) immersion angle and Pass/Fail status (Pass if Equilibrium angle <
Immersion angle; Fail if Equilibrium angle >= Immersion angle). If Failed, the s-factor is set to zero. If the
Page 204
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Immersion angle cannot be found (no items of the selected type or insufficient heel angle range) then "n/a"
is displayed.

Immersion results column for MSC.216(82) Probabilistic Damage

Intermediate stages of flooding in Probabilistic damage analysis

Conditions of intermediate flooding may be included when assessing the probabilistic damage performance
of passenger ships (intermediate stages of flooding are not required for dry cargo vessels). Intermediate
damage cases my have full flooded or partially flooded rooms. The intermediate stages are added manually
as required by the user. In the case where intermediate stages occur due to cross flooding the flooding
conditions at specific time intervals (such as 60s and 600s) may be calculated using the Cross-Flooding
analysis. This is done independently of the Probabilistic Damage analysis.

Summary

Since the probabilistic damage analysis is rather complex, the following gives a brief outline of how Stability
performs the analysis:

For each damage condition, Stability now automatically generates “alternative” damage which might arise
due to vertical subdivision; for instance: intact rooms below the damage. When there are several “alternative”
damages for a given probability of damage then the GZ curve needs to be evaluated for each of the
alternatives and the one that give the minimum s-factor taken for that case to give the contribution to the
attained index.

Now for passenger vessels, it is also required to examine intermediate stages of flooding. These are
additional “damage spaces” that may be defined by the user. The user may use this facility to define steps of
progressive flooding from one room to another or can defined partially flooded rooms.

For these intermediate stages, it is necessary to evaluate the GZ curve and determine s-intermediate. There
may be several intermediate stages defined so the one that gives the smallest value of s-intermediate should
be taken. Additionally, the final stage can also be thought of a the final intermediate stage, so the value of s-
intermediate from the final stage flooding should also be checked and the overall minimum value taken.

The final s-factor is then the smaller of: all the s-intermediate values and the product of s-final . s-moment
for the final stage of flooding.

This s-factor needs to be computed for all the alternative damages and then that smallest s-factor used to
calculate the contribution to the attained index.

Page 205
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Definition of intermediate stages of damage.

This is done in the “Damage Space” table by selecting the “parent” damage space and selecting Add from
the Case menu, at this point you can also specify the partial flooding percentage which will be applied to all
damaged rooms:

The new intermediate case is added to the right of the selected case

You can specify default filling level to be applied to the damaged rooms in the intermediate stage.

In the intermediate stage, you can only edit the rooms that are damaged in the final stage.

Page 206
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Example of definition of intermediate stages of flooding

Note that rooms which are intact in the final stage flooding cannot be damaged in an intermediate stage,
though rooms which are damaged in the final stage my be intact in the intermediate stage. In the above
example all final stage flooding shows fully damaged rooms and all intermediate stages have partially
flooded rooms. However this is not enforced and it is possible to have partially flooded rooms in the final
stage and fully flooded rooms in the intermediate stages if so desired.

Combination of “damage spaces”

The damage space definitions are combined as usual to define all the damage cases which will be tested
during the analysis. Use the List [Link] Cases command from the case menu to ensure that they are up to
date.

Damage cases for single-zone damage

When combining the intermediate stages, not all combinations of stages are taken. For example if two
damage spaces that are to be combined each have two intermediate stages defined, then the first
Page 207
Chapter 3 Using Stability

intermediate stage of each damage space are combined and then the second intermediate stage of the
damage spaces. Thus giving only two intermediate stages to be considered. For example, looking at the
situation in the above picture, to generate the damage up to Hx, the damage spaces H1 and Hx must be
combined. Now each of these damage spaces has two intermediate stages defined. This gives rise to the
final stage flooding condition as well as two intermediate flooding stage conditions. To further complicate
things, there are also two alternative damage scenarios to be considered for damage up to Hx: one with all
rooms from the base of the ship damaged and a second with the lower room intact. So when considering the
damage condition for Z1Hx, we must evaluate GZ curves for the final stage damage and two intermediate
stages each for two alternative damages!

Results for intermediate stages of flooding

In the results presented below, random numbers between 0 and 0.999 have been generated for the various
s-factors: s-intermediate, s-moment and s-final -- this is purely to aid in differentiating the numbers to aid
explanation (in most cases the actual values would either be zero or unity).

Typical [Link]. results (with artificial -random- s-factors)

First of all, a new column “Case Type” has been added -- this indicates whether the case is a “Final stage of
flooding” or an “Intermediate stage of flooding”. If the particular result is a Final stage of flooding and has
the minimum S_factor, this is indicated with a “*” appended to the end; if it is an intermediate stage and has
Page 208
Chapter 3 Using Stability

the minimum S_intermediate, then this is indicated by appending a “+”. Secondly, in the “Damage (tank
indices)” column, partially flooded rooms have the letter “p” appended after their index. Note, the column
heading will change to “Damage (room indices)” since we are using the word “room” to denote both tanks
and compartments.

Intermediate stages of flooding are shown in greyed italics. The resulting GZ curves are used only to evaluate
s_intermediate. The final stage flooding conditions are shown in slightly darker grey and the final stage
flooding condition which has the minimum value for the s_factor is the one that is take to give the A_factor
for the particular probability of damage under analysis.

Taking Z2; Hx damage in the above example, it can be seen that there are two alternative damage conditions
to be compared (and the one that gives the minimum s_factor selected). These are Alt.1(2) and Alt.2(2). These
alternatives are due to vertical subdivision and the fact that conditions with intact tanks below the damage
should also be considered (as well as the fully damaged condition from the bottom up to the deck in
question). In the example shown above, Alt.1(2) has the minimum s_factor so the corresponding result row is
shown in black text; Alt.2(2) gave a higher value of s_factor so is shown in grey and there has no entry in the
A_factor column since it does not contribute to the attained index. In determining which alternative has the
minimum s_factor, it is first necessary to look at s_intermediate values of the final stage flooding and any
intermediate stages that have been defined for the particular damage alternative under consideration.
Looking at Alt.2(2), it is the intermediate case“Int.2(2)” which gives the smallest s_intermediate value
(0.25011) -- this value is copied into the s_intermediate column of the final stage flooding of this damage
alternative; the bracketed value being the s_intermediate value calculated from the final stage flooding GZ
curve. The s_factor is then the minimum value of:
• the smallest of all the s_intermediate values for the intermediate stages or the final stage
• the product of s_final ∙ s_moment for the final stage
This is done for all the alternative damages and the minimum s_factor selected.

Probabilistic damage – Review of automatic damage case generation

Because of the complexity of the way in which the damage cases are generated from the damage space
definition, it is worth reviewing the underlying procedure and logic in some detail.

In order to complete the probabilistic damage analysis, the software needs to generate many different
damage cases corresponding to the different damage scenarios considered during the analysis; this may
involve:
• combining different longitudinal zone damage in the case of considering damage in adjacent zones;
• damage in a single or multiple adjacent zones limited by transverse penetration depth and longitudinal
bulkheads;
• damage limited by vertical extent of damage and decks;
• alternative damage scenarios where lower rooms are not breached (damage only above a certain deck);
• intermediate stages of damage which may be defined by the user

In the following sections, we shall see how the rooms breached by a specified extent of damage are defined
in “Damage spaces” and how “Damage cases” are automatically generated from the damage spaces.

Damage spaces

The software works by identifying “Damage spaces” which define which rooms are breached when a certain
extent of damage occurs. The extent of damage of a “Damage space” depends on the zone, bulkhead and
deck specification of the subdivision and is a rectangular volume bounded by the single longitudinal
boundaries, the adjacent transverse penetration limits (b-values) and between adjacent vertical limits (H-
values).
Page 209
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Longitudinal subdivision only (transverse bulkheads)

The damage cases are then generated by accumulating the damage specified in the appropriate damage
spaces. For instance, the damage case corresponding to zone 2 with 2 adjacent zone damage would have
any rooms damaged if they are damaged in either of the zone 1 or zone 2 damage spaces. We will define
this as “Adding” damage spaces, i.e. the result of adding 2 damage spaces is that a room is damaged if it is
damaged in either of the damage spaces being added.

Example of damage case for 2 adjacent zones starting with Zone 3 (i.e. “Z3, 2”) is shown in the diagrams
below:

Damage case “Z3, 2” (damage space “Z3” + damage space “Z4”) =

Damage case “Z3, 2”

Damage space “Z3” +

Damage space “Z3”

Damage space “Z4”

Damage space “Z4”

Or looking at the same thing in the Damage Space definition and resulting Damage Cases which have been
automatically generated:
([Link])

Damage space definition: adding full zones with no intermediate conditions

Page 210
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Resulting damage cases

Transverse subdivision (longitudinal bulkheads) only within a longitudinal zone

When there are transverse limits to the subdivision (due to longitudinal bulkheads specified by b-values) the
damage spaces are between adjacent b-values. In this case depending on the transverse penetration depth
of the damage case of interest we need to add the separate damage spaces from the side-shell to the inner
longitudinal bulkhead.

Tanking the example for zone 2 with transverse extent of damage extending all the way to the vessel
centerline (damage case “Z2; bx”) the damage spaces “Z2; b1” and “Z2; bx” need to be added together:

Damage case “Z2; bx” (damage space “Z2; b1” + damage space “Z2; bx”) =

Damage case “Z2; bx”

Damage space “Z2; b1” +

Damage space “Z2; b1”

Damage space “Z2; bx”

Page 211
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Damage space “Z2; bx”

Or looking at the tabulated Damage space and resulting damage case definitions
([Link])

Damage space definition with transverse subdivision and no intermediate conditions

Resulting damage cases

Vertical subdivision (decks) only within a longitudinal zone

Damage limited by vertical subdivision (decks) works in a similar way. The deck heights are specified by H-
values.

In the following example the damage case for unlimited vertical damage “Z2; Hx” is made by adding the
damage in the “Z2; H1” and “Z2; Hx” damage spaces as seen below:

Damage case “Z2; Hx” =

Page 212
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Damage case “Z2; Hx”

Damage space “Z2; H1” +

Damage space “Z2; H1”

Damage space “Z2; Hx”

Damage space “Z2; Hx”

([Link])

Damage space definition with different numbers of intermediate conditions

Page 213
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Resulting damage cases

Alternative “lesser” damage (undamaged below specified deck)

When dealing with the vertical extent of damage, there is also the requirement to examine “lesser extents of
damage” this is when damage does not extend all the way down to the bottom of the deck – i.e. there are
undamaged rooms below the deck in question. These damage cases have “Alt n/N” added to the end.

In the example below, there are two alternative damage cases for “Z2; Hx” the first “Alt 1/2” is damage all the
way down to the bottom of the ship and is the same as “Z2; Hx” in the previous section. However the “lesser
extent of damage” is “Alt 2/2” where the damage does not extend below the deck at H1. Thus it contains
only the “Z2; Hx” damage space (since rooms in the “Z2; H1” are considered intact).

Damage case “Z2; Hx; Alt.2/2” = Damage space “Z2; Hx”

Damage case “Z2; Hx; Alt.2/2”

Resulting damage cases, double bottom (T-02-db) is intact because damage does not extend below H1

Combined transverse and vertical subdivision within a longitudinal zone

When combining the effects of transverse and vertical subdivision, that is the effects of longitudinal
bulkheads and decks, we need to generate damage cases which are limited by specified b-values
(longitudinal bulkheads) and H-values (decks).

To do this there are three steps:

Page 214
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Create a damage case for the specified b-value (limited by a longitudinal bulkhead) – see the Transverse
subdivision section described above
Independently, create a damage case for the specified H-value (limited by a deck) – see the Vertical
subdivision section described above; noting that this may also be affected by the alternative “lesser” damage
also described above.
Create the final damage case whereby damaging rooms only if the room is damaged in both the transverse
damage case (1) and the vertical damage case (2).

So in the following example we look at generating the damage case “Z2; b1; H1” i.e. zone two, limited by b1
and H1.

Damage case “Z2; b1; H1” =

Damage case “Z2; b1; H1”

Damage case “Z2; b1” – i.e. transverse damage ignoring vertical subdivision
(in this case this is simply the damage space “Z2; b1”)

Damage case “Z2; b1”

AND
Damage case “Z2; H1” – i.e. vertical damage ignoring transverse subdivision
(in this case this is simply the damage space “Z2; H1”)

Damage case “Z2; H1”

([Link])

Page 215
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Damage space definition with different numbers of intermediate conditions

Resulting damage cases

Intermediate stages of flooding

For each damage space, it is possible to define any number of intermediate stages of flooding; furthermore
different numbers (or no) intermediate stages can be defined for the damage spaces. When the damage
cases are generated, if there are any intermediate flooding damage spaces defined, corresponding
intermediate stage flooding damage cases will also be generated.

When considering a damage case, intermediate stage flooding damage cases will be generated if any of the
damage spaces under consideration also have intermediate stages combined. When more than one damage
space is required to generate the damage case, the number of intermediate stage damage cases that are
generate will correspond to the maximum number of intermediate conditions defined for a single damage
space. Thus the damage case “Z2, 2” (zone 2 with 2 adjacent zones damaged) would have 3 intermediate
damage cases because there are 3 intermediate stages defined for damage space “Z2” (and only one in
damage space “Z3”). This is shown in the tables below.
([Link])

Page 216
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Damage space definition with different numbers of intermediate conditions

Resulting damage cases

When the damage spaces define a shared waterline for the damage, then the flooding level is the same in all
rooms because it reffers to the total volume of all the damaged rooms. If different partial flooding
percentages are defined, then the value used is that in the first damage space in the combination process (in
the example the 75% partial flooding in the first intermediate stage of damage space “Z2” overides the 50%
partial flooding in the intermediate stage for “Z3”.

Damage cases: corresponding intermediate stages used when defined.

A one-to-one correspondence is used when combining the intermediate stages; when there are less
intermediate cases defined for some damage spaces being combined, the final stage flooding will be use:

Damage cases: final, fully-flooded stage is used when corresponding intermediate stages are not defined.

Probabilistic damage – Analysis

Once the analysis parameter data has been defined, it is worth checking that the heel direction (Analysis |
Heel) is correct and also check that the s-factor calculation parameters are corerect (Analysis | Criteria)
Page 217
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Pre-run checks

When trying to run the probabilistic damage analysis, Stability will make several checks to see if the analysis
parameters have been correctly set up. These are not exhaustive tests but should pick up critical errors.

The following checks are made:

• That loadcases that have been specified exist
• That the vessel type is correct in the criteria (if MSC.216(82) is being used)
• That the correct s-factor criterion has been selected. Note that only one criterion may be selected. If
Stability finds no criteria selected but a suitable one is available (but unselected) then it will prompt the
user to use this one:

Analysis

Large angle stability analyses are computed for each combination of loadcase and zone damage up to either
the specified maximum number of adjacent zones or the minimum specified p-factor. Basic data pertinent to
calculation of the s-factor is also presented as well as a total Attained subdivision index at the bottom of the
table. The required index is also shown as well as pass/fail status. Should the vessel sink, excessive trim occur
or the large angle stability analysis fail to converge, this is reported and the s-factor given as zero.

Page 218
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Probabilistic analysis results

The results of the final stage equilibrium analyses will be added to the Probabilistic Damage Equilibrium
results table. You may use the Display | Data Format dialog to select which columns are displayed; in addition
to the standard Equilibrium analysis results you can also select to display the minimum freeboard of key lines
and key points. The rows in this table have a 1:1 correspondence with the rows in the Probabilistic Damage
results table.

Page 219
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Probabilistic Damage Equilibrium results table

Probabilistic damage Log file

All the intermediate results, including all the GZ results and criteria evaluation for each loadcase / damage
case combination are logged during the analysis. The logfile location is specified in the Results Loggin
Options dialog in the Results menu:

Probabilistic Damage analysis results logging

Probabilistic damage Log file: Key points results

The Key points results table is added to the log file just after the tabulated GZ data:

Page 220
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Probabilistic damage Log file: Alternative damage: min. s-factor

In the log-file the different damage cases within the zone-damage set will be listed if there is more than one
to be tested. The Stability will generate a GZ curve for each of the damage cases and find the one that gives
the minimum survivability factor:

List of damage sets that will be examined.

Once the s-factors of all the damage cases have been evaluated, the lowest is selected and reported (all are
listed in the log file):

Page 221
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The minimum survivability factor is found from the different damage sets tested.

Because of the reuse of previously calculated GZ curves, analysis of all the extra cases does not necessarily
increase the overall computational time too significantly.

Probabilistic damage Log file: Reuse of results:

Stability now checks to see if it has already calculated a GZ curve for the required loadcase and damage
combination, this speeds up the calculation since repeat calculations of the GZ curve for the same conditions
are avoided.

In the log file a summary of all the conditions tested are listed at the end of the analysis of each loadcase:

Normally in the log file, the GZ curve data is given after it has been calculated, followed by the evaluation of
the s-factor criterion:

However, if the condition has already been evaluated, just the summary data are given:

Page 222
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Batch Analysis

Batch Analysis Concepts

Stability has basic batch processing capability. With a single command, Stability will run Large Angle Stability
and Equilibrium analyses for all combinations of load and damage cases. Further, Limiting KG and KN
calculations can be made for each damage condition. There are other options which allow the analysis to be
performed heeling to both port and starboard. For the Limiting KG analysis you may also check the Limiting
KG for each criterion individually. You may also choose to perform a Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium
analysis at the final VCG.

The aim of the batch processing function is to:

• Provide the user with a simple and consistent way of carrying out Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium
analyses on a large number of load and damage cases.
• Facilitate time consuming Limiting KG analyses, especially where results for all individual criteria are
required.
• Enable Limiting KG and KN analyses to be performed automatically for all damage cases.
• Facilitate testing with heel to port and starboard for vessels with asymmetric loading and/or damage
conditions (or hulls).
• Facilitate export of the data from Stability and import into MS Excel for post processing and report
generation.
• Provide all relevant results and the data required to be able to reproduce the runs, i.e.: analysis
parameters, file name etc.

Before you can perform a Batch Analysis it is recommended that you run a number of Analyses manually to
check whether the Model has been defined correctly and all Analysis Settings and Environment conditions
have been set correctly.

Batch Analysis – Procedures

Once the loadcases, damage cases, key points, criteria and analysis parameters for the required analyses
have been set up, the Batch Analysis is started
• Analysis | Start Batch Analysis

Page 223
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Batch analysis runs all combination of loadcases and damage cases.

Tip: Under most operating systems, minimising Stability can reduce the time required to perform the
calculations. This is because time consuming redrawing of the design windows, graphs and tables is avoided.

Batch Analysis Settings

Analysis parameters such as trim, heel angles etc. are set in the normal way for each analysis type included in
the Batch analysis. For example, if you want the Large Angle Stability to use a fixed trim of 0.5 m:
• first select the Large Angle Stability analysis type from the analysis menu
• set the trim to Fixed trim and 0.5 m
• then select Analysis | Batch Analysis

Batch Analysis Environment Options (Criteria)

Any Analysis Environment Options specified prior to a Batch Analysis will be used during the Batch Analysis.
Any criteria that have been set are evaluated at the end of each analysis and the results of these are also
output to the text file.

Page 224
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Important:

For important information on varying displacement while evaluating criteria, see Important
note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 358.

Batch Analysis Conditions

By default the batch analysis will run the specified analyses for all load cases agains intact and all damage
conditions. This can be modified by clicking the “Select Conditions” button

Select the conditions to be analyzed during Batch analysis

(with and without Loadcases defined for the vessel)
Note that since Limiting KG and KN analyses do not generally require a Loadcase to be specified, they will be
analyzed for all damage cases that are selected for any of the Loadcases. Furthermore, if there are no
Loadcases defined, a single column “KN and Limit KG” will be shown.

Remember that for complete customization and automation of analysis, this can be done quite easily using a
Python or VBscript or simlar script to run Stability via its COM automation API.

Batch Analysis Results

Before analysis starts, you will be prompted to enter the name and location of the file where Stability will
write the results of the batch analysis. Once the analysis is complete, this tab delimited text file may be
imported directly into MS Excel for further processing.

Because the analyses are simply carried out one after the other, it is not possible to go back to the results for
a specific analysis from within Stability; only the results of the final analysis will be stored in Stability.

At the bottom of the dialog is a check box which allows users to select whether the results of a batch analysis
should go to the Report window in Stability as well as the batch analysis text file. When the option for
Sending the results to Word is selected in the Edit | Preferences dialog, the batch analysis will automatically
create a Word document.
Warning:

Sending the results to the Report can slow down analysis considerably and also consume
considerable system resources. For large batch analysis, it is advisable not to include the results
in the report. The report is stored in memory and if you have insufficient memory, it is possible
that your computer will become very slow to respond and under some circumstances with
certain operating systems even cause Stability to crash.

Page 225
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Also see: Reporting on page 242.

Starting and Stopping Analyses

To start the analysis, choose Start Analysis from the Analysis menu or toolbar. Stability will step through the
parameter ranges specified, floating the hull to equilibrium conditions where required. Stability will redraw
the contents of the windows to display the current hull position for each iteration.

Calculations may be interrupted at any time by selecting Stop Analysis from the Analysis menu or toolbar.

If you have stopped the analysis, you can resume calculation by selecting Resume Analysis from the Analysis
Menu or toolbar.

There may be a slight time delay on all of these operations while the current cycle is finished.

You can also switch application by clicking in the window of any background program. Stability will continue
to calculate in the background although its speed will be reduced. The drawing of the vessel at each step of
the analysis can be quite time consuming. If you are not interested in seeing the progress of the analysis,
switch to a table window and maximise it to speed up the analysis. Should the analysis take longer than
about 45 seconds, Stability will flash and beep to indicate that the analysis has been completed.

The start, pause and resume functions are also available in the Analysis toolbar:

Analysis Settings

In the previous sections opening and preparing a model in Stability was discussed together with descriptions
of the different Analysis types. This section will describe the following analysis settings:
• Heel
• Trim
• Draft
• Displacement
• Specified Conditions
• Permeability
• Tolerances

Stability will allow specification of only those analysis settings that apply to the currently selected analysis
type.

In hydrostatic analysis, there are three degrees of freedom: Trim, Heel and Draft. Stability matches the trim,
heel and draft with the vessel’s mass and centre of gravity or visa versa. This way the volume of the displaced
hull matches the required mass and the centres of gravity and buoyancy lie one above the other in a vertical
line. For example: it can match a specified heel, trim and draft by varying the displacement and centre of
gravity; or it can match a specified displacement and centre of gravity by varying the heel, trim and draft.
Combinations of both are also possible. The following table is a very simplified representation of the degrees
of freedom and their weight counterpart:

Degree of Freedom Weight

1 Draft Displacement
2 Trim Longitudinal Centre of Gravity (LCG)
Page 226
Chapter 3 Using Stability

3 Heel Transverse Centre of Gravity (TCG)

In fact it is a rather more complicated situation than that suggested by the table above, because vertical
centre of gravity is also important and also because most of the variables are coupled.

The various analysis types and settings can be thought of as setting one variable in each pair to a fixed value
and deriving the others from the analysis.

For example: the Upright Hydrostatics analysis consists of fixing heel and trim and stepping through a series
of fixed drafts. In this case the LCB and TCB (and therefore the required LCG and TCG) are calculated from
the underwater hullshape at each draft. For an equilibrium analysis all degrees of freedom are derived from
the centre of gravity and Displacement. In the Specified Condition Analysis any combination of the variable
pairs may be specified.

Heel

The Heel dialog from the analysis menu is used to specify the range of heel angles to be used for Large
Angle Stability, KN and Limiting KG analyses. Heel angles between -180 and +180 may be specified. The
heel steps must be positive. If only one set of steps is required, simply put 0 in the other steps.

If there is any asymmetry in the vessel due to either: hull shape, key points, loading, damage, etc., and there
is any doubt as to which will be the worst heel direction, then the analysis should be carried out for both heel
to starboard and heel to port to find the most pessimistic condition.

If all the heel angle intervals are 10 deg or less, Stability will fit a cubic spline to the GZ curve and use this to
interpolate for values between the tested heel angles. If any step is greater than 10 deg, Stability will not do
any curve fitting and linear interpolation will be used.
Note:

For the angle of equilibrium to be found (when analysing criteria), it is essential that the GZ
curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope. It is possible that the GZ at zero heel may be
very slightly positive (due to asymmetry or rounding error) for this reason, it is advisable to test
at least one negative heel angle, at say -5 degrees, to ensure that the equilibrium angle is
identified.

It is good practise to start the heel range at an angle of approximately -30°. This is to allow roll
back angle criteria to be evaluated correctly.

Page 227
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note:

The heel angles to be used are specified independently for each analysis mode. This can be a
source of apparent differences in the results from the different analyses.

Trim

For most analyses you may specify whether the vessel is free-to-trim or has fixed trim. Select Trim in the
Analysis menu to bring up the Trim dialog.

Trim may be specified for Upright Hydrostatics, Large Angle Stability, KN Analysis Limiting KG, Floodable
Length and Tank Calibrations. (For the Specified Condition analysis, the trim may be specified in the
Specified Conditions dialog.) Equilibrium and Longitudinal Strength analyses always use a free trimming (and
free heeling) analysis so that there is no trimming (or heeling) moment applied to the vessel at the final
equilibrium.

Essentially there are three options for trim:

1. Fixed trim – the analysis is carried out at a fixed, specified initial trim. This applies to all
analyses that carry out a large angle stability-type analysis (Large Angle Stability,
Limiting KG, KN, Probabilistic Damage) as well as Upright Hydrostatics and Tank
Calibrations
2. Free to trim to loadcase – the analysis trims the vessel to the CG specified in the
loadcase. This option is available for all analyses that have a loadcase: Large Angle
Stability, Equilibrium, Longitudinal Strength, Probabilistic Damage.
3. Free to trim to specified CG – this is again free-to-trim but the CG is specified in the
dialog. This is for when a range of displacements is used for the analysis: Limiting KG,
KN, Floodable Length. In this case, all three components of the CG need to be know.
This it is possible to specify the LCG either directly or so that the upright, intact vessel
floats at a specified trim. The TCG and VCG are specified directly. In the case of the
Limiting KG analysis, the VCG is being found by the analysis, so cannot be specified. For
the Floodable Length analysis, heel is not considered thus TCG cannot be specified.

Page 228
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Specification of different trim options is dependent on the type of analysis currently selected.
Fixed trim
(KN and Limiting KG analyses only).
The analysis is carried out with the specified fixed trim; the vessel is not free-to-trim as it
heels. Although considerably faster, this analysis will tend to over-estimate ship stability
properties such as GZ.
Free-to-trim using a specified initial trim value
Using this method, for each displacement, the LCB of the intact vessel at the specified
trim and zero heel is computed. The LCG is calculated using this value and the VCG.
Calculations at each heel angle of the large angle stability analysis are then done free-to-
trim using the derived LCG and VCG. Thus, for each displacement, the upright, intact
vessel trim will be the same, but the LCG will be different.
Free-to-trim to a specified LCG value
With this method, a specified constant LCG is maintained for each displacement. This LCG
is then used to compute the free-to-trim vessel orientation at each heel angle as the
large angle stability analysis is performed. Thus, for each displacement, the LCG will be
the same, but the upright vessel trim will be different.
VCG for trim balance
The VCG, measured from the vertical zero datum (not necessarily KG), may be specified.

For KN analysis, the VCG will only have an effect if the analysis is free-to-trim. It will be
used to determine the LCG if an initial trim value is specified. It will also be used to
improve the accuracy of the KN results.

For Floodable Length calculations, which are always calculated free-to-trim, the VCG will
be used to calculate the LCG if an initial trim value is specified. Also, because the analysis
is very sensitive to trim, the VCG is needed to provide an accurate balance of the
trimming moment. (As the trim angle increases the longitudinal movement of the centre
of gravity due to its vertical position becomes more important.)

Page 229
Chapter 3 Using Stability

In the case of the Limiting KG analysis, the actual VCG is used and the VCG input field will
state “not applicable”.
TCG value
The TCG option allows you to specify an off-centreline centre of gravity for Limiting KG
and KN calculations. This is especially useful when evaluating the Limiting KG of a
damaged vessel that had cargo or ballast in tanks which are subsequently damaged. The
TCG can be either specified directly or calculated from the tank loadings defined in the
current loadcase.

Current Loadcase specifies initial loading of damaged tanks (los mass during analysis)

Finally, for the Limiting KG analysis, there is an option to automatically adjust the displacement and LCG of
the vessel so that liquid cargo of damaged tanks is removed from the model. This is for consistency with the
lost buoyancy analysis method: the buoyancy contribution of damaged tanks is removed from the model, so
to be consistent, any liquid cargo should also be removed from the model.

Draft

The draft dialog is used to specify the range of drafts to be used for the Upright hydrostatics analysis.

The VCG specified in the draft dialog is used for the calculation of upright stability characteristics such as
GMt only, and is specified in terms of KG – i.e. from the baseline, which is not necessarily the vertical zero
datum.

Displacement

The displacement dialog is used to specify the range of displacements to be used for the KN, Limiting KG
and Floodable Length calculations.

Page 230
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Specified Conditions

The specified conditions analysis setting is only available for the specified condition analysis.

See Specified Conditions on page 142.

Permeability

The Permeabilities are set in a table in the Permeability dialog. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or
delete rows from the table. The permeabilities may be sorted by double clicking on the permeability column
heading. The last set of permeabilities used will be recalled from the registry when Stability is started.

The Permeability dialog is used to specify the permeabilities to be used for the Floodable Length analysis;
the permeability is applied over the entire length of the vessel.

This permeability is unrelated to compartment, tank or non-buoyant volume permeability and is only used
for floodable length calculations.

Individual Permeability of Tanks and Compartments

The individual permeability of each compartment (or tank) is specified in the Compartment definition table.
The compartment, tank and non-buoyant volume permeabilities are used when calculating the effects of
damage, and/or calculating the weights of fluids in tanks in the loadcase.

Also see:
Modelling Compartments on page 59

Calibration

The Calibration Options dialog allows you to choose which types of Rooms should be calibrated; Tanks are
always calibrated, but Compartments and Non-Buoyant Volumes may also be calibrated.

MARPOL

The MARPOL Options dialog allows you to select which regulation should be used as well as which tanks
should be included in the MARPOL oil outflow calculations.

Page 231
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Cross-Flood

The Cross-Flood Options dialog allows you to specify the intermediate conditions to be evaluated.

Tolerances

In the Edit | Preferences dialog, calculation tolerances can be set. This defines the tolerances that Stability
uses to determine when to finish iteration during
• Large Angle Stability
• Equilibrium analysis
• Specified conditions
• KN calculations
• Floodable Length
• Longitudinal Strength

Ideal tolerances can range between 0.00001% and 0.1% (1 gram in 10 tonnes of displacement). Acceptable
tolerances can range from 0.001% to 1.0%. Acceptable tolerances should always be greater than Ideal
tolerances.

Convergence Error

Stability will attempt to solve most analysis to within the ideal tolerance. If this is not achieved within a
certain number of iterations, but the acceptable error has been achieved, Stability will continue. If
convergence to within the acceptable error has not been achieved, Stability will display a warning.

One of the most common causes of non-convergence is if the specified displacement exceeds the volume of
the completely submerged vessel and it sinks. Also convergence may be poor if the trim angle approaches
90. If Stability thinks that it is likely that the model has sunk (waterplane area is zero at the current
condition) the following dialog will be displayed. The specified displacement and the actual displacement at
the current iteration are provided for information.
Note

This warning is not displayed during batch analysis, instead the warning is written in the batch
file.
The warning is also not shown when accessing Stability from a VBA macro using the
Automation interface
If there is a convergence problem, which appears not to be due to sinking, then the following dialog will be
displayed.

Page 232
Chapter 3 Using Stability

This problem can sometimes occur if the specified displacement is extremely small and the vessel has a large
flat bottom, producing a highly non-linear waterplane area vs. draft plot. Other causes of non-convergence
can be non-linear moment to trim vs. trim angle curve or moment to heel vs. heel angle curve.
Note:

There are occasions when convergence will not necessarily occur within the maximum allowable
number of iterations. If Stability fails to converge it will give you a warning, but will allow you
the option of continuing the search. If you choose to continue, Stability will search for the
equilibrium position indefinitely. If the search is unsuccessful after a reasonable period of time,
you can interrupt Stability by pausing the analysis.
The analysis will also fail to converge if the trim becomes excessive. All analyses other than Floodable Length
will fail if the trim exceeds +/-45º; in the case of the Floodable Length analysis, this limit is increased to +/-
89º.

Analysis Environment Options

The analysis can be performed in different environments; this section describes the analysis environment
options available in Stability in more detail:
• Fluids Analysis Methods
• Density
• Hog and Sag
• Waveform
• Grounding
• Stability Criteria
• Damage

Fluids Analysis Methods

Stability allows you to specify two different ways of simulating any fluids contained in tanks or
compartments. Selecting Fluids in the Analysis menu opens the Fluids Analysis dialog.

It is possible to specify the range of filling levels for which free surface moments should be applied in the
loadcase. This functionality is accessed through the Analysis | Fluids dialog:
Page 233
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Fluid Analysis dialog

If the corrected the VCG method is used, the FSM is applied if the filling level is within the exclusive range
specified; i.e. if the filling level is less than or equal to the lower limit or the filling level is greater than or
equal to the upper limit, the free surface moment will be zero. The upper limit is clearly stated by IMO as
98%, but the code provides some flexibility in interpretation for the lower limit. You may set different limits
for each of the different free surface moment types other than “User Specified”. (see IMO IS Code)
3.3.2 Free surface effects should be considered whenever the filling level in a tank is
less than 98% of full condition. Free surface effects need not be considered where a
tank is nominally full ,i.e. filling level is 98% or above.

3.3.10 The usual remainder of liquids in empty tanks need not be taken
into account in calculating the corrections, provided that the total of such
residual liquids does not constitute a significant free surface effect.

In addition it is possible to ignore the free surface moment if the VCG correction for a single tank, due to the
free surface moment is less than a specified amount. This requires that a nominal minimum displacement be
specified. This is applicable to the “IMO” free surface moment type only. (see IMO IS Code)
3.3.9 Small tanks which satisfy the following condition using the values of “k”
corresponding to an angle of inclination of 30°, need not be included in the
correction:
M fs /  min  0.01m
where M fs is the free surface moment of the tank in question and  min is the ship
displacement at the minimum mean service draft of the ship without cargo, with
10% stores and minimum water ballast, if required.
Note: Tank Calibration results

In the tank calibration results the free-surface moment based on the transverse second moment
of area of the tank waterplane is given for all filling levels. This is because the actual free surface
moment to be used to determine the VCG in a loadcase depends on the method being used
and also the heel angle in question (in the case of the IMO correction).

Note: Calculation of GM

GM values always use the centre of gravity corrected for free surface moments even if the
“simulate fluid” option has been chosen. Note that the upright free surface moments as shown

Page 234
Chapter 3 Using Stability

in the loadcase are used, not those from the actual second moment of area of the inclined tank
waterplane.

Note

Most documented stability criteria assume that the corrected VCG method has been used.
Although the computational potential is available, authorities have not adopted this more
accurate calculation of the shift in centre of gravity due to fluid movement.

Fluid analysis method: Use corrected VCG

Tank capacities and free surface moments are calculated for the upright hull (zero trim and zero heel). The
effective rise in VCG due to the tanks’ free surface is calculated by summing the free surface moment of all
the tanks and dividing by the total vessel displacement (the free surface moment to be applied is specified in
the loadcase).

This method should be used when compiling a stability booklet for a design, as it corresponds with the
traditional approach used by naval architects and classification societies worldwide. It is reasonably accurate
at low angles of heel and trim.

In this case, the loading window will include a column for free surface moment and cells for corrected fluid
VCG. These values are automatically calculated from the maximum free surface moments of the tanks,
calculated in the upright condition. There are several FSM types available. For more information, see Working
with Loadcases on page 43.

Fluid analysis method: Simulate fluid movement

This method is a faithful simulation of the static movement of the centre of gravity of the fluid in each tank.
Every tank is rotated to the heel and trim angle being analysed. Stability iterates to find the fluid level for the
rotated tank at the specified capacity. The new centre of gravity is calculated for each tank and used in the
analysis. The new LCG, VCG and TCG are calculated for the whole design and used in the calculation of GZ,
KG, and GM.

This approach is used when the stability of a vessel is being investigated and the closest possible simulation
of the hull’s behaviour is required. It is particularly useful at high angles of heel or trim, or with tanks whose
heeled water plane area may be significantly different from the upright case (i.e. tall narrow tanks, or wide
shallow tanks). The penalty of using this approach is that the calculation time is longer, however the results
are significantly more accurate.

Page 235
Chapter 3 Using Stability

When fluid simulation method is selected, free surface moments and corrected fluid VCG are normally not
displayed in the loadcase.

When selected, fluid simulation is used for analyses that use a loadcase, i.e. Large Angle Stability, Equilibrium
Condition and Longitudinal Strength (the Longitudinal Strength analysis always uses fluid simulation). When
fluid simulation is used in one of these analyses, the actual fluid level in the tank, filled to the volume
specified in the loadcase, will be displayed in the View window. Otherwise the complete tank will be shown.

Density of Fluids

Where necessary, the density of sea water (the fluid in which the vessel is floating) and fluids commonly
carried on board can be adjusted using the Density dialog.

Density using the current units, or non-dimensional relative density (specific gravity), may be specified.
Alternatively, density may be specified using Barrels as the unit of volume. Conversions are performed
automatically. Specific gravity is calculated relative to a fluid having a density of 1000.0 kg/m 3.

By assigning a code to the fluid you can easily apply the fluid type in the Compartment Definitions table.
Tanks that have been specified as containing one of these fluids will be updated automatically when the
density of the fluid is changed in the Density dialog. Tank calibrations results and loading conditions will also
be updated.
Note

The vessel’s hydrostatics are always calculated assuming the vessel is floating in the fluid
labelled “Sea Water”. This is the first fluid in the list printed in bold font. If the vessel is to float in
a different fluid, it is necessary to change the density of this fluid. Note that only the custom
fluids may have their names changed. Thus, if you wanted to carry out an analysis for a vessel in
fresh water, you would change the density of “Sea Water” to 1000.0 kg/m3.

Page 236
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Saving and Loading Densities

Densities listed in the Density table can be saved and loaded using the File menu.

The densities file may be edited manually if desired. There is one row for each of the 18 fluid types. The four
columns, each separated by a tab character. These are fluid name, fluid code, specific gravity, color
respectively (the color is in hexadecimal for the red, green, blue components and are probably much more
easily edited in the Density dialog. The name and code for the first entry, Sea Water, cannot be changed (any
changes made will be ignored). All other entries may be edited (the same restrictions area applied as when
editing through the Density dialog).

Sea Water S 1.0250 6D00FF00FF00

Water Ballast B 1.0250 6D006D00FF00
Fresh Water W 1.0000 FF005F005F00
Diesel D 0.8400 FF005B00FF00
Fuel Oil F 0.9443 6D00FF006D00
Lube Oil L 0.9200 7F007F007F00
ANS Crude C 0.8883 3F003F003F00
Gasoline leaded G 0.7499 FF0000007F00
Unlead. Gas. U 0.7499 FF007F007F00
JFA J 0.8203 7F007F00FF00
MTBE M 0.7471 F600FA00C900
Gasoil GO 0.8524 FF00FF007F00
Slops SL 0.9130 FF006F00FF00
Custom 1 C1 1.0000 D6000300D600
Custom 2 C2 1.0000 D600D6000300
Custom 3 C3 1.0000 0300D600D600
Custom 4 C4 1.0000 D60003000300
Custom 5 C5 1.0000 DF00DF00DF00

If you make an error, you can always reset the densities to their default values in the Densities dialog.

Also see:
Windows Registry on page 16

Hog and Sag

Hog and sag have been reinstated in Stability. However the implementation is quite different than before.
Hog and Sag are now modelled by moving the waterline rather than deforming the hull. This means that it is
more akin to the vessel bending under the differential mass and buoyancy distribution rather than
accounting for a permanent set in the hull due to construction (or, in the case of a sailing yacht, rig tension).

Note on reported Draft:

The hydrostatics are computed with the hogged/sagged waterline. However, the reported drafts
are still measured from the Baseline to the flat waterline (this is the same behavious as for when
a wave profile is applied). You can use custom draft marks measuring the immersed depth to
USK if required; this will be the actual immersed depth including both hog/sag and waveform.

This means that the applied waterline change due to hog and sag does not change as the vessel trims or
heels. Below, Upright Hydrostatics with and without trim are shown with 1m of hog applied (note that during
hog the ends of the vessel are immersed more deeply; for sag, the ends of the vessel are immersed less
deeply):

Page 237
Chapter 3 Using Stability

1m hog with zero trim

1m hog with 0.5m trim by the stern

• If the center of deflection is Amidships, then the specified hog/sag value will be the observed deflection
at both the Aft and Forward Perpendiculars.
• If the center of deflection is Aft of midships then, the specified hog/sag value will be the observed
deflection at the Forward Perpendicular.

• If the center of deflection is Forward of midships then, the specified hog/sag value will be the observed
deflection at the Aft Perpendicular.

Page 238
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Waveform

Stability is capable of analysing hydrostatics and stability in arbitrary waveforms as well as for a level water
plane. To specify a waveform, select the Waveform command from the Analysis menu:

The water plane can be specified as flat, or as a sinusoidal or trochoidal waveform. If a waveform is specified,
the wavelength, wave height and phase offset can be specified. The wavelength defaults to the waterline
length of the hull at the DWL. If the wavelength is modified the wave height defaults to a value in metres of:
Wave height [m] = 0.607 √ Wavelength [m]
This is the metric equivalent of the US Naval standard wave height:
Wave height [ft] = 1.1 √ Wavelength [ft]
For short waves of wavelength less than 64m, the waveheight reduces linearly with wavelength given by the
formula:

Page 239
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Wave height = 0.075875 Wavelength

Once a wavelength has been set, the wave height may be modified.

The phase offset governs the position of the wave crest aft of the forward end of the DWL, as a proportion of
the wavelength. The phase offset varies between 0 and 1, both of which correspond to a wave crest at the
forward end of the DWL.

For example, a phase offset of 0.5, with a wavelength equal to the waterline length, will give a single wave
crest at amidships.

Grounding

Grounding is an additional analysis environment option for the Equilibrium or Longitudinal Strength analysis.
It is possible to specify grounding on one or two points of variable length. The Equilibrium analysis will
determine whether the hull is grounded or free floating and will trim the hull accordingly. Damage can be
specified concurrently with grounding.

If the vessel touches one or both grounding points, this will be reflected in the results:

The displacement column will show the total grounding reaction force in brackets; the
sum of the buoyancy and the grounding reactions equals the loadcase displacement.

The effective centre of gravity will be modified by the grounding reactions – a mass is
effectively being removed from the vessel; this will bring the effective centres of gravity
and the centre of buoyancy in line vertically. The value of KG, GMt and GMl are all
calculated to the effective centre of gravity. Remember that KG is measured in the upright
vessel reference frame (normal to the baseline); whilst GMt and GMl are the actual
vertical separation of the metacentres above the centre of gravity in the trimmed
reference frame normal to the sea surface.

Page 240
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note:

Grounding points are considered to span the transverse extents of the hull and therefore
constrain the heel to zero. The length of the grounding points is only used when considering
the load distribution for Longitudinal Strength analysis and not to determine the pivot point.
The vessel is considered to pivot at the centre of the grounding point.
When two grounding points are entered, the first point (edit boxes on the left) must refer to the
forward grounding point; the second grounding point is the aft grounding point.

Note: Fixed zero heel during grounding analysis

The equilibrium analysis will only consider the longitudinal balance of moments, i.e. the vessel
will not be balanced in heel and the vessel will remain upright (zero heel) even if the transverse
metacentric height is less than zero.

Stability Criteria

Stability criteria may be seen as the “environment of authorities” that the ship will be deployed in.

For more information see Chapter 4 Stability Criteria starting at page 257.

Damage

You can specify whether the model is to be analysed in intact or damaged condition using the Analysis
Toolbar.

Also see:
Damage Case Definiton page 87

Analysis Output

Stability will produce the following output data:

Page 241
Chapter 3 Using Stability

• Stability model visualisation

• Result data tables per analysis
• Graphs per analysis
• Report
• Report window
• Streamed directly to a Word document
• Report Templates

In this section:
• Reporting
• Copying
• Select View from Analysis Data
• Saving the Stability Design
• Exporting

Reporting

Stability has several options to do your reporting:

• Batch Analysis text file and/or streaming to Report window
• Automatically generate a report in the Report Window for each analysis run
• Automatically send the results to a Microsoft Word document (Word must be installed)
• Manually copy and paste tables and graphs from the Results Window and Graph Window
• Automatically Streaming results to Text file

The most efficient method depends on the number of loadcases and damage cases you have to analyse and
the output you require.

Form small number of loadcases and damage cases you can do a manual copy and paste of the results into a
report. This then allows you to validate the results at the same time.

For large numbers of cases, it is recommended to use batch analysis. Batch Analysis results saved as text files
do not include graphs. Select the option to send the results to the report window if you require Graphs.
Additionally, if the option to Stream the report to Word has been selected in the Edit | Preferences dialog a
word document is automatically generated after a Batch Analysis.

Streaming results to Text file

It is possible to stream the Analysis results directly to a text file. To do this:

• Results | Reporting Options
• Enable Spool Results to Report
• Select the option to Enable Text Reporting

This will send the Report document to a text file instead of to the Report window. After you have run an
analysis a text document is created. This also applies to Batch Analysis.

The default location of the text report file is in the same directory as the model file. The default file name is
the model name appended with the date and time. It is possible to set the location of the destination text file
and directory using the file picker in the Reporting Options dialogue.

Page 242
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Report Tags

The following Tags may be used in the report template.

Global Keywords:

These keywords can be placed anywhere in the document - any number of times and will be replaced with
the appropriate data the first time an analysis is run.

<Global-Table-Loadcase>
<Global-Table-KeyPoints>
<Global-Table-Criteria>
<Global-Table-TankDefinition>
<Global-Table-DamageDefinition>

<Global-Text-LengthBetweenPerpendiculars>
<Global-Text-FwdPerpendicular>
<Global-Text-AftPerpendicular>
<Global-Text-Midships>
<Global-Text-Baseline>
<Global-Text-DatumWL>
<Global-TankPlan>
<Global-TankProfile>
<Global-TankBodyPlan>

Analysis Specific Keywords:

These keywords must be kept in the blocks they are in, and will be duplicated as each of the associated
analyses are run. Not all keywords need to be used, so if the keyword is left out, that data is too. It's not
possible to format any keyword blocks or the data in them.
It is possible to put the keywords inside a block in any order. If a particular analysis is run more than once,
then it is inserted directly after the previous analysis results.

Upright Hydrostatics Analysis Results:

<Start Hydro>
<Description>
<Table-Hydrostatics>
<Graph-Hydrostatics>
<Graph-CurvesOfForm>
<Table-Rooms>
<End Hydro>

Large Angle Stability Analysis Results:

<Start Stability>
<Description>
<Table-Loadcase>
<Graph-Gz>
<Graph-GzDynamic>
<Graph-GzMaxSteadyHeel>
<Graph- GzHydrostatics>
<Graph- GzCurvesOfForm>
<Table-GzData>
<Table-Criteria>
<Table-KeyPoints>
<Table-Rooms>
<End Stability>

Page 243
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Equilibrium Analysis Results:

<Start Equil>
<Description>
<Table-Loadcase>
<Table-Equilibrium>
<Table-Criteria>
<Table-KeyPoints>
<Table-Rooms>
<End Equil>

Specified Condition Analysis Results:

<Start SpecCond>
<Description>
<Table-SpecCond>
<Table-KeyPoints>
<Table-Rooms>
<End SpecCond>

KN Analysis Results:
<Start KN>
<Description>
<Graph-KN>
<Table-KN>
<Table-Immersion>
<Graph-Immersion>
<End KN>

Limit KG Analysis Results:

<Start LimitKG>
<Description>
<Table-LimitKG>
<Graph-LimitKG>
<End LimitKG>

Floodable Length Analysis Results:

<Start FloodLen>
<Description>
<Table-FloodLen>
<Graph-FloodLen>
<End FloodLen>

Longitudinal Strength Analysis Results:

<Start Strength>
<Description>
<Table-Loadcase>
<Graph-LongStrength>
<Table-LongStrength>
<Table-KeyPoints>
<Table-Rooms>
<End Strength>

Probabilistic Damage Analysis Results:

<Start ProbDamage>
<Description>
<Table-ProbDamage>
<Table-ProbDamageEquil>
<Graph-ProbDamage>
<End ProbDamage>

Page 244
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Tank Calibration Analysis Results:

<Start TankCal>
<Description>
<Graph-TankCal>
<Table-TankCal>
<End TankCal>

MARPOL Oil Outflow Analysis Results:

<Start MARPOL>
<Description>
<Table-MARPOL>
<End MARPOL>

Cross-flooding Analysis Results:

<Start CrossFlood>
<Description>
<Table-Loadcase>
<Table-CrossFlood>
<Table-KeyPoints>
<Table-Rooms>
<End CrossFlood>

Inserting tank plans in reports

For the following analyses:

Large Angle Stability
Equilibrium
Longitudinal Strength
Cross Flooding:

Tags may be included in the report template (see below) to insert tank plan drawings into the report.. These
are as follows:
<Global-TankPlan>
<Global-TankBodyPlan>
<Global-TankProfile>

Report Templates

Stability offers the ability to customise reports through a Report Template. This feature is only available
when sending reports to Microsoft Word.
With report templates, instead of just dumping the results of each analysis into a Word document, it is
possible to use template keywords to specify where in the document the analysis results go and where each
element of the output (such as graph, tables, etc) is placed.
This gives you much greater control over how the analysis results are output than with the normal Send
Report to Word option and allows you to customise your own report template document.

To turn on Report Templating you need to select it in the Preferences dialog box. Simply tick the box ‘Use
Word Templating’. Please note that Send Report to Word must be enabled before you can enable this
option. See the dialog box below as an example:

Page 245
Chapter 3 Using Stability

The Word Template File specified should be in .dot or .dotx/dotm (for Word 2007) format and will be used
when creating any future reports. You can use one of the sample templates provided, or you can build your
own template.

Two Report Templates have been included to get you started:

[Link]
This is an example of a complete Stability Booklet template – this document is the default
Word Template file for new users and is recommend for users wanting to quickly create a
Stability Booklet. Users can start with [Link] and then use it customise their own
report template.

[Link]
This document is a good starting point for creating your own customised template. It
contains an introduction to how templates are created and configured. It also includes all of
the basic analysis blocks and variables to get you started.

Both of these templates contain macros and toolbar items to make life easier when you design your own
template. These allow you to easily add and remove the analysis keyword blocks.

Page 246
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Note:

To edit a report template in Microsoft Word you will need to start Microsoft Word and then
open the template directly using the File menu. Simply double-clicking on a template
document opens up a new document based on the template (which is not what you want).

The location of these report templates varies depending on which operating system you are using.
On Windows XP/Server 2003 the default location for the report templates is:
• C:\Program Files\Maxsurf 14\Report Templates\

On Windows 7, 8 and Vista the default location for the report templates is:
• C:\Users\Public\Documents\Maxsurf\MAXSURF20\Report Templates
Note:

Report templates are not provided for the MOSES version since Stability does not generate
reports in this version.

Tips:

The layout of most tables and graphs which may be customised using the Dsplay | Data Format command
may be saved and imported using to a JSON file allowing table formats to be consistently adjusted very
easily. The Data Format files may also be imported through the COM automation interface:
[Link]

See also:
Copying Tables on page 248 for tips on how to include the table header in a copy paste
to for example Excel
Graph Formatting on page 288 for tips on how to format your graph prior to copying to
another application.
Data Format on page 315 for tips on how to specify what should be displayed and
customise how to display tables (vertical or horizontal).

Copying & Printing

A range of options for transferring data from Stability to other programs such as spreadsheets and word
processors is provided through copy and paste functions. This data transfer works both ways: e.g. copying
and pasting data to and from Excel spreadsheets allows you to use the full spreadsheet capabilities of Excel
on your Stability model.

Copying Hull Views

Pictures of the hull in the View windows may be copied to the Clipboard using the Copy command from the
Edit menu. The image copied is as per the image displayed in the Stability view window.

These pictures can then be pasted into other applications or the Stability Report window.

To copy a simple bitmap image of the view at the current resolution, use Ctrl+I; additionally, a bitmap of the
current image may be saved by pressing Ctrl+Shift+I

Page 247
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Copying Tables

Tables may be copied to the clipboard. Simply select a cell, row, column, range of cells or the whole table
and then choose the Copy command or Ctrl+C.

The data copied from the table will be placed on the clipboard and can then be pasted into a spreadsheet or
word processor for further work.
Note:

Copying data from the table with the Shift key depressed, will also copy the column headings.

Printing

Each of the windows in Stability may be printed. Simply bring the window you wish to print to the front and
choose Print from the File menu. Views of the hull in the View window may be printed to scale as in Modeler.

Prior to printing you may wish to set up the paper size and orientation by using the Page Setup command
from the File menu.

Print Preview

The page to be printed is initially displayed in print preview mode. To print the page click the Print button,
otherwise click the Cancel button.

The printing may be forced to be black and white. Choose the Colors button and select the options required.
Note that the print preview is not refreshed after these changes, but the selection will be reflected in the
printout.

The titles may be edited by clicking the Titles button.

Graph Printing to Scale

When printing the graph, it is possible to ensure that the graph is plotted to a sensible scale so that
measurements can be made directly from the graph. To do this, hold the shift key down when selecting the
print command for the graph. You will be asked if you want to print the graph to scale or to fill the page:

The scale used will depend on the length units that are currently selected. If these are metric, then the graph
will be plotted so that the grid lines are at one of the following intervals (If the current length units are
imperial then similar intervals will be used, but they will be inches instead of cm.): 1.0cm, 2.0cm, 2.5cm,
5.0cm.

Exporting a Bitmap Image

You may also export a bitmap of the rendered perspective view with the File | Export | Bitmap Image
command.

Page 248
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Select View from Analysis Data

For most analyses, each step from the analysis can be visualised when the analysis has completed. For
example: the angle of downflooding can be visualised by returning to the Stability table in the results
window, selecting the column at the required heel angle and select “Select View From Data” in the Display
menu.

In the View window the hull will be displayed in the selected position. This can also be done for Upright
Hydrostatics and the different wave phase calculations for an Equilibrium analysis in a waveform.

The Select View from Data can also be used to display the Curve of Areas graph for each intermediate
analysis stage, see Graph type on page 286.

Storing and Restoring Results

It is now possible to store results from all Stability analysis runs in a SQL database. These results can then be
restored at any time including sending these past results to report.

Store Results in Database

To turn the storing of results in the database on/off toggle “Store Results in Database” menu option in the
Results menu.

When turned on, every time an analysis is run the results and associated settings are stored in a SQLite
database. This database is created in the same folder as the model file and has the same name but with the
extension “db”. Stability provides a range of tools to query and edit this database. In addition you can
directly access this data to create their own reports or spreadhseets. The “[Link]” database can be
opened with a SQLite editor or imported in to Microsoft Excel for example by using the Data From Microsoft
Query function.

There are a lot of tables in the database, many of them referring to analysis settings. The most useful to the
user is likely to be the results found in the table “Stability_Data”.

Reload Previous Results from Database

It is possible to restore previous results sets from the database at any time by selecting “Reload Previous
Results from Database” from the Results menu.

Page 249
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Reload Results dialog

A list of current results is shown filtered by Loadcase and Damage Case. Select the Loadcase and Damage
case that you wish to restore the results for from the drop down boxes. For analysis types where the
Loadcase or Damage Case is not relevant “n/a” is shown and you don’t need to make a selection from the
drop downs.

You may select one set of results per analysis type to restore. Most recent analyses are shown first. Double
click on any column heading to sort by that column..

Create Report from Database

Choose the “Create Report from Database” option from the Results menu to stream past analysis results to a
report, including straight to Microsoft Word.

Page 250
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Create Report from Database dialog

From the above dialog enter a number in to the Order column to send the results to the report. Clicking
Order All will fill each row in chronological order. When you click OK each results set will be restored in order
and then sent to the [Link] order that you have defined will be preserved for the next time that you use
this dialog.

Edit Results Database

It is possible to manage the database by choosing the “Edit Results Database” command from the Results
menu. The following dialog will be shown.

Edit Results Database dialog

Select any results in the database that you wish to delete. As well as results that refer to current Load Case
and Damage Cases, those that refer to previous versions are also shown but in italics. Click Select Old Results
to select these. Click Del Selected to delete the selected results.

In addition you can edit the default Title and Despcription fields using this dialog. Click OK to save your
changes.

Results Database Options

The Results Database options can be changed using the dialog of this name accessed from the Reslults
menu. The following settings can be changed:

Restore results from databse when opening a design

When you open a model if there is an attached database the results, and their settings, will be restored for
the most recent analysis run from each analysis type that corresponds to the current Load Case and Damage
Case. This is like continuing working from the last point that you had this model open.

Page 251
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Restore results from database when current Loadcase or Damage case is changed

With this option turned on, when you change the current Loadcase or Damage case, if there are results that
match the new selection they will automatically be reloaded.

Automatically delete obsolete results when new results generated

With this option turned on, when you run a new analysis any older results of the same analysis type,
Loadcase and Damage case combination that are stored in the results database will automatically be deleted.
This option is intended to help the user maintain the database and stop it from getting too large, which can
then be slow to access.

Automatically delete obsolete results when Loadcase or Damage case edited

If a Loadcase of Damage case is edited any results that relate to it are out of date. With this option turned on
they will automatically be deleted from the results database.

Automatically delete all results when geometry changes

If the geometry of the model changes then the whole results database will be cleared when this option is
turned on.

Saving the Stability Design

Stability design data may be saved

• Saving in a Stability Design File
• Saving Input Files separately

Saving in a Stability Design File

To save the design in one file, ensure that the View window is topmost and select Save from the File menu.
The Stability data is saved in a .hmd file with the same name as the design.

Saving Input Files separately

In addition to saving all the data together, the data in the individual tables such as loadcases, damage cases,
compartment definition, key points etc., may also be saved separately.

For more information on file properties and extensions in Stability, please see:
File Extension Reference Table on page 452.
Note

Although all Stability model data is saved in the .hmd file automatically every time you press
Save from any of the design windows, it is recommended to also save the Stability input files
separately. This gives the option of loading common data into different design files. E.g. for
comparing the characteristics of vessels which have only minor differences in hull shape and
identical tank layouts and loadcases.

Page 252
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Saving Loadcases to a File

Once you have set up a loading spreadsheet, you can save it in a file on disk. This allows
the same loading spreadsheet to be recalled at any time for use with the same design or
with any other hull.

To save the loadcase table, ensure the Loadcase window is topmost on the screen and
choose Save Load Case from the File Menu. Selecting this option saves all the loads
displayed in the current tab in the Loadcase window.
Saving Damage Cases to a File
Bring the Damage window to the front and select Save Damage Cases or Save Damage
Cases As from the file menu.
Saving Compartment Definitions to a File
To save a compartment definition to a file, bring the Input window to the front and
choose the compartment definition table; select Save Compartment Definition from the
File menu. You will be asked to name the file and select where it is to be saved.
Saving Input Window Tables
To save a input window table to a file, bring the Input window to the front and choose
the required input table; select Save from the File menu. You will be asked to name the
file and select where it is to be saved.

Saving Results to a File

Once you have performed an analysis, the data generated may be saved as a text file. This allows for further
calculations to be done in a spreadsheet or for formatting to be done in Word, Excel or other programs.

To save the data, ensure the Results window is topmost on the screen and choose the table containing the
data you wish to save. Select Save or Save As from the File Menu.

Selecting this option saves all the data currently displayed in the Results window. The Results files are saved
as tab delimited text, meaning that they can be read directly into spreadsheets such as Excel with values
being placed in individual spreadsheet cells.

Exporting

The data export function in Stability is similar to Modeler. Some Stability-specific export features are
described below.

Page 253
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Data export dialog in Stability.

DXF export
Contains all lines displayed in the active design window as closed poly-lines. In addition,
each tank, compartment and non-buoyant volume is exported on a separate layer. This
export function is particularly useful to export tank arrangement drawings.
Note:

The layer name is the same as the compartment name, so it is important to have unique
compartment names.
For more information on data export of DXF and IGES, please see the “Output of Data” section in the
Modeler manual.

Results graphs may also be exported to a DXF file.

Exporting dxf Lines Plan

An auto generated dxf lines plan (including tank plan) can be generated from the File | Export | Lines Plan…
function.
All contours that are visible will be displayed in the lines plan. The lines plan will show the three orthogonal
views, with each group of contours (tanks etc) displayed on individual layers in the dxf file. The most
common use of this function is to export the outlines of the vessel and tank plans for use in documentation.
A typical example for the model below:

Page 254
Chapter 3 Using Stability

Produces the following dxf tank plan:

Exporting the Model to Stability Version 8.0

After Stability version 8, a major change to the Stability file structure was made. Stability models created in
versions greater than version 8.0 can be exported using the File | Export menu so that it is compatible with
Stability version 8.0. All key points will become downflooding points in the version 8 file and any tank
sounding pipe information will be lost.

Page 255
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

This chapter describes how stability criteria are used in Stability. Stability criteria are evaluated for Large
Angle Stability, Equilibrium and Limiting KG calculations. A fixed sub-set of criteria is used for the Floodable
length analysis and these criteria are accessed in their own, simplified dialog.

The following sections will be discussed:

• Criteria Concepts, an overview of what capabilities Stability offers with regards to stability criteria.
• Criteria Procedures, explanation how to work with the Stability criteria dialog to create your own custom
set of criteria.
• Criteria Results, criteria evaluation results
• Nomenclature, explanation of terms and definitions

See also:
• Appendix B: Criteria file format
• Appendix C: Criteria Help
• Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Criteria Concepts

Stability includes a wide range of template criteria (or: parent criteria) as well as pre-defined custom criteria
such as IMO, HSC, DNV, ISO and more. Stability uses a single dialog to control all the stability criteria. This
makes it quick and easy to set which criteria should be included for analysis and to change criteria
parameters. It is also possible for users to create their own custom sets of criteria. Users may save, import
and edit their criteria sets. These custom criteria files may be easily transferred via email.

Criteria may be identified as intact or damage criteria (or both). This ensures that the correct criteria are
evaluated and displayed during normal and batch analysis. Although all criteria are displayed in the criteria
table, only criteria that are applicable are added to the report; i.e.: if the intact case is being computed, only
the criteria that are selected for evaluation during an intact analysis will be evaluated and added to the
report, similarly for the damage cases.

Criteria results are added to the Report after a Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analysis. However, only
the applicable criteria are added to the report (although all are displayed in the Results table); i.e. after an
Equilibrium analysis only those criteria that are evaluated from Equilibrium data are added, and after a Large
Angle Stability analysis only GZ based criteria are added to the report.

Help information relating to the use and parameters of each criterion is displayed in the lower right hand
corner of the dialog.

Criteria List Overview

Stability includes a wide range of criteria. These criteria are listed using in a tree control on the left-hand side
of the criteria dialog. This section describes how this list of criteria can be divided up in to Parent heeling
arms, Parent criteria, predefined custom criteria and user created custom criteria. This section also explains
how all criteria can be divided up into two different criteria types: equilibrium and GZ curve based.

Page 257
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

The criteria tree list

Parent Calculations
This folder contains calculations that are required for certain criteria parameters, for
example, the roll-back angle required for the IMO IS code Severe wind and rolling
(weather) criterion.

These calculations may be referenced in certain criteria.

Parent calculations in Stability Criteria dialog

Parent Heeling Arms
In most cases a ship is subject to specific heeling moments. Those heeling moment are
then used in a number of different criteria. The Stability criteria list contains Parent
Heeling Arms that can be copied into a custom criteria folder and then cross-referenced
into the stability criteria.

Page 258
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

The advantage of using cross-referenced Heeling Arms is that a heeling arm is now
defined (and edited) in only one place. This ensures that all criteria which use a specific
heeling arm use exactly the same heeling arm. Another benefit is that, since the heeling
arm is defined in one place, it is only displayed once in the GZ graph and not duplicated
for each criterion that uses it. Furthermore some newer heeling arm criteria are only
available for cross-referenced heeling arms and a greater variety of heeling arm
definitions are available through cross-referencing.
Parent Criteria
The Parent Criteria group contains all the parent criteria types that are available in
Stability. Each parent criterion allows you to perform a specific calculation; these are the
fundamental criteria from which criteria for specific codes are derived.

Parent criteria are special in that you cannot rename, delete or add criteria to the Parent
Criteria group. Also the parent criteria settings cannot be saved, they will always revert to
their default values when Stability is restarted. This is because the parent criteria are
intended for use as templates from which you can derive your own custom criteria. This is
done by dragging the required parent criteria in to the “My custom criteria” group or any
other group you create.

To distinguish the Parent criteria from your derived criteria, they are displayed in bold
text in the Criteria list.
Predefined Custom Criteria
A number of criteria files containing criteria for specific codes are supplied with Stability.
These may be found in the “HMSpecificCriteria” folder. This folder can be found in the
application installation folder, typically:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Bentley\Engineering\Maxsurf 20 V8i\HMSpecificCriteria

Most specific criteria are locked; those that are not locked require your ship design data
to be input.

Also see
Working with Criteria Libraries on page 267
Appendix D: Specific Criteriaon page 421.

Custom Criteria
You can create your own set of criteria in the tree as well. This is explained in the section
on Working with Criteria on page 262.

Page 259
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Types of criteria

There are two fundamental types of criteria:

Equilibrium criteria
Equilibrium criteria are evaluated after an Equilibrium analysis and refer only to the
condition of the vessel in its equilibrium state For example: margin line immersion tests,
freeboard measurements, trim angle, metacentric height, etc. This type of criterion is also
used by the Floodable Length analysis. Equilibrium criteria can be recognised by the
icon.
Criteria derived from measurements of the GZ curve.
These are calculated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and during a Limiting KG
analysis. For example, area under GZ curve between specified limits, angle of maximum
GZ, etc. These criteria are often referred to as Large Angle Stability (LAS) or GZ criteria.

Note that there is some cross-over between the criteria types, notably angle of equilibrium heel. This can be
measured from the GZ curve by looking for an up-crossing of the GZ=0 axis. The equilibrium heel angle is
also a fundamental output of the Equilibrium analysis. The same also applies for GMt. For this reason, in
some criteria sets some criteria are included twice, once in the form of an Equilibrium criterion and again as a
Large Angle Stability criterion.

For a criterion to be used in the search for maximum VCG in the Limiting KG analysis, it must be a LAS
criterion. This is because it is only this type of criteria that is more likely to pass as VCG is reduced. A check is
also made to ensure that any selected Equilibrium criteria are passed, but they cannot be included directly in
the search algorithm.

You will notice that different icons are used to differentiate between different types of criteria. These icons
are derived from the parent criterion type. The different types of criteria and their icons are described below:

Folder icon, create separate folders to store related criteria. All folders must have
unique names (even if the parent folders have different names).
Equilibrium criterion. These criteria are evaluated only after an equilibrium
analysis has been performed.
GZ criterion. These criteria make measurements from the GZ curved obtained
from a Large Angle Stability analysis.
GZ area criterion
GZ criterion with heeling arm
GZ area criterion with heeling arm
GZ criterion with several heeling arms and their combinations
GZ area criterion with several heeling arms and their combinations
Combined GZ criterion. These criteria perform several individual tests on the GZ
curve. e.g. STIX.
Combined GZ heeling arm criterion. These criteria perform several individual
tests on the GZ curve including a heeling arm. e.g. Weather criterion.

See next: Criteria Procedures

Page 260
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Criteria Procedures

This section describes how to work with the stability criteria dialog.
• Starting the Criteria dialog
• Resizing the Criteria dialog
• Working with Criteria
• Editing Criteria
• Working with Criteria Libraries

Starting the Criteria dialog

The criteria dialog allows you to select which criteria are selected for inclusion in the analysis and change
their parameters. To bring up the Criteria dialog, select Criteria from the Analysis menu:

or use the Criteria button, , in the analysis toolbar:

Page 261
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

The criteria dialog is shown below:

Note:

The Floodable Length analysis uses its own set of criteria. The criteria command will bring up
the Floodable Length Criteria dialog when the Floodable Length analysis is selected.

Resizing the Criteria dialog

The dialog may be resized and a vertical and horizontal slider can be used to resize the width of the Criteria
List and the height of the Criterion Details areas.

Note that if, in the unlikely event that the dialog items vanish due to resizing the dialog, the dialog size can
be reset by holding down the “Shift” key when you open the dialog. This behaviour is the same as all other
resizing dialogs.

Working with Criteria

In the Concepts section it was explained how the criteria are listed in a tree list. This section explains how to
create and customise your own criteria from the Parent Heeling Arms and Criteria provided with Stability.
Page 262
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Using the Criteria Tree List

The tree works in much the same way as the file folders in Windows Explorer:
• Click on the “+” sign to expand the folder (or double click on it).
• Click on the “-” sign to collapse the group (or double click on it).
• Click on an item’s name or icon to select it
• Once selected, click again on the on the item’s name to edit its name

Some short-cut keys for the tree list:

Tree control smart keys Function
Alt+Keypad * Recursively expands the current group
completely
Right Arrow or Alt+Keypad + Expands the current group
Left Arrow or Alt+ Keypad - Collapses the current group
Up Arrow Move one item up tree
Down Arrow Move one item down tree
Space Include criterion for analysis

Criteria Tree Right-click Context Menu

Several options are available by right-clicking on a criterion or criterion group:

Criterion right-click menu

Include for Analysis:
Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated.
Intact:
Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated for
intact conditions.
Damage:
Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) should be evaluated for
damaged conditions.
Lock:
Toggle whether the criterion (or all criteria within the group) are locked. If a criterion is
locked, this prevents inadvertent editing of its parameters. Locking is used for criteria
belonging to specific codes where the required values are fixed.

Page 263
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Add Group:
Add a new criterion group.
Cut:
Cut the criterion (or whole criterion group) to the clipboard. This may then be pasted into
another location in the tree.
Copy:
Copy the criterion (or whole criterion group) to the clipboard. This may then be pasted
into another location in the tree.
Paste:
Paste the criterion (or whole criterion group) from the clipboard to the selected location
Rename:
Renames the criterion or group. This may also be done by selecting the label, then
clicking again in the label.
Delete:
Deletes the criterion or all the criteria and sub-groups within the group.

Defining new Custom Criteria and Groups

New custom criteria sets may be created by first creating a new criterion group and then dragging the
desired criteria into the criterion group. By holding down the Ctrl button a copy of the criterion being
dragged is created (unless it is a parent criterion, in which case a copy will be made regardless of whether
the Ctrl key is held down or not). Alternatively use the Copy and Paste functions from the right-click context
menu (see above).

It is extremely important to ensure that all criteria groups have unique names. If duplicate group names exit,
then loading the criteria file may cause unexpected results. As criteria (and new groups) are loaded they are
inserted into the first group that is found with a name that matches the name of the group to which the
criterion should belong. If there are groups with the same name, all criteria that should be in a group of that
name will end up in the first one and none in the second.

Cross referenced Heeling arms and Calculations (xRef)

Calculations and Heeling arms are cross-referenced in to stability criteria and if necessary they we be
evaluated. Calculations and Heeling arms will only be evaluated if they are used by at least one criterion that
is to be evaluated.

Calculations and Heeling arms should be placed in the same group as the criteria that will use them. The list
of available Calculations or Heeling arms that can be cross-referenced in a criterion is made up only of the
Calculations or Heeling arms that are in the same group. (This is to avaid hugely long lists of potentially
cross-referenced Calculations or Heeling arms.)

Moving Criteria

Criteria may be moved from one group to another by dragging them with the left-mouse-button or by using
the cut and paste functions in the right-click context menu (see above). Note that if you drag a criterion from
the Parent Criteria group a copy will be made and the original will not be deleted.

Page 264
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Copying criteria

You can use the Criteria Tree Right-click Context Menu to copy and paste criteria. Alternatively, you can hold
down the CTRL-key while moving the criteria you will copy the criteria.

Selecting the Criteria for Analysis

Criteria may be selected for analysis by ticking the tick box to the left of the criterion. Other functions are
available from a menu activated when the right button is clicked on your mouse. To select an entire group,
right-click on the group and choose Include for Analysis from the menu.

Editing Criteria

The specific details for a criterion are displayed in the table in the top-right of the dialog:

Criterion details table

To edit the parameters for a specific criterion, click on the criterion’s name in the tree and the criterion’s
parameters will be displayed in the table on the right. Edit the parameters as required and then select the
next criterion to be edited from the tree, or click the dialog’s Close button. Please note that the criteria are
updated as you change their data and that there is no “Cancel” function for this dialog. If in doubt, use the
File | Save Criteria command to save a copy of your current criteria selection and data before making any
changes in the Criteria dialog.

The parameters that may be adjusted have a white background; those which cannot be edited, have a grey
background.

The values that are required for passing a criterion are in bold.

Check Boxes in Criteria Properties Section of Criteria Dialog

There is some subtly different behaviour for the check boxes in the dialog depending on their context. In
most cases there will be group of related options used to define a criterion parameter. For example the limits
for an upper integration range or the individual criteria to be evaluated for a more complex criterion:

Page 265
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

In both of these cases the selection is cumulative and none of the selections are mutually exclusive. However,
at least one must be selected.

In other cases, where the items are mutually exclusive, the check boxes act as radio buttons and only one
may be selected. This occurs, for example, with the “Value of GMt at” criterion:

Finally a check box can be used to select whether a specific effect should be included, for example, GZ curve
reduction in the wind heeling criteria:

Criterion Pass/Fail Test

There are some subtle differences between the wordings for different criteria. For example one criterion may
state “Shall be greater than…”, whereas another may state “Shall not be less than…”. Stability allows you to
make this distinction by selecting the required comparison from a combo-box in the criterion row of the
details table:

Description Symbol Logical test

Shall be greater than > Greater than
Shall not be less than ≥ Greater than or equal to
Shall be less than < Less than
Shall not be greater than ≤ Less than or equal to

Damage and Intact

Criteria may be defined as intact or damage (both final stage or intermediate stage damage) stability criteria
(or all three). Intact criteria are only evaluated for the intact condition and similarly final stage and
intermediate stage damage criteria are evaluated when a corresponding damage case has been selected
(irrespective of whether there are actually any damaged compartments or tanks in the damage case). Criteria
may be selected for more than one type of condition; criteria that are defined for all three are always
evaluated.

Criteria that have the WoD option selected will only be evaluated if WoD is active and will use the WoD-
adjusted GZ curve; if criteria should also be evaluated using the normal (unadjusted) GZ curve, copies of the
criteria, without the WoD option selected, should be made.
Page 266
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

These options may either be set using the right-click menu or by ticking the appropriate boxes in the bottom
of the dialog:

Intact; Final stage and Intermediate stage Damage; and Water-on-Deck tick-boxes.

Working with Criteria Libraries

It is possible to load and save the criteria. The parent criteria, built into Stability are not saved, only the
criteria that you create or import will be saved.

Default Criteria Library File

When starting, Stability will try to open the default criteria library file called:
“Stability Criteria [Link]” by default this is located here:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Maxsurf\MAXSURF20\CriteriaStability Criteria [Link]
If this file cannot be found, you will be prompted to locate a criteria file:

You may select an alternative file or click the Cancel button to proceed and be given the default criteria,
which consists of the Parent criteria and a “My Custom Criteria” group.

The default criteria library will be automatically updated every time the criteria dialog is closed. Even if you
loaded an alternative file, updates will be saved in the default criteria library, either overwriting the existing
one or creating a new one.
Note

It is good practise to save the criteria file with the project in the project folder. That way, when
at a later stage you need to re-analyse the project, all criteria are still available. See Saving
Criteria below.

Saving Criteria

It is also possible to save the criteria into a new file. This can be useful when you are defining new custom
sets of criteria that you wish to keep separate or when defining criteria sets for different vessels. Choose Save
Criteria As from the File menu. This will simply export all the custom criteria (parent criteria are not saved) to
the specified file. Further updates will, however, continue to be saved to the default criteria library file that

Page 267
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

was opened when Stability was first started, so if you want to save any further changes you will have to
resave as described above.

Importing Criteria and Specific Criteria Files

New criteria may be added to your criteria list by importing them – choose Import Criteria from the File
menu. You will then be asked if you wish to keep the existing criteria:

If you choose “Yes” your existing criteria will be kept, if you choose “No”, all existing criteria except the
parent criteria will be removed and replaced by those in the file you are opening. The default criteria library
will be over-written with the new criteria so if you wish to keep any custom criteria that you may have added
to your default criteria library, you must save them in a new file first.

Note that when keeping your existing criteria, it is important to ensure that the group names in the file you
are importing are not the same as those that already exist. If this does occur, the imported criteria will be
found in the original groups, not in the new groups.

A number of criteria containing criteria for specific codes are supplied with Stability. These may be found in
the “HMSpecificCriteria” folder.

You can import several criteria files in one go using Shift, or Ctrl select to select multiple files in the Open
Stability Criteria dialog.

Page 268
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Criteria File Format

The criteria are saved in a Stability criteria file with the extension .hcr. The file is a normal PC text file, which
may be edited manually so as to generate custom criteria. The typical format of the file is given in the
following file:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Bentley\Engineering\Maxsurf 20 V8i\HMCriteriaHelp\[Link]
Editing this file will also allow you to add your own help text or associate rich text format help files (rtf) files
with your criteria.

Criteria Results

After a Large Angle Stability or Equilibrium analysis, criteria are evaluated and the results displayed in the
Stability Criteria table in the Results window. Criteria can also be re-evaluated without having to redo the
analysis when “Close and Recalculate” is selected in the criteria dialog. This allows you to edit criteria
parameters or selected criteria and re-evaluate using the existing analysis results. After calculation the
relevant criteria are also added to the Report.

Criteria Results Table

The tested criteria are listed one above the other. Intermediate values are displayed. Values that could not be
calculated, e.g.: angle of vanishing stability, angle of equilibrium, etc., have n/a in the Actual and/or Value
column. This is normally due to an insufficient range of heel angle having been used.

Results may be displayed in “Verbose” or “Compact” format (see above). The format for the results table and
the report are specified separately. Chose the Display | Data Format command when the Stability Criteria
results are displayed:

Stability criteria results window: compact format

Page 269
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Stability criteria results window: verbose format

User-customizable text in stability criteria

It is possible to customize text in criteria by double clicking in the 2nd column. Each occurrence of the
specified text will be replaced for that criterion (except in the warning dialog).

Page 270
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

User-customizable text.

Report and Batch Processing

As noted earlier, only the relevant criteria results are added to the Report and/or Batch file. Criteria that are
not relevant, i.e. any criteria that have a “not analysed” result, are not added to the Report (although they are
displayed in the Criteria Results table). For example damage criteria during intact analysis or Equilibrium
criteria during a Large Angle Stability analysis are not added to the report.

Also see
Reporting on page 242
Batch Analysis on page 223

Nomenclature

This section gives a brief description of the various values that are determined by Stability in the evaluation
of criteria.

There are two distinct types of criteria:

Equilibrium criteria
Equilibrium criteria are evaluated after an Equilibrium analysis and refer only to the
condition of the vessel in its equilibrium state For example: margin line immersion tests,
freeboard measurements, trim angle, metacentric height, etc. This type of criterion is also
used by the Floodable Length analysis. Equilibrium criteria can be recognised by the
icon.

Page 271
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Criteria derived from measurements of the GZ curve.

These are calculated after a Large Angle Stability analysis and during a Limiting KG
analysis. For example, area under GZ curve between specified limits, angle of maximum
GZ, etc. These criteria are often referred to as Large Angle Stability (LAS) or GZ criteria.
Note:

The metacentre is always (even for Large Angle Stability criteria) computed directly from the
vessel’s hydrostatic properties (i.e. water-plane inertia and immersed volume) at the specified
heel angle and not from the slope of the GZ curve. This gives an accurate result that is not
dependent on the heel angles and intervals tested during the analysis.

Definitions of GZ curve features

Some typical GZ curves are shown below, the third graph shows the GZ curve with a heeling arm overlayed.

Typical GZ curve

Page 272
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Unusual GZ curve with double peak

GZ curve with heeling arm superimposed

Page 273
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

GZ Definitions

The table below defines how Stability calculates the various features of the GZ curve:

Angle of vanishing The angle of vanishing stability is the smallest positive

stability angle where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with
negative slope.
Angle of vanishing The angle of vanishing stability with a given heeling arm
stability with is the smallest positive angle where the GZ curve crosses
heeling arm curve the heel arm curve and where the GZ-Heel Arm curve has
negative slope.
Downflooding The downflooding angle is the smallest positive angle at
angle which a downflooding point becomes immersed.
Equilibrium angle The equilibrium angle is the angle closest to zero where
the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope.
Equilibrium angle The equilibrium angle with a given heeling arm is the
with heeling arm angle closest to zero where the GZ curve crosses the heel
curve arm curve where the GZ-Heel Arm curve has positive
slope.
First peak in GZ In some cases, the GZ curve may have multiple peaks;
curve this often occurs if the vessel has a large watertight
cabin. The angle of the first peak is the lowest positive
angle at which a local maximum in the GZ curve occurs.
GML or GMT Vertical separation of the longitudinal or transverse
metacentre and centre of gravity. The location of the
metacentre is computed from the water-plane inertia,
not the slope of the GZ curve. Note that the centre of
gravity used is the upright centre of gravity corrected by
the free surface moments of partially filled tanks in their
upright condition, rotated to the specified heel (and trim)
angle.
GZ Curve The curve of vessel righting arm (GZ) plotted against
vessel heel angle
Heeling arm curve A curve of heeling lever, which is superimposed on the
GZ curve. This is typically used to assess the effects of
external heeling moments, which are applied to the
vessel. These include the effects of wind, passenger
crowding, centripetal effects of tuning, etc. Depending
on the moment that they represent, the heeling arm
curves will have different shapes.

The heeling arms are never allowed to be negative; if the

cos function goes negative, the heeling arm is made
zero. If the heeling arm has a power of cos greater than
zero, the heeling arm is forced to be zero at heel angles
greater than 90° and less than -90°.
Maximum GZ Positive angle at which the value of GZ is a maximum

Page 274
Chapter 4 Stability Criteria

Maximum GZ Positive angle at which the value of (GZ - heel arm) is a

above heeling arm maximum
curve

Glossary

The table below describes some commonly used terms:

 Angle of heel measured from upright.

Deck Slope / The maximum slope of an initially horizontal, flat deck at
maximum slope the resultant vessel heel and trim. i.e. combined effect of
heel and trim.
Gust Ratio Used for some wind heeling criteria, the Gust Ratio is the
ratio of the magnitude of the gust wind heeling arm to
the steady wind heeling arm.
g = 9.80665ms-2 1998 CODATA recommended value for standard
acceleration of gravity
Roll back angle A negative heel angle change. Often a roll back angle is
measured from some equilibrium position; the resulting
heel angle after the roll back has been applied is more
negative than the original. Commonly used in wind and
weather criteria to account for the action of waves rolling
the vessel into the wind. If a criterion uses a roll back
angle, it is often necessary to calculate the GZ curve for
negative angles of heel.

Page 275
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Chapter 5 Stability Reference

This chapter contains brief descriptions of the tools available in Stability:
• Windows
• Toolbars
• Menus
• Ribbon

Windows

Stability uses a range of graphical, tabular, graph and report windows.

• View Window
• Loadcase Window
• Damage Window
• Input Window
• Results Window
• Graph Window
• Report Window

Assembly View and Property Sheet

An assembly view has been added to Stability, this makes it easier to control the visibility of individual tanks
and surfaces.

The Properties sheet can be used to change tank properties of the tank currently selected in the Assembly or
design View.

View Window

The View window displays the hull, frame of reference, immersed sections of the hull and any compartments,
and the centroids of gravity, buoyancy, and flotation. These positions are represented by:

cb centre of buoyancy
cg centre of gravity
cf centre of flotation
K location of keel (K) for KN
during KN analysis

You can choose which type of view is displayed by selecting from the Window menu or the View toolbar.

The Zoom, Shrink, Pan and Home View commands from the View menu may be used and work in exactly the
same way as in Modeler. If a Perspective view is shown, you may also use the Pitch, Roll and Yaw indicators
to change the angle of view. Please refer to the Modeler manual if you are unfamiliar with these functions.

You may set the visibility of the various display elements by using the Visibility command from the Display
menu. Two sets of visibility flags are maintained, one is used for all analyses other than tank calibration and
the other is used for when the tank calibration analysis is selected.

Page 277
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

If a view window is visible when an analysis is being carried out, it will display the hull shape using the correct
heel trim and immersion for the current step of the analysis.

After an analysis, the Select View from Data command in the Display menu may be used to move the hull to
a selected position from the Results window.

The view of the tanks, compartments and non-buoyant volumes can be toggled between an outline view and
a view of the sections.

Perspective view

In the perspective view, the model may be rendered.

The rendered view also enables tanks and compartments to be more easily visualised, especially when the
hull shell is made transparent.

The rendering options are to be found in the Display menu, with further lighting options in the Render
toolbar.

Please refer to the Modeler manual for more information on the different rendering options available in
perspective view.

Page 278
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Note:

Fastest performance will be achieved by reducing the amount of redrawing that is required from
Stability. For this reason, it is best to turn off sections, and especially waterlines, when
performing an analysis. You may then turn them on again after the analysis has completed. For
fastest performance, e.g. when running in Batch mode, minimise the Stability window so that no
redrawing occurs.

Loadcase Window

In the Loadcase window a spreadsheet table of all loads and tanks is displayed.

Using the tabs on the bottom of the window allow you to quickly browse through the different loadcases.

Stability allows you to improve the presentation of the Load Case window by adding blank, heading or sub-
total lines in the table. For more information see Working with Loadcases on page 43.

The columns that are displayed may be selected using the Display | Data Format dialog.

Damage Window

The Damage window is used to specify which tanks and compartments are flooded in each damage case.
There is always an Intact case, which cannot be edited, this is the default condition. If flooded volumes are
required in the intact case they should be defined as non-buoyant volumes.

Page 279
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Input Window

The Input window contains tables where the additional Stability design data is entered. The tables in the
Input window contain the:
• Room Definition
• Sounding Pipes
• Cross-Flood Definition
• Key Points
• Margin Line Points
• Modulus Points
• Bulkhead locations

The input window contains tabs on the bottom that allow you to quickly browse through the different input
tables.

Room Definition

This table can be used to define the tanks and compartments in the Stability models. For more information
see Modelling Compartments on page 59 in the Analysis Input section.

Page 280
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Sounding Pipes

This table is used to define the tank sounding pipes and calibration intervals. Default values are provided but
these may be edited if necessary.

Cross-Flood Definition

This table is used to define the cross-flood device connections between rooms.

Key Points

There are several types of Key Points:

• Down Flooding points
• Potential Down flooding points
• Embarkation points
• Immersion Points

Only downflooding points are used in determining the downflooding angle, which is used in criteria
evaluation.

Margin Line Points

The margin line is used in a number of the criteria. Stability automatically calculates the position of the
margin line 76mm below the deck edge when the hull is first read in. If necessary, the points on the margin
line may be edited manually in the Margin Line Points window (the deck edge is automatically updated so
that it is kept 76mm above the margin line).

Modulus Points

This table is used to define the allowable limits for shear force and bending moment during the longitudinal
strength calculations.

Bulkheads

See Floodable Length Bulkheads on page 117.

Results Window

The Results window contains ten tables, one for each of the different analysis types plus criteria results and
key points results tables. When switching mode, the currently selected results table will change to reflect the
current analysis mode. Note that results are never invalidated if analysis options are modified – it is up to the
user to ensure that the results are recalculated as necessary.

Setting the Data Format

It is possible to configure Stability so that only the results that you wish to see are displayed. To do this,
choose Data Format from the Display menu.

Page 281
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

A dialog similar to the one above will appear. Items that are selected with a tick will be displayed in the
Results window and on any printed output. Items that are not selected are still calculated during the analysis
cycle, but are not displayed. You may change the display format at any time after the analysis without having
to redo the calculations.

The data available for display depends on the analysis.

Data Layout

Most analysis data can be formatted vertically or horizontally to fit better on the screen or the printed page.
For example, with Upright Hydrostatics, the data can be formatted so that each draft has a column of results,
or so that each draft is on a separate row.

Page 282
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

To change the format, select Data Format from the Display menu, and select either the horizontal or vertical
layout button.

Key Points Data Result Window

Key points data is calculated for Large Angle Stability, Equilibrium and Specified condition Analysis. The DF
angle column is only visible when the analysis mode is set to Large Angle Stability and the Freeboard column
is only displayed when the analysis mode is set to Equilibrium or Specified condition.

Stability Criteria Result Window

If stability criteria are turned on in the analysis menu, they will be evaluated during Large Angle Stability,
Limiting KG and Equilibrium analyses. The results of the criteria evaluation are presented in this table after
Large Angle Stability and Equilibrium analyses. Criteria results are not displayed in this table after a Limiting
KG analysis. The results may be displayed in compact format:

Alternatively, the results can be displayed in verbose format, where all the intermediate calculations are
shown, by selecting the desired format in the Display | Data format dialog.

Page 283
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Rooms Result Window

It is possible to view the flooded volume and centre of damaged rooms and non-buoyant volumes. This is
currently enabled for the following analyse: Upright Hydrostatics; Large Angle Stability; Equilibrium, Specified
Condition and Cross -Flood analyses and Tank calibration. Where applicable, you can chose the condition to
be displayed with the pull-down menus in the Results toolbar (or the Display|Select View from Data menu
command -- though this is less convenient). For instance you can use this to see the different lost buoyancy
at each draft of an Upright Hydrostatics analysis or at each heel angle for a Large Angle Stability analysis. The
lost buoyancy of damaged tanks and compartments and non-buoyant volumes is given (intact tanks and
compartments show “n/a”). For linked tanks and compartments the result for each component is also given.

Page 284
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Rooms table in Results window

Water on Deck volumes

In the case of Large Angle Stability analysis with water on deck, additional columns will be shown which
display the additional volume of water on deck in each WoD compartment (as selected in the current
Damage case).

Graph Window

The Graph window displays graphs, which show the results of the current analysis. Stability will automatically
display the graph that displays the result of the current analysis when you select Graph from the Windows
menu or press the toolbar button. Alternatively you can select a specific graph using the Windows |
Graphs menu item. Only the graphs that are applicable to the current analysis can be displayed.

Page 285
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Graphs can be copied using the Edit | Copy command. And may also be exported to DXF from the File |
Export menu

Depending on the analysis mode, different graphs are available.

Upright Hydrostatics Analysis:
• Hydrostatics
• Curves of Form
• Curve of areas – different graph for each draft tested (selected using Display|Select view from data)
Large angle stability Analysis
• Righting Lever (GZ)
• Curve of areas – different graph for each heel angle tested (selected using Display|Select view from data)
• Max steady heel angle
• Large angle stability (hydrostatic data other than GZ)
• Curves of Form
• Dynamic stability (GZ area)
Equilibrium Analysis:
• Curve of areas
Specified condition Analysis:
• Curve of areas
KN Values Analysis:
• Cross curves (KN)
Limiting KG Analysis:
• Limiting KG
Floodable length Analysis:
• Floodable length
Longitudinal strength Analysis:
• Longitudinal strength
• Curve of areas
Cross-Flood Analysis:
• Curve of areas
Tank Calibration
• One graph for each tank

For many graphs you can select what is plotted and other options with the Display | Data Format dialog.

Graph type

Stability can graph many types of data depending on the type of analysis being performed. These graphs
include Upright Hydrostatics, Curves of Form, Curve of Areas, Righting Lever (GZ curve), Longitudinal
Strength, Floodable Length and Tank Capacities. These can all be displayed via the Graphs item in the
Windows menu.

Tip: You can use the Select View from Analysis Data option (page 249) to see the Curve of Areas for each
heel angle and/or intermediate stage during the analysis.

Page 286
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Interpolating Graph Data

To display an interpolated value from one of the curves, use the mouse to click anywhere on the curve. The
data in the lower left corner of the window will change to display the curve name and co-ordinates of the
mouse on the curve. Click anywhere on the dashed line and drag it with the mouse; as you move the cursor
the interpolated values will be displayed.

Note:

In case multiple curves are plotted in the same graph you can switch between the curves by
clicking on them. Stability will ignore the exact position you click on the curve to allow reading
all related interpolated values along the black dashed line.

GZ Graph

The GZ value, Area and corresponding heel angle can be measured by using the slider; the slider data is
displayed at the bottom of the Graph window. The area is integrated from zero heel angle to the location of
the graph slider.
Note:

Because the horizontal axis scale is always in degrees, the area is always given in units of
[Link] and cannot be displayed in units of [Link].

Page 287
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Note

The lower integration limit is always zero (irrespective of the equilibrium angle). Thus if you
require the area between two limits, you must subtract the area at the lower limit from the area
at the higher limit.

Curve fitting for GZ graph

A curve fit will be performed if all the heel angle intervals are less than or equal to 10˚. If this is the case, a
parametric cubic spline is used to fit a smooth curve through the calculated GZ data at the specified heel
angles. This ensures that the fitted line goes exactly through the calculated GZ points. If you wish to prevent
this curve fitting, add a heel angle interval of greater than 10˚ as the final step. This can sometimes be useful
if you expect a discontinuity in the GZ curve.

Graph data

The graphed data can be obtained by double clicking on the graph. Since the graph data contains more data
points than most tables in the results window, this double click can be extremely helpful to export the
analysis data to for example Excel fro further processing. Especially in the case of the sectional area curve,
where there is no tabular data available.

Also see: Copying Tables on page 248.

Graph Formatting

When you are in the Graph window you can use the View | Colors and lines dialog to change the colors of
the curves in the graph as well as the background. The View | Font command allows you to change the text
size and font size.

Page 288
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Copying Graphs

You can copy the contents of the Graph window using the Copy command or Ctrl+C. Note that the picture is
placed in the clipboard as a meta-file which can be resized in Word or Excel.
Note

When the graph is pasted in Microsoft Word®, the graph can be edited by right clicking on the
graph and selecting “edit picture”.

Graph grid, annotations and labels

The right-click pop-up menu in the Graph view now allows graph labels and annotations to be turned off:

Visibility of graph labels and annotations can be toggled

A Graph options dialog has been added, this allows some control over the number of gridlines displayed
(Right-click | Graph options):

Gridline density can be controlled

Furthermore, “Show Legend” has become a single toggle menu item, rather than two separate menu items.

Page 289
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Report Window

Note

It is recommended that you use the option to report directly to Microsoft Word unless you have
a very good reason not to.
Stability contains a Report window. This window is used to create a progressive summary of the analyses that
have been carried out. This report can be edited via Cut, Copy and Paste; printed, saved to and recalled from
a disk file.

Report Window Page Setup

When you are in the Report window, the File | Page setup command allows you to customise the page
orientation and size you wish to use for reporting. This is important because, inserted tables will be
automatically formatted to fit the current page set up. However, once the tables have been placed into the
report, their formatting will not be changed by changes to the print set up. Hence it is often most convenient
to select the desired report page set up before any analyses have been made. You can for example choose
the landscape Page Setup prior to running an analysis to make the tables fit better.

Stability will split most results tables so they fit the specified page set up. However, both Loadcase and
Criteria results tables will not be split.

Editing a Report

The Report window has it’s own toolbar permanently attached to the view, as well as a ruler showing you tab
stops, indentation and margin widths. Underneath all of this you have your actual editing area.

As the built-in report window only has basic editing and formatting functionality, it is recommended that the
report window be used only to accumulate the results. Once all the results have been gathered in the report
window, these should be saved and opened in a word processor such as Microsoft Word or Open Office for
formatting:
• set the results tables up as you want them to appear in the report (the report uses the same column
widths, fonts etc.); do the same for the graph widow;
• choose an appropriate paper size for the report (the tables will be split to fit this paper size, so choosing
a wide paper size will prevent all but the widest tables from being split);
• copy and paste the Stability report into Microsoft word. Use the Format | Autoformat function in Word
(with the default settings) to set the correct styles for the different levels of heading in the document,
this will facilitate generating a table of contents and also allows you to re-format the various styles (or
import a custom set of styles using the style organiser in Word).

Page 290
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

The information below is provided for reference, but it is strongly recommended not to use any of the
formatting commands in the Report window. The toolbar has a number of buttons that allow you to change
either the current settings, or the section of text that is currently highlighted.

The toolbar contains the following items:

Font combo box Use this to change the current font
Font Size combo box Use this to change the current font size
Bold Use this to toggle the Bold style
Italic Use this to toggle the Italic style
Underline Use this to toggle the Underline style
Color Use this to set Text Color
Left Justify Use this to set Left Justification
Centre Justify Use this to set Centre Justification
Right Justify Use this to set Right Justification
Bullet Use this to toggle Bullet Points

The Ruler comes in two formats, in metric and in inches - the format you have displayed on your screen
depends on the current Dimension Units you have (use Units in the Display menu to change this). The format
shown below is metric.

The Ruler allows you to set left, right, centre, and decimal tab stops. The tab stops are very useful for creating
columns and tables. A paragraph can have as many as 20 tab positions.

Page 291
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

The ‘left’ tab stop indicates where the text following the tab character will start. To create a left tab stop, click
the left mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The left tab stop is indicated on the ruler by an
arrow with a tail toward the right.

The ‘right’ tab stop aligns the text at the current tab stop such that the text ends at the tab marker. To create
a right tab stop, click the right mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The right tab stop is
indicated on the ruler by an arrow with a tail toward the left.

The ‘centre’ tab stop centres the text at the current tab position. To create a centre tab stop, hold the shift
key and click the left mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The centre tab stop is indicated on
the ruler by a straight arrow.

The ‘decimal’ tab stop aligns the text at the decimal point. To create a decimal tab stop, hold the shift key
and click the right mouse button at the specified location on the ruler. The decimal tab stop is indicated on
the ruler by a dot under a straight arrow.

To move a tab position using the mouse, simply click the left mouse button on the tab symbol on the ruler.
While the mouse button is depressed, drag the tab to the desired location and release the mouse button.

To clear a tab position, simply click on the desired tab marker and drag it off the ruler.

Normally, a tab command is applicable to every line of the current paragraph. However, if you highlight a
block of text before initiating a tab command, the tab command is then applicable to all the lines in the
highlighted block of text.

Keyboard Support for Reports

In addition to menu support, there are also several useful keystrokes that are available while editing the
report. These are listed below for convenience:
Ctrl+B Toggle Bold on/off
Ctrl+U Toggle Underline on/off

Ctrl+PageUp Position at the top of the report

Ctrl+PageDown Position at the bottom of the report

Ctrl+Enter Insert a page break

Opening and Saving the Report

The report can be saved to a file or read in from a file using the Save and Open Menu commands with the
report window highlighted. This is useful if you wish to append an analysis to a report that had been
calculated at some time in the past. (Load in the old report, perform the analyses; the new results will be
appended to the end of the report which may then be resaved).

Pasting images into the report

Sometimes, it is desirable to insert schematic images of the vessel into the report. This is very easily done, by
copying an image from one of the design views and then pasting it into the report at the desired location.
The image copied is as per the image displayed in the Stability view window. Ensure that the colors selected
will be easily visible in the white background of the report view.
Page 292
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Depending on which Microsoft operating system you are using (notably Win98), the image may not maintain
its aspect ratio and may be pasted into the report as a square. To overcome this problem, paste the image
into Microsoft Word first, then copy it from Word back into the Stability report window.

Toolbars

Stability has a number of icons arranged in toolbars to speed up access to some commonly used functions.
You can hold your mouse over an icon to reveal a pop-up tip of what the icon does.

File Toolbar

The File toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands:
New – Open – Save – Cut – Copy – Paste – Print

Edit Toolbar

The Edit toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands:
Add Row - Delete Row | Sort Loadcase Rows – Move Loadcase/Tank Row up – Move Loadcase/Tank Row
Down

View Toolbar

The View toolbar contains icons that execute the following commands:
Saved Views combo – Zoom – Shrink – Zoom Extents – Pan – Rotate – Saved Views dialog – Home View – Set
Home View – Assembly window – Properties Pane.

The Rotate command is only available in the Perspective window.

Page 293
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Analysis Toolbar

The Analysis toolbar contains icons for selecting the current analysis, loadcase and damage case:
Analysis Type – Current Loadcase – Current Damage Case

The Analysis toolbar also contains icons that execute the following commands:
Criteria (dialog) | Start Analysis – Pause Analysis – Resume Analysis | Update Tank Values in Loadcase

The “Update Tank Values in Loadcase” is exactly the same as the menu command for “Recalculate Tanks and
Compartments on page 313.

Window Toolbar

Allows quick switching between commonly used windows:

Perspective – Plan – Profile – Body Plan |
Loadcase – Damage Case – Probabilistic Damage |
Room – Sounding Pipe – Cross-Flood – Key Points – Margin Line – Modulus – Bulkheads |
Results for Current Analysis – Criteria Results – Key Point Results – Room Results |
Graph – Report

Design Grid Toolbar

The Design Grid toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views
Frame of Reference | Toggle Design Grid Visibility
Design Grid | Design Grid Labels | Design Grid Tickmarks

Visibility Toolbar

The Visibility toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views:
Sections – Datum Waterline – Waterlines |
Key Points – Margin Line |
Loadcase mass items |
Cross-Flood connectiosn |
Tanks – Damaged Tanks – Compartments – Damaged Compart. – Linked Negative Compartment. – NBV –
Room Names – Room Centers – Room Fluid Level – Sounding Pipes – Room Sections – Room Outlines –
Room Shading – Room Diagonals |
Probabilistic Damage Zones

* NBV = Non Buoyant Volume

Page 294
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Edge VIsibility Toolbar

The Visibility toolbar contains icons that show or hide various items in the graphical views:
Hull Surface Edges – Internal Surface Edges – Feature Edges – Bonded Edges

Render Toolbar

Render – Render transparent – Toggle custom light 1 – Toggle custom light 2 – Toggle custom light 3 –
Toggle custom light 4 – Customise light settings

Report Toolbar

Spool results to report

Results Toolbar

Condition parameter 1 – Condition parameter 2

View (extended) Toolbar

Set Home View – Color – Font – Preferences – Properties

Page 295
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Display (extended) Toolbar

Hide DXF – Show DXF – Delete DXF – Hide Image – Show Image –Image Zero Point –Image Scale – Delete
Image – Animate – Display Zero Point

Extra Buttons Toolbar

Add surface areas to loadcase|

Heel – Trim – Draft – Displacement – Specified Condition – Permiability – Fluid simulation – Densities –
Waveform – Hog/Sag – Grounding – Water on Deck – Batch Analysis
Data Format – Set to DWL – Set View from Data –Visibility Dialog – Show Single Section
Units – Coefficients – Frame of Reference – Draft Marks

This toolbar provides a number of buttons for commonly used commands in case you should wish to
customise your toolbars.

Menus

The following section describes all of the menu commands available in the Stability program.
• File Menu
• Edit Menu
• View Menu
• Case Menu
• Analysis Menu
• Display Menu
• Data Menu
• Window Menu
• Help Menu

File Menu

The File menu contains commands for opening and saving files and printing.

New

Creates a new table for whichever input table is frontmost, e.g: when the Loadcase Condition is the
frontmost window, the New command will create a new loading condition. When the Compartment
Definition table is frontmost, New creates a new compartment definition.

Open

When no design is open, selecting the Open command will show a dialog box with a list of available designs.
Select the design you wish to open, click the Open button. The requested design will be read in and its hull
shape calculated for use in Stability.

Page 296
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

If a design is already open, the Open command will open whichever file corresponds to the frontmost input
window.

Close

The Close command will delete the data in the frontmost window. Stability will ask whether you wish to save
any changes.

Selecting Close when one of the design view windows is frontmost will close the current design.

Save

Selecting Save will save the contents of the frontmost window to a file on the disk.

Save As

Selecting Save As performs the same function as save but allows you to specify a new filename preventing
the original file from being overwritten.

Import nuShallo

Allows direct import of a nuShallo pan file.

Import GHS

Allows direct import of a GHS geometry file. A full GHS model file may be imported directly into Stability for
analysis. Because the GHS file does not contain a full, interconneceted, three-dimensional model of the hull,
the geometry is locked: the tank geometry is locked and tanks cannot be added to the model.

When importing GHS files on systems with decimal character set other than “.” (EG European systems), it is
assumed that GHS files always have “.” as the decimal character.

The full model including critical points, tanks and sounding pipes are read from the GHS file.

It is not possible to have the first component of a part with negative permeability/effectiveness. If necessary
the components are re-sorted to ensure that the first component has positive permeability/effectiveness. It is
assumed that each part will have at least one positive component.

Stability only has one main buoyant component (the main hull), however it is possible to add other buoyant
components as Non-Buoyant Volumes (NBVs) with negative permeability. The option to do this
automatically is provided when importing in Stability from the File | Import GHS sections option:

Page 297
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Importing a GHS file with multiple buoyant components defining the main hull

These can be automatically added as NBVs with negative permeability

Secondary buoyant component (Rudder) successfully included in the Stability model as a NBV with negative
permeability.

Page 298
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

For compartmentation imported from GHS, the properties of NegLinkedTanks and NegLinkedComps are
now fully editable

The GHS component and (shape) that generated the Room entry are listed in the Formed column of the
Room definition table:

GHS Component and (Shape) names are listed in the Formed column
Because after a GHS import the negative-linked components and tanks and compartments are essentially
edited and modified independently from the positive components, their damage status and permebility is
also reported in the log files that are generated.

Import DXF Background

Enables you to import a DXF file into Stability to use as construction lines. The DXF file will be displayed in
the design views.

Import Image Background

Enables you to import an image file (jpg, gif, bmp or png) file into the background of any
of the Stability design views.

Export DXF or IGES

DXF exports sections as closed poly-lines. In addition, each tank, compartment and non-buoyant volume is
exported on a separate layer (the layer name being the same as the compartment name, so it is important to
have unique compartment names).
IGES exports the NURB surface data. See the Modeler manual for more information.

Page 299
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Export GHS

If you have a Hydrolink license, you may export the Stability model to a GHS geometry file. The hull, tanks
and compartments and key points are all exported. To enable the export command, chose Edit | Activate
GHS export.
Note on buoyant hull parts:

Stability supports only a single buoyant hull part with one byouant component. The buoyant
hull is exported as a single part with a single buoyant component (Non-buoyant volumes are
included in this part as components with negative effectiveness). It is possible that this might
cause problems for some models where the section through the hull at a certain location
contains more than one closed contour. In subsequent versions of Stability we will add the
capability to divide the main buoyant hull into different components.

Export Fredyn

Stability is able to export data suitable for input into Fredyn, exporting Stability calibration results, hull form
and compartment definitions into Fredyn input files. To export use the File|Export|Fredyn… command. The
Export will generate 3 files, all with the name you specify in the “Fredyn Export XML” dialog. The following
files will be generated

.xml: Containing compartment definition

.out: Tank calibration results and compartment definitions
.txt: Mesh file representing the current hull shape.

Before doing the Fredyn export ensure you have specified the desired trim and heel ranges, and performed a
tank calibration, as this information is required for the export.

Fredyn mesh group definition

When exporting from Stability to Fredyn you will be asked to name the .xml file and also the location to
which it should be saved. After assigning the .xml file name, the following dialog will appear:

“Fredyn group definition” dialog

This dialog is where the user will specify the values for the variables used to generate the mesh file that
defines the geometry of the hull.

The most important part of the procedure is setting up the groups required in the mesh file. The groups are
defined by selecting the surfaces to be measured and defining a boundary box that defines the limiting
extents of the group. Contours will be formed through the selected surfaces and then trimmed back to the
bounding box.

Fredyn group definition

Page 300
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

In the group definition dialog, any number of groups may be added and for each group.

The groups are defined by selecting the surfaces to be measured and defining a boundary box that defines
the limiting extents of the group. Contours will be formed through the selected surfaces and then trimmed
back to the bounding box.

In the Fredyn group definition dialog, any number of groups may be added and for each group you can
specify the following:

Name
This is the name of the group as it will appear in the Fredyn file. This name should be unique.

Color
The color to be used to draw the contours, bounding box and group name of the group once the contours
have been calculated. This is used in Stability
for visualisation purposes only.

Contours
The type of contours to be used: sections or waterlines. Generally sections (x = constant) are used for Fredyn
“body” groups and waterlines (z = constant) are used for “lift” groups.

For each group, sections are ordered starting from the furthest aft section tothe furthest fwd. On each
section the points are listed from the lowest point on the transverse origin plane (normally the centre-line
plane) up to the deck.

Waterlines are ordered from the lowest in the group to the highest; on each waterline, the points are listed
from aft forward.

Last section profile

If the group is made up of section contours (rather than waterlines), then it ispossible to have the last section
as a profile rather than a section. The profile is calculated from a buttock line placed at the group’s y-zero
point. For a monohull, this would typically be on the centreline; and for a catamaran, the demihull centreline.
If a number of contours are specified, the last contour will be the profile; if the grid is to be used for the
section locations, an additional profile contour will be added. The profile contour is still trimmed to the
group’s bounding box and is extended aft to the first proper section (a small gap is included so that it does
not duplicate points on the first section).

This option is selected on a group-by-group basis, by typing “Profile” in the corresponding “last section”
column of the group:

Page 301
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

‘Last section: Profile’ option turned on for containership with bulbous bow.

Profile option for wave piercing catamaran

Surfaces
Double click in this cell to select the surfaces that should be used to calculate the contours for this group. If
no surfaces are selected, the cell will be white with the text “none”. After you have selected the surfaces, you
will be prompted to automatically fit the bounding box to the extents of the selected surfaces:

Choosing “yes” will adjust the bounding box so that it contains the selected surfaces. Slight margins are
applied to ensure that the surfaces are completely contained and that the first and last contours go through
the surfaces. The dimensions of the bounding box may be adjusted manually if required. Choosing “No” will
leave the bounding box unchanged. By default the bounding box is assymetrical, i.e. only the starboard side
of the vessel is considered.

Number of contours
There are two options for defining the location and number of contours to be used in the groups:

Page 302
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Firstly you may use the design grid of sections and waterlines to define the contour positions. Do this by
typing “Grid” in this cell. If the contours are sections, then the sections defined in the Grid spacing dialog will
be used. If the contours are waterlines, then the defined waterlines will be used. You can edit the number
and positions of the sections and waterlines by selecting Grid Spacing from the Data menu: (Note that if you
wish to save any changes made to the grid spacing, then you will have to save the design file.)

Grid Space dialog

This method of specifying the sections is useful when a high degree of control over the contour locations is
required and also when it is required that sections in different groups in the stern region of the vessel lie in
the same planes.

The second way of specifying the contours is simply to enter the number of contours to be calculated for the
group. The contours are spaced equally along the length (sections) or depth (waterlines) of the boundary
box.

Number of points (on contours)

There are three options for specifying the number and distribution of points around the contour:
• Default
• Specified number

Default
The default option uses the standard Maxsurf data points. In this mode, the number of points can be
changed by changing the Precision in the Data menu. Default number of points (below) at different
precisions. Notice that at Highest precision, points are concentrated around areas of high curvature, but
removed from flat areas of the curve.

Medium precision High precision Highest precision

Page 303
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Curvature plot on contour.

Specified number
Alternatively you can specify the number of points on the contours. The same number of points will be used
on all contours. The points are spaced equally (within a few percent) along the girth of the contour.

Specified number of points – 50 (these are spaced equally around the girth)
Mirror offsets
To assist with the definition of catamarans, there is a “Mirror offsets” option. This mirrors the offset value
about the local y-zero-point when the data is saved. This is useful for the groups which define the inside of a
catamaran demihull. This option is specified independently for each group.

Fredyn group origin

This specifies the local origin to be used for the group. By default the longitudinal origin is at the bottom of
the aft most section; the transverse origin is on the centre-line; and the vertical origin is at the vertical zero
point. The longitudinal origin may be specified numerically, or you can type AP for aft perpendicular or FP for
forward perpendicular. For the vertical origin, again this can be specified numerically or you can specify DWL
for the datum waterline or Baseline for the baseline.

Bounding box extents

The bounding box is specified by giving the longitudinal positions of the aft and forward extents. The port,
starboard, top and bottom limits are specified. In body-plan the bounding box is rectangular, but for groups
of sections, the bounding box may taper in the plan and profile views if necessary; for waterline groups, the
box must rectangular in all three views.

Other features:
Adding and deleting groups
Page 304
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Additional groups can be added above the currently selected group in the table by clicking the Add button
or pressing Alt+A. To add several groups, select the required number of rows. Groups are deleted by
selecting the groups and clicking the Delete button or pressing Alt+D.

Non-Dimensionalise
Fredyn offsets are exported in the currently selected units, unless non-dimensionalised. Use this checkbox to
specify whether the output should be non-dimensionalised with respect to LPP.

Skin thickness
Skin thickness can included by ticking the “Apply skin thickness” checkbox in the Group Definition dialog if it
is projected outside (or on either side of) the NURB surface. Skin thickness will be included for all the groups
when this option is selected.

Fredyn group sorting

Groups may be sorted by double clicking on the column you wish to sort by. Successive double click cycle
through sort ascending, sort descending and unsorted.

Copy and paste

The table supports full copy and paste capability. So you can store your group definitions in Microsoft Excel
(for example, however ensure that the cells are formatted as text and not general otherwise the color and
surface selection data will become corrupted).

Export Render Mesh

Allows you to export the rendered image as a mesh file of the specified type. This
command is only available when the Perspective window is frontmost with rendering
turned on.

Export Bitmap Image

Allows you to export the rendered image as a bitmap file at the specified resolution. This
command is only available when the Perspective window is frontmost with rendering
turned on.

Import Main Criteria

Imports criteria from the selected criteria files. Current criteria may be kept or discarded.

Save Main Criteria As

Exports the current criteria set to the specified file. It is good practice to save the criteria library with each
project in a project folder.

Note that a branch of the criteria tree may be saved in its own file by right-clicking on the branch folder in
the Criteria dialog tree. The whole library may be saved by right clicking on the root “Criteria” branch; this is
not normally necessary as this is done after any major changes to the criteria definition.

Import Prob Damage Criteria

As for main criteria but applies to the probabilistic damage criteria.

Page 305
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Save Prob Damage Criteria As

As for main criteria but applies to the probabilistic damage criteria.

Rest Prob Damage Criteria to defaults

Results the probabilistic damage criteria to their default values.

Load Densities

Loads density table data previously saved from Stability – can be useful for synchronising the densities on
several computers.

Save Densities As

Saves the Fluid densities table data, see Density of Fluids on page 236.

Page Setup

The Page Setup dialog allows you to change page size and orientation for printing.

Print

The Print command allows you to print the contents of the frontmost window on the screen.

Exit

Exit will close Stability and all the data windows. If you have any data or results, which have not been saved
to disk, Stability will ask you if you wish to save them before quitting.

Bentley Cloud Services Submenu

Provides access to Bentley Cloud Services resources. You must be logged in with the CONNECTION Centre to
access this functionality.

Associate Project

Register the current file you are working on with a CONNECTED Project.

Disassociate Project

Unregister the current file you are working on from a CONNECTED Project.

ProjectWise Projects

Display the CONNECTED Project in your web browser.

Page 306
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Edit Menu

The Edit menu contains commands for working with tables.

Undo

Undo may be used with desk accessories, but cannot be used on Stability drawing windows or data windows.

Cut

Cut may be used in the Report window but cannot be used on Stability drawing or data windows.

Copy

The Copy command allows you to copy data from any of the windows, including the design view, input
tables, results tables and graph window.

Paste

Choose the Paste command to Paste data into the Loadcase window or other input tables, or the Report
window. Paste cannot be used in the View, Graph or Results windows.

Select All

Selects the entire Report.

Fill Down

Copies text in a table down a column like a spreadsheet.

Table

Performs operations on Stability’s Report window.

Insert New Table
Create a new table in the Report.
Insert Row
Insert a new row into the current table in the Report.
Split Cell
Split the currently selected cell into two separate cells in a table in the Report.
Merge Cells
Merge the selected cells in a table into a single cell in the Report.
Delete Cells
Delete current cell, column or row or a range of cells, columns or rows in the Report.
Row Positioning
Set Justification for the current table row or an entire table in the Report.
Cell Border
Set Cell Border Width for a single cell or range of cells in the Report.
Page 307
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Cell Shading
Set Cell Shading Percentage for a single cell or a range of cells in the Report.
Show Grid
Toggle table grid lines in the Report.

Add

The Add command is used to add an entry to the input tables (Load, tank, margin line point etc.).

Delete

The Delete command will delete rows from the input tables. If no rows are selected, the last row in the
window will be deleted, otherwise all selected rows will be deleted.

Sort Items

Sorts the selected rows in the Loadcase window

Move Items Up

Moves the selected rows up (if possible) in the Loadcase and Compartment definition tables.

Move Items Down

Moves the selected rows down (if possible) in the Loadcase and Compartment definition tables.

Add Surface Areas

This command automatically adds the surface areas and centres of gravity of all hull surfaces into the current
loading condition. This is useful for estimating the initial weight of hull plating.

Activate / Deactivate GHS Export

This command activates the GHS Import command in the File menu if a Hydrolink License is available. It can
also be used to release the Hydrolink license – a restart of Stability will be required for this to take effect.

Preferences

The Stability preferences dialog allows you to set your analysis tolerances (or: error values).
Preferences relating to Reporting and database storage are set in the Results menu.

Page 308
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

View Menu

The View menu contains commands for controlling the views in the graphics windows.

Zoom

The Zoom function allows you to examine the contents of the design view windows in detail by enlarging the
selected area to fill the screen.

Shrink

Choosing Shrink will reduce the size of the displayed image in the design view windows by a factor of two.

Pan

Choosing Pan allows you to move the image around within the View window.

Rotate

Activates the Rotate command, which is a virtual trackball which lets you freely rotate a design in the
Perspective view window.

Saved Views

Open the Saved Views dialog where you can add, edit and delete the home and other saved views.

Home View

Choosing Home View will set the image back to its Home View size.

Set Home View

Choosing Set Home View allows you to set the Home View in the View window. To set the Home View, use
Zoom, Shrink, and Pan to arrange the view, then select Set Home View from the View menu.

Colors and lines

The Colors and lines function allows you to set the color and thickness of the lines, labels, and graphs.

Remember to always be careful when using color. It is very easy to get carried away with bright colors and
end up with a garish display that is uncomfortable to work with. In general it is best to use a neutral
background such as mid grey or dull blue and use lighter or darker shades of a color rather than fully
saturated hues.

From the scrollable list, select the item whose color you wish to change. The item’s current color will be
displayed on the left of the dialog. To change the color click in the box and select a new color from the
palette. To Change the thickness select the thickness from the drop down list.

When Loadcase window is frontmost, Colors for the loadcase items can be set. See Loadcase Color
Formatting on page 49.
Page 309
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Font

Font command allows you to set the size and style of text.

The text style chosen will affect the display and printing of all text in the Report, Loadcase, Graph, Curve of
Areas, and Results windows.

Toolbar

Allows you to turn the Toolbars on and off.

Status Bar

Allows you to turn the Status Bar on and off at the bottom of the screen.

Assembly

Show or hide the assembly tree view.

Properties

Displays the properties sheet, which may be used to view parameters of selected objects (such as tanks).

Page 310
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Full Screen

Maximises screen usage.

Case Menu

Commands associated with the Loadcases and Damage cases

Edit Loadcase

Edit the properties of the current Loadcase (name and whether it is a loadcase or Loadgroup). Loadcases are
created, opened and closed through the file menu. See Working with Loadcases on page 43.

Add Damage case

Add another damage case

Delete Damage case

Delete the selected damage cases

Edit Damage case

Edit the properties of the selected damage case

Extent of Damage

Automatically finds the breached tanks and compartments due to a cuboid extent of damage (or in the case
of Probabilisitic damage, the zone or sub-zone).

Create cases from Zone Damage

Automatically creates damage cases based on the zones that have been defined for Probabilistic damage
analysis. (This is only required if you want to manually recreate some or all of the Proabilistic damage
analysis conditions; when running Probabilistic damage analysis, temporary damage conditionas are created
automatically.)

Max. number of Loadcases

Specify the number of loadcase tabs – this requires a restart to activate the changes made.

Analysis Menu

The Analysis menu can be used to change the current analysis mode. It also contains commands to set the
input data and analysis settings and environment options required for the current analysis.
Note:

It is good practice when preparing to run analysis to work down the Analysis menu starting at
the top and checking all of the settings and environment options.

Page 311
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Heel

Selecting Heel allows you to specify the three ranges of heel angles that you wish Stability to step through.
Separate ranges are used for Large Angle Stability, KN and Limiting KG analyses.

Trim

Allows the specification of the trimming mode to be used for the analysis. This can be fixed trim; free-to-trim
to loadcase; free-to-trim specifying initial trim value and free-to-trim specifying LCG position.

Draft

The range of drafts used for the analysis of upright hydrostatics can be set using this command. KG for the
upright hydrostatics is also specified in this dialog.

Displacement

The range of displacements used for the analysis of KN values, Limiting KG and Floodable Length can be set
using this command. The vertical centre of gravity to be used for KN and Floodable Length analyses is
specified here.

Specified Condition

Allows you to specify Heel, Trim, CG, Displacement and Draft for the Specified Condition analysis.

Permeability

The range of permeabilities used for the Floodable Length analysis are set using this command.

Calibration Options

Specify whether compartments and non-buoyant volumes should also be calibrated.

MARPOL Options

Select MARPOL Regulation and specify which tanks should be incuded in the MARPOL oil outflow analysis.

Cross-Flood

Allows you to specify the times, after initial damage, for the required intermediate stages to be computed in
the Cross-Flood analysis.

Fluids

Allows you to specify whether to use Corrected VCG method or Simulate Fluid Movement method when
treating the fluid contained in slack tanks. See Fluids Analysis Methods on page 233.

Page 312
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Density

This command allows you to set the density of fluids used in the analysis. See Density on page 236.

Waveform

The Waveform command allows you to perform analysis for a flat waterplane or sinusoidal or trochoidal
waveforms.

Criteria

The criteria menu item will bring up the criteria dialog. This allows you to specify which criteria will be
checked during the analysis.
See Criteria on page 257.

When the floodable length analysis is selected, the criteria command will bring up a Floodable Length
Criteria dialog with criteria that only apply to floodable length analysis.

Grounding

Specifies grounding on one or two points of variable length for use with the Equilibrium and Longitudinal
Strength analyses.

Update Loadcase

Checks for changed tanks and makes sure that any tanks and compartments that have not been formed are
correctly calculated. It then updates the loadcase with the correct capacities and free surface moments for
the tanks. Also recalculates totals and sub-subtotals after a row sorting or moving command.

Also see:
Tank Loads on page 52

Recalculate Tanks and Compartments

Forces all tanks and compartments to be re-formed from their initial definition. This command also updates
the loadcase.

If any of the tank boundaries are made up from boundary surfaces, it is better to use “Recalculate Hull
Sections” after re-opening the model to make sure the latest internal structure surfaces are being used as
well.

Recalculate Hull Sections

Deletes all existing hull, tank and compartment sections and recalculates them from the hull surface data and
compartment definition. This is particularly useful if the underlying model has been modified, if you wish to
recalculate at a different precision, or if you wish to modify whether skin thickness or trimming options are
applied.

Page 313
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Note:

To be able to update the Stability model to changes made in Modeler see Updating the Stability
Model on page 32 for a step-by-step procedure you can follow.

Snap Margin Line to Hull

Project all of the margin line points horizontally onto the hull surface, ensuring that the margin line follows
the hull shape precisely.

Also see:
Margin Line Points on page 107.

Set Analysis Type

Choose the analysis type you wish to use from the sub-menu.

Start Analysis

Selecting Start Analysis causes Stability to start performing the specified analysis. The analysis may be halted
at any time by choosing Stop Analysis from this menu, also.

Resume Analysis

If you have halted analysis by choosing Stop Analysis, Resume Analysis may be used to restart the calculation
from the point where it was interrupted.

Stop Analysis

This command halts the analysis at the current iteration. Note that the analysis may not have been
completed and in the case of large angle stability, equilibrium condition and KN values, any data displayed
for the final iteration may be incorrect.

Start Batch Analysis

Stability will run the selected analyses for all combinations of load and damage cases using the batch
processing command. Results are written to a tab delimited text file as specified by the user at the start of
the analysis.

Results Menu

The Results menu contains commands relating to the Reporting and Results.

Reporting Options

Open the Reporting Options dialog.

Page 314
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Result Logging Options

Open the Result Logging Options dialog which allows you to set which file to log probabilistic damage GZ
results to.

Spool to Report

Send the results of the analysis to the report upon completion. This should be turned on before commencing
the analysis to ensure that results are added to the report when the analysis is completed.

Store Results in Database

Toggle whether results are automatically stored in SQLite database everytime that an analysis is sucesfully
run.

Restore Results on Open Model

Toggle whether results are restored from your previous session from the database when a model is opened.

Restore Results when Active Loadcase/Damage case Changes

Toggle whether results are restored from the database when the active loadcase or damage case is changed.

Edit Results Database

Open the dialog that allows you to edit and delete results from the SQLite database.

Reload Previous Results from Database

Open the dialog that allows you to select which results to restore from the SQLite database.

Create Report from Database

Open the dialog that allows you to select which results to restore and spool to report from the SQLite
database.

Display Menu

The Display menu contains commands for controlling the data, which are displayed in the graphics and other
windows.

Data Format

Data Format allows you to choose which data are tabulated and graphed (Upright Hydrostatics, Stability,
Equilibrium and Specified Condition). A dialog box allows you to choose from a range of stability variables.
See Setting the Data Format on page 281.

Page 315
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Hydrostatic results Data format dialog

Used to select display options for Criteria results:

Criteria table Data format dialog

Used to select which columns are displayed in the Loadcase window:

Page 316
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Loadcase Data format dialog

When the Max. Safe heeling angle angles graph is shown as a result of a Large Angle Stability analysis the
Data Format dialog may be used to customise the graph layout:

Max safe heeling angle Data format dialog

May be used to customise the Floodable length graph:

Floodable length Data format dialog

Page 317
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

To facilitate consistent reporting and to make it easy to revert to a specific table and graph layout, it is
possible to save and import these settings. This may be useful if you wish to have the same layouts on
several computers or wish to easily change between several preferred layouts.

Save and Import Table and Graph layouts

The layouts are saved in JSON (JavaScript Object Notation [Link]/wiki/JSON) format which is
relatively human readable. However it is recommended that you setup your table and graph preferences
using the graphical user interface and the Display | Data Format command and then export the settings (as
opposed to manually creating the file).

The settings for following tables and graphs are supported (essentially any which support the Display | Data
Format command):

Input tables (column visibility and column widths)

• Loadcase table

Result tables (dataset visibility and column widths)

• Upright Hydrostatics
• Large Angle Stability
• Equilibrium
• Specified Condition
• KN (Cross Curves)
• Limit KG
• Tank Calibrations
• Cross-Flooding
Result tables (column widths only)
• Floodable Length
• Longitudinal Strength
• Probabilistic Damage
• MARPOL
• Criteria
• Room conditions

Graphs
• Upright Hydrostatics: Hydrostatics and Curves of Form
• Large Angle Stability: GZ, Hydrostatics and Curves of Form
• Sectional Area Curve
• Floodable Length and Probabilistic Damage

The Data Format files may also be imported through the COM automation interface:
[Link]

Set Vessel to DWL

Rotates the vessel back to upright and to DWL after an analysis has been completed (or Select View from
Data used). This is required for automatic update of the Loadcase (note that if you do not rotate back to the
DWL, the Loadcase will not update while editing – only when start another analysis). This is to ensure that

Page 318
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

tank data in the Loadacase are for the vessel in the upright condition, not for tanks with the vessel at the
final heel and trim of the last analysis.

Select View from Data

This function may be used to synchronise the display in the Design View window with one of the sets of data
in Results window. The view may be set from any of the results from Upright Hydrostatics, Large Angle
Stability or Equilibrium analyses. Simply highlight the column or row that corresponds to the condition you
wish to view and select “Select View From Data”; the Design View will change to match the condition in the
selected row or column in the Results window.

Visibility

The visibility of tanks, compartments, labels, hull contours, and other items in the design view may be set by
using this dialog.

Prob damage zones

Toggle the visibility of the probabilistic damage zones.

Individual Loadcase masses

Toggle the visibility of the individual mass items in the current loadcase.

Background

Controls whether the background DXF construction lines and the background images are displayed or not.
The background may be loaded from an existing DXF file using the Import function in the File menu. Tools
for positioning and scaling the background image are also here.

The commands in the submenu are only available when a background image or DXF has been imported. See
the Modeler manual for more details

Hide DXF
Hides the DXF background.
Show DXF
Shows the DXF background.
Delete DXF background
Deletes the DXF background.
Hide Image
Hides the background image in the current view window.
Show Image
Shows the image in the current view window.
Set Image Zero Point
Sets the image zero point. This command is not available for images in the perspective
window.
Set Image Reference Point
Sets the image reference point..
Page 319
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Delete Image
Deletes the background image in the current view window.

Design Grid

The grid submenu allows you to hide the grid or show the grid with or without station grid labels. The grid
can only be displayed when the vessel is in upright position on its design waterline. The option to display the
grid will be greyed out when the ship is currently displayed in, for example, a trimmed state at the end of an
equilibrium analysis. Switching analysis type puts the boat back into upright position on its design waterline.

Show Single Hull Section in Body Plan

Selecting the Show Single Hull Section item from the Display menu will change the display in the Body Plan
window to show only one section through the hull, as well as a control box, similar to the one in Modeler, in
the top right corner of the window.

The section being displayed can be chosen by clicking on the section indicators at the top of the control box.
Alternatively, the section chosen can be changed by pressing the left or right cursor keys on your keyboard.
This allows you to rapidly step through the hull sections from bow to stern.

Also see:
Show Single Hull Section on page 36

Render

When the Perspective window is the current view for the model the Render option may be toggled on and
off to render the surfaces.

Render Transparent

When the Perspective window is the current view for the model the Render Transparent option may be
toggled on and off. Render Transparent makes the hull surfaces of the model semi transparent so that the
rendered tanks and compartments within the model may be viewed.

Animate

This command is available for any analysis that steps through several steps. For example, when a waveform
has been specified and an equilibrium analysis is selected or after a Large Angle Stability analysis over a
heeling range.

Selecting Animate will animate the stability sequence in the design View window, through the range of heel
angles specified. You may set the initial viewing position in the Perspective View window using the Pitch, Roll
and Yaw indicators. When Stability has finished calculating the frames the sequence may be replayed by
moving the mouse from side to side. Clicking the mouse button will terminate the animation.

If animation is chosen after an Equilibrium Analysis has been performed in waves, the animation will
automatically cycle through the full range of wave phases, giving a simple visual simulation of the motion of
the hull through the wave.

Hold the shift key down while selecting the command to save the animation.

Page 320
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Data Menu

Units

The units used may be specified using the Units command. In addition to the length and mass units classes,
units for speed (used in wind heeling and heeling due to high-speed turn etc. criteria) and the angular units
to be used for areas under GZ curves, may also be set. The angular units for measuring heel and trim angles
are always degrees. See Setting Units on page 43 for more information.

Coefficients

Allows you to customise how you wish to calculate the coefficients as well as the display format for the LCB
and LCF.

See Customising Coefficients on page 42 for more information.

Design Grid

Access to the Design Grid is intended for information only. You are not expected to change the Design Grid
in Stability.

Frame of Reference

Access to the Frame of Reference is intended for information only. You are not expected to change the
Frame of Reference in Stability.

If the position(s) of the Baseline and/or Perpendiculars need to be changed from those defined in the model,
they may be changed using the Frame of Reference command. It is highly recommended that the correct
frame of reference be set in Modeler prior to loading the design into Stability. This will ensure that a
consistent frame of reference is used in all the programs. See: Setting the Frame of Reference on page 18.

Windage Surfaces

Lets you specify the surfaces that define the windage and underwater profiles of the vessel.

Draft Marks

Lets you specify custom draft marks at any position on the vessel.

Window Menu

For the items in this menu, each represents a Stability window. Selecting the item brings the appropriate
window to the front.

Cascade

Displays all the Windows behind the active Windows.

Page 321
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Tile Horizontal

Layout all visible windows across the screen.

Tile Vertical

Layout all visible windows down the screen.

Arrange Icons

Rearranges the icons of any iconised window so that they are collected together at the bottom of the
Modeler program window.

View Direction

Select the desired view direction from the sub-menu. The selected design window will then be brought to
the front.

Loadcase

Brings the Loadcase window to the front. The Loadcase window allows you to enter a series of component
weights, together with their longitudinal and vertical distances from the zero point. These inputs are used to
calculate the total Displacement and Centre of Gravity for Stability, KN and Equilibrium analysis.

Input

Choose from the Input item to bring the desired Input window to the front and display the Compartment
Definition, Key Points, Margin Line Points or Modulus table.

Results

Choose from the Results item to bring the desired Results window to the front and display the desired table.

Graph

Brings the selected Graph window to the front. The Graph window displays a number of different graphs,
depending on which analysis mode is currently active.

Page 322
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Help Menu

Provides access to Stability help and other resources.

Stability Help

Display the Stability help manual.

Stability Automation Reference

Display the Stability Automation Reference help manual.

Online Support

Provides access to a wide range of support resources available on the internet. You must have internet
access to access this functionality.

Service Request Manager

Submit and manage your technical support requests with Bentley Systems. You must have internet access to
access this functionality.

CONNECTION Centre

Display your personal CONNECTION Centre web portal in your web browser.

License wiki

Web portal for help on Bentley licensing.

Online Support

Provides access to a wide range of support resources available on the internet. You must have internet
access to access this functionality.

Service Request Manager

Submit and manage your technical support requests with Bentley Systems. You must have internet access to
access this functionality.

Idea Feedback

Access the web portal for submitting feedback and suggestions relating to Stability.

Licensing Feedback

Access the web portal for submitting feedback and suggestions relating to Bentley licensing.

Page 323
Chapter 5 Stability Reference

Check for Updates

Provides access to our website with the most recent version listed. You must have internet access to access
this functionality.

News

Display the Bentley Systems Offshore news feed. You must have internet access to access this functionality.

Legal Notice

Display the Bentley Systems Legal Notice.

About Stability

Displays information about the current version of Stability you are using and other diagnostic information.
Use this to obtain version and diagnostic information when reporting a problem to the Support Staff at
Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

Ribbon

A command Ribbon is available in SACS and MOSES versions.

Example of the Ribbon interface

Select the interface you find the most convenient

Page 324
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

This Appendix explains how the calculation of form parameters (C B, CP, AM, etc.) is achieved in Stability, and
investigates why differences with other hydrostatics packages may occur.

Definition and calculation of form parameters

Below is a summary of the definitions of basic vessel particulars and form parameters used in Stability.

Measurement Reference Frames

Results in Stability are given from the vessel’s zero point. However, because Stability treats trim exactly (the
hull is rotated not sheared when trim occurs), there are two frames of reference:
Ship or upright frame of reference
The “ship” or “upright” reference frame is that of the upright vessel with zero-trim. Here
the baseline is horizontal and the perpendiculars are vertical. “Longitudinal”
measurements are made parallel to the baseline and “vertical” measurements are
perpendicular to the baseline.
World or trimmed frame of reference
The “world” or “trimmed” reference frame is that of the trimmed vessel. Here the baseline
is no longer horizontal and neither are the perpendiculars vertical. “Longitudinal”
measurements are made parallel to the horizontal, static waterline and “vertical”
measurements are perpendicular to the waterline

Rotated reference frame (red) and measurements in the two reference frames:
Measurements in the upright vessel reference frame (green) and trimmed reference frame (blue)
When the vessel is upright (zero trim and zero heel) these axis systems are parallel. However if the vessel is
trimmed or heeled or rotated in both directions simultaneously, these axis systems are no longer parallel.

Page 325
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Ship-Fixed and Earth-Fixed(world) axis systems

The majority of measurements are given in the “ship” frame of reference. These include longitudinal centres
of gravity, floatation and buoyancy (LCG, LCF, LCB); and measurements from the keel such as KB and KG.
Measurements such as BM, GM, that are explicitly vertical, are measured in the “world” frame of reference, i.e.
GM is the true vertical separation of the metacentre and the centre of gravity with the vessel inclined and are
always measured normal to the water surface.

Thus the metacentre is always vertically (in the earth-fixed axis system) above the centre of buoyancy by a
distance BM = I / vol where I is the second moment of area of the waterplane.

It is for this reason that, in general, KM is not equal to KB+BM (BM is in a different axis system to KB and KM,
and only if the vessel is upright are the axis systems parallel and hence the equation holds).

Similarly, in generally for the vessel to be in equilibrium, LCG is not equal to LCB – if both LCB and LCG are
measured in the ship-axis system (of course if they are measured in the earth-fixed axis system then they are
the same. This is because if the vessel is trimmed and if the VCG and VCB are not the same, then there will be
a sin(trim angle) term introduced. The same is true of TCB and TCG if the vessel is heeled.

Page 326
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Nomenclature

Amax Maximum immersed cross-sectional area to waterline

under investigation
Ams Immersed cross-sectional area to waterline under
investigation amidships
A Immersed cross-section area: Amax or Ams as selected by
user
AWP Area of waterplane at the waterline under investigation
BOA Overall beam of whole vessel (above and below waterline)
BWL Maximum waterline beam at design waterline
B Maximum beam of waterline under investigation
b Waterline beam of station under investigation
GM Metacentric height: vertical distance from centre of gravity
to metacentre, measured in the trimmed reference frame
KB Distance from keel (baseline) to centre of buoyancy,
measured normal to the baseline.
KG Distance from keel (baseline) to centre of gravity,
measured normal to the baseline.
LOA Length overall
LCB Longitudinal Centre of Buoyancy, measured in upright
reference frame, parallel to baseline.
LCF Longitudinal Centre of Floatation, measured in upright
reference frame, parallel to baseline.
LCG Longitudinal Centre of Gravity, measured in upright
reference frame, parallel to baseline.
LWL Length of design waterline
LBP Length between perpendiculars
L length of waterline under investigation
T0 Draft from some arbitrary baseline (normally the lowest
point on the design)
T Maximum immersed depth (draft) of hull
t Draft (immersed depth) of station under investigation
 Immersed volume of displacement at waterline under
investigation

Coefficient parameters

There are several options for calculating hullform coefficients. These can be modified in the Data |
Coefficients dialog shown below:

Page 327
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Length

The datum/design waterline or DWL is a waterline near which the fully loaded design is intended to float
under normal circumstances. The forward perpendicular is normally defined as the intersection of the DWL
with the bow. The after perpendicular is normally defined as the position of the rudder post, or possibly the
transom.

Several lengths may be defined: the LBP is the length between perpendiculars, this may be different from the
length of the DWL (LWL) and in general, will also be different from the LOA (overall length). In some cases,
particularly for resistance prediction purposes, it may be more appropriate to define an effective length of
the underwater body, features such as bulbous bows and overhangs can make the LBP, LWL and LOA quite
different. In addition, for calculations at drafts other than the DWL, it may be appropriate to use the actual
waterline length at that draft (L).

Some of the more common lengths that may be used to characterise a vessel.

In Stability you may choose between the length between perpendiculars and the waterline length for the
calculation of Block, Prismatic and Waterplane Area Coefficients. Select Coefficients from the Display menu:

Page 328
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Beam

It is normal to use the maximum waterline beam for calculation of coefficients, and this may be of the DWL
or the waterline under consideration. However, there may be times when it is appropriate to use the
maximum immersed beam (e.g. submarine, vessel with tumble-home or blisters). For the calculation of
section area coefficients it is normal practice to use the beam and draft of the section in question.

Vessel with tumble-home

Catamarans and other multihull vessels pose another difficulty. In some cases the overall beam is of
importance, in others, the beam of the individual hulls may be required.

Stability uses the total waterline beam of immersed portions of the section for calculation of block
coefficient and other form parameters. For the case of a monohull this will be the normal waterline
beam. For catamarans this will be twice the demihull beam (remember that the total displaced volume
is used and hence the block coefficient is the same as that of a single demihull). For the section shown
below, the beam used would be the sum of B1, B2 and B3.

Multihull beams
You may choose which beam should be used from the following list:

Page 329
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

In the reported hydrostatics, you can select various beams:

Calculated beams
The values “Beam extents” are those that measure the beam across the maximum port and starboard extents
of the vessel. For a catamaran this would be from the outside of the port demihull to the outside of the
starboard demihull. For a monhull, this would simply be the distance from the port side to the starboard side.

The other beam values are calculated by summing the breadth of waterline crossings as described above. For
a monhull without tunnels, this will be the same as the extents value, but for a multihull, it will be less than
the extents value. Stability uses these values for computing coefficients.

Draft

The draft is normally specified from a nominal datum. Normally this datum is the lowest part of the upright
hull. However, for vessels with raked keel lines or yachts, the datum may be elsewhere. In Stability drafts are
defined from the datum line. However, there are also occasions when the immersed depth of the section is a
more relevant measure of draft, this is often the case when form parameters are calculated.

Stability uses the depths that stations extend below the waterline for calculation of form coefficients.
Both depths are measured in upright position.

You may select which depth should be used for the calculation of form parameters, including the option of
measuring the draft to the baseline – this gives the option of ignoring appendages such as fin keels when
determining the draft to be used to calculate the form parameter (if the baseline is defined to the bottom of
the canoe body for example). It should be noted that the section area will, however, include the appendages.:

Page 330
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Draft measurements
Draft measurement at heel angle
When the vessel is heeled, the draft is measured through the intersection of the upright
waterline and the centreline, perpendicular to the heeled waterline (see figure below).
Essentially the draft is measured along the heeled and trimmed perpendiculars on the
centreline. It is for this reason that as the heel approaches 90degrees, the draft becomes
very large.

Draft measured along the inclined perpendicular lines

Immersed depth and Draft measurements
The images below show the difference between the draft measurements (which are made
in the inclined centreline plane of the vessel) and the immersed depth measurements
(which are made normal to the free-surface).

Page 331
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Difference between “Immersed depth” and “Draft” measurements

Midship and Max Area Sections

It is current usual practice to define the midship section as midway between the perpendiculars, however for
some vessels it is defined as the midpoint of the DWL. For vessels with no parallel mid-body, the section with
greatest cross-sectional area may also be of particular interest. In Stability, the position midway between the
perpendiculars is defined as midships.

When computing form coefficients, such as CP and CM, you may select which section area should be used:
Stability uses the station with the maximum immersed cross-sectional area at the waterline under
consideration.

Block Coefficient

Principles of Naval Architecture defines the block coefficient as:

“the ratio of the volume of displacement of the moulded form up to any waterline to the volume of a
rectangular prism with length, breadth and depth equal to the length, breadth and mean draft of the ship at
that waterline.”

However, the actual definitions of the length, beam and draft used vary between authorities. Length may be
LBP, LWL or some effective length. The beam may be at amidships or the maximum moulded beam of the
waterline; or may be defined according to another standard – this may be important for hulls with significant
tumble-home or blisters below the waterline.

Page 332
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Stability uses the length beam and draft as selected in the Coefficients dialog to compute the block
coefficient. The beam used is that obtained by summing the immersed waterline crossings of the
specified section.

CB =
L  B T

Section Area Coefficient

Principles of Naval Architecture defines the midship coefficient as:

“The ratio of the immersed area of the midship station to that of a rectangle of breadth equal to moulded
breadth and depth equal to moulded draft at amidships.”

It should be noted that, for sections that have significant tumble-home or blisters below the waterline, the
midship section coefficient can be greater than unity.

In Stability midships is midway between the perpendiculars.

The section area coefficient used by Stability, is calculated at either the station with maximum cross-
sectional area or the midship section area (as defined in the Coefficients dialog). The beam and
immersed depth of the selected section is used unless the draft to baseline option has been selected in
which case this draft is used.

Options for Section area coefficient

A
CM =
bt

Prismatic Coefficient

Principles of Naval Architecture defines the prismatic coefficient as:

“The ratio between the volume of displacement and a prism whose length equals the length of the ship and
whose cross-section equals the midship section area.”

Again the definition of midship section and vessel length depend on the standard being used.

Stability uses the selected length and the selected immersed cross-section area Amax or Ams.


CP =
L A

Waterplane Area Coefficient

Principles of Naval Architecture defines the waterplane area coefficient as:

Page 333
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

“The ratio between the area of the waterplane and the area of a circumscribing rectangle.”

Stability uses the length and beam as selected.

AW P
CW P =
LB

LCG and LCB

Stability allows you to fully customise how you want to display the LCB and LCF values. See Customising
Coefficients on page 42 for more information.

The LCG and LCB are calculated in the “ship” or “upright” frame of reference; see Measurement Reference
Frames on page 325. When the vessel is free-to-trim, the LCG and LCB will be at the same longitudinal
position in the global coordinate system, but not in the frame of reference. Therefore a difference between
the LCG and the LCB value will occur when the vessel is trimmed. This is explained in the figure below:

Effect of vertical separation of CG and CB on LCG and LCB measured in the Ship reference frame
Note:

LCG and LCB are calculated in the vessels’ frame of reference and therefore will have different
longitudinal positions when the vessel is trimmed then for when it is upright.
This is the same for differences in TCG and TCB values due to heeling.

Trim angle

The trim angle as defined by:

 Ta − T f 
 = tan −1  

 L pp 
where:  is the trim angle; Ta , Tf are the aft and forward drafts at the corresponding perpendiculars and LPP is
the length between perpendiculars.

Page 334
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

Maximum deck inclination

The inclination angle is a combination of heel and trim angle. Stability calculates the steepest slope of the
deck when the ship is trimmed and/or heeled. Deck camber and initial deck slope are not taken into account.

For example:

The Max deck inclination is the

maximum slope of the deck when
combining the trim and heel angle
of the vessel, assuming the deck
inclination is zero when the vessel is
in upright position.

Immersion

The weight required to sink the model one unit-length below its current waterline. The unit-length can be
either in cm or inch depending on your unit settings.

MTc or MTi

The required moment to make the vessel trim one unit-length. That can be either cm or inch depending on
your unit settings.

RM at 1 deg

The righting Moment at 1 degree heel angle, calculated by

RM = Displ * GMt * sin( 1)

Potential for errors in hydrostatic calculations

There are a number of potential sources of error when calculating the hydrostatic properties of immersed
shapes. These mainly occur from the integration method used, and occur in both hand calculations, and most
automatic calculations carried out by computers. Both methods use numerical integration techniques, which
are normally either based on Simpson’s rule or the Trapezium rule. As with all numerical integration schemes,

Page 335
Appendix A: Calculation of Form Parameters

the accuracy increases as the step size is reduced, hence computer calculations offer an enormous advantage
compared with hand calculations, due to the increased speed and accuracy with which these calculations may
be carried out. With hand calculations, it is normal to use perhaps 21 sections and perhaps 3-5 significant
figures; with computer calculations, it is quite feasible to use 200 sections or more with 10s of significant
figures. These effects are noted from comparing the results of different hydrostatics packages on the same
hullform. In general, differences for basic parameters such as displacement etc. are under 0.5% (note that, in
general, agreement of hand calculations to within 2% is considered good). Differences in derived form
parameters may show considerable variation. However, this is primarily due to differences in the definitions
used – see discussion above.

The 0.5% error discrepancy noted above, may be attributed to a number of causes:
• Convergence limits when balancing a hull to a specified displacement or centre of gravity.
• Different number of integration stations used, and their distribution. Where there are large changes in
shape, such as near the bow and stern, the stations should be more closely spaced. This can be of
particular importance if the waterline intersects the stem profile between two sections.
• Differences in the hull definition, and number of interpolation points used to define each section. If the
surface is exported as DXF poly-lines then the precision used and the number of straight-line sections
used to make up the poly-line are important.
• The integration method used: trapezium, Simpson, or higher order methods.

Integration of wetted surface area

At first glance, it may seem that wetted surface area may be calculated by simply integrating the station girth
along the length of the hull, in a similar way that one might integrate the station cross-sectional area along
the length of the hull to obtain the volume. However, this is not the case, and the wetted surface area can
only be accurately found by summing elemental areas over the complete surface. Further, the error due to
integrating girths along the vessel length cannot be removed simply by increasing the number of integration
stations. The only accurate numerical method is to sum the areas of individual triangles interpolated on the
parametric surface.

The differences are easily shown by considering the surface area of half a sphere. This is given analytically by:
A = 2R 2 , where R is the radius of the circle.
It may be shown that the area obtained by integrating the girth of the sphere along its length is given by:
 2R2
A' = , note that this is with an infinite number of integration steps, and hence the integration of
2
2R 2
section girths underestimates by error factor of = 4 /  = 1.27 , or approximately 27%.
0.5 2 R 2
However, for normal ship hulls the differences will be much less, due to the greatly reduced longitudinal
curvature. Surface areas calculated by the ‘Calculate Areas’ dialog in Modeler are the most accurate, since
they are derived from the actual parametric definition of the surface. Those calculated by Stability and most
other hydrodynamics packages, which use a number of vertical stations to define the hull, will be subject to
the error described above.

Page 336
Appendix B: Criteria file format

Appendix B: Criteria file format

The criteria are saved in a Stability criteria file with the extension .hcr. The file is a normal PC text file, which
may be edited manually so as to generate custom criteria. The typical format of the file is given below:

Please refer to the file

C:\Program Files (x86)\Bentley\Engineering\Maxsurf 20 V8i\HMCriteriaHelp\[Link]
for a full list of all the parameters for all the different criteria types.

Stability Criteria File

[units]
LengthUnits = m
MassUnits = tonne
SpeedUnits = kts
AngleUnits = deg
GZAreaGMAngleUnits = deg
[end]

[criterionGroup]
GroupName = Specific Criteria
ParentGroupName = root
[end]

[criterionGroup]
GroupName = My Custom Criteria
ParentGroupName = root
[end]

[criterionGroup]
GroupName = STIX input data
ParentGroupName = Specific Criteria
[end]

[criterion]
Type = CTStdAreaUnderGZBetweenLimits
RuleName = STIX input data
CritName = GZ area to the lesser of downflooding or…
CritInfo = Area under GZ curve between specified heel…
CritInfoFile = HMCriteriaHelp\[Link]
Locked = true
GroupName = STIX input data
TestIntact = true
TestDamage = false
Test = false
Compare = GreaterThan
UseLoHeel = false
UseEquilibrium = true
UseHiHeel = false
UseFirstPeak = false
UseMaxGZ = false
UseFirstDF = true
UseVanishingStab = true
LoHeel = 0.0
HiHeel = 30.0
RequiredValue = 0.000
[end]

[criterion]
Type = CTStdAngleOfVanishingStab

Page 337
Appendix B: Criteria file format

RuleName = STIX input data

CritName = Angle of vanishing stability
CritInfo = Calculates the angle of vanishing stability…
CritInfoFile = HMCriteriaHelp\[Link]
Locked = true
GroupName = STIX input data
TestIntact = true
TestDamage = false
Test = false
Compare = GreaterThan
RequiredValue = 0.0
[end]

The file must have “Stability Criteria File” in the first row. The first section of the file is the units
section and this specifies the units that are to be used in the file. There are two angular units:
AngleUnits Specifies the units for angular measurements,
e.g. range of stability
GZAreaGMAngleUnits Specifies the angle units used for area under
GZ graph and for GM.

The criteria then appear after the units section and as many criteria as required may be included. The
common parameters for all criteria are as follows:
Type Describes the type of criterion
RuleName Text which specifies the rule to which the
criterion belongs
CritName Text which specifies the criterion’s name
CritInfo Verbose description of the criterion
Locked Whether the criterion may be edited in
Stability or not. If Locked is set to true, it is not
possible to edit the criterion’s parameters in
Stability

The other parameters that may be set depend on the criterion type.

Page 338
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Appendix C: Criteria Help

In this Appendix all individual Parent Criteria are explained in detail. This information can also be found in the
lower right of the Criteria Dialog in the Criteria Help section.

In this section:
• Parent Calculations
• Minimum GM Calculators
• Parent Heeling Arms
• Parent Heeling Moments
• Parent Stability Criteria

For all general help on criteria or working with the criteria dialog, see Chapter 4 Stability Criteria on page 257.

Parent Calculations

Special calculations are provided for some criteria parameters. This allows for complex calculations to be
cross referenced into criteria. Currently this has only been implemented for the IMO roll-back angle
calculation used in the IMO code on Intact Stability, severe wind and rolling (weather) criterion; and the IMO
required GM for vessels carrying grain in bulk. If there are any other calculations that you would like
implemented, please contact us through [Link] with details of
the required calculations.

The parent calculations are listed above the parent heeling arms:

Parent calculations in Stability Criteria dialog

As with other criteria and heeling arms, you should make a copy of the parent calculation by dragging it to
your custom criteria folder.

Selecting a calculation in a criterion

Using a calculation in a criterion is very similar to using a heel arm:

• Define your custom calculation by copying it from the parent list.
• In the criterion select the required calculation from the pull down list:

Angle calculators

These calculators produce an angular measurement and may be referenced by the following criteria:

Page 339
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Criteria that currently support roll-back angle calculations

Heeling arm Ratio of areas type 2 XRefHeelRatioOfAreas2
criteria (xRef)
Combined Combined criteria (ratio of areas XRefHeelGenericWindHeeling
heeling arm type 2)
criteria (xRef)
Heeling arm Ratio of areas type 2 - general wind CritHeelRatioOfAreas2
criteria (stand heeling arm
alone)
Heeling arm, Combined criteria (ratio of areas CritHeelGenericWindHeeling
combined type 2) - general wind heeling arm
criteria (stand
alone)
Heeling arm, Combined criteria (ratio of areas CritHeelWindHeeling
combined type 2) - wind heeling arm
criteria (stand
alone)

IMO roll-back angle calculator

The IMO roll back angle calculator calculates the roll back angle as per the severe wind and rolling (weather)
criterion as defined in the IMO Code on Intact Stability. The input parameters may be specified by the user or
calculated by Stability for the vessel in the upright condition for the current loadcase. The block coefficient is
calculated with the current user settings for length and beam (not necessarily the waterline beam which
another parameter required for the calculation). The method used for the k-factor can be one of three
options: “Round bilge: k = 1.0”, “Sharp bilge: k = 0.7” or “Tabulated value for k” – these are auto completed
so you only need to type the first letter.

This calculation follows the function defined in the Intact Stability codes A.749(18) and MSC.267(85).

Input parameters for: IMO roll-back angle calculation

GM calculators

These calculators produce a GM measurement and may be referenced by the following criteria:
Criteria that currently support roll-back angle calculations
GZ curve criteria Value of GMt at (calc) CTStdValueOfGMAt

Page 340
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Minimum GM calculator – Grain

The required GM for vessels carrying grain, as defined in IMO Resolution MSC.23(59), is calculated as follows:

GM =
(
L  B  Vd 0.25B = 0.645 B  Vd )
0.0875  SF  
Where (using consistent units):
L is the combined length of all full compartments
B is the moulded breadth of the vessel
SF is the stowage factor
Vd is the calculated average void depth
Δ is the vessel displacement

Input parameters for: Grain heeling min. required GM

Minimum GM calculator – Wind pressure

The GM required to withstand wind pressure is calculated as follows:

 L 
2

k 0 +    A(h − H ) cos n (0 )

  k1  
GM = 
 sin( 0 )
Where (using consistent units):
L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value
directly rather than having it calculated by Stability.
Δ is the vessel displacement
0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline
immersion angle
A is the windage area which may be specified as a total area or as an area additional to the area of
the hull above the waterline; h is height of the centroid of A above the zero point.
H is the height of the assumed centre of lateral resistance of the vessel.
k0 and k1 are constants, for example:
For CFR 46, 170.170: ocean service:
k0 = 0.005 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 [Link]-0.5
k0 = 0.055 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m2.t-0.5
For CFR 46, 170.170: service on partially protected water:
k0 = 0.0033 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 [Link]-0.5
k0 = 0.036 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m2.t-0.5
For CFR 46, 170.170: service on protected water:
k0 = 0.0025 Ton/ft2 and k1 = 14200 [Link]-0.5
k0 = 0.028 t/m2 and k1 = 1309 m2.t-0.5

Page 341
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Input parameters for: Wind pressure min. required GM

Minimum GM calculator – Constant

The required GM is calculated as follows:

a cos n (0 )
GM =
 sin m (0 )
Where (using consistent units):
a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used)
0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline
immersion angle
m, n are the exponents for sine and cosine.

An example of where this calculation should be used is in CFR 46, 171.050:

Nb Nb
GM = with a = and m, n = 1.0
K tan(  0 ) K
Where N is the number of passengers; b is their average transverse location and K is the number of
passengers per unit mass.

Input parameters for: Constant min. required GM

Page 342
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Minimum GM calculator – Constant with freeboard

The required GM is calculated as follows:

a B cos n (0 )
GM =  
 ( f + f a ) sin m (0 )
Where (using consistent units):
a is a constant arm or moment (depending on whether the vessel displacement is used)
B is the vessel beam
f is the minimum freeboard for the upright (zero heel) condition to the deck-edge or marginline.
fa is the additional freeboard allowance calculated as follows (additionally the freeboard allowance
may be limited to a maximum specified value):
l  2b − b0 
fa = k  h   − b1 
L  B 
Where (using consistent units):
L is the waterline length of the vessel (if the criterion required LPP or LOA then enter the value
directly rather than having it calculated by Stability.
B is the same as that used in the expression for GM
k is a dimensionless constant
h is a height, typically the height of the watertight trunk
l is a length, typically the length of the watertight trunk
b is a breadth, typically the breadth of the watertight trunk
b0 is a constant with the same units as b
b1 is a dimensionless constant

If desired, a heel adjustment may be included:

0 is a critical heel angle which may be a fixed angle or a fraction of the deck-edge or marginline
immersion angle
m, n are the exponents for sine and cosine.

Parent Heeling Arms

As with the criteria, there is a list of parent heeling arms, from which custom heeling arms may be derived:

Available heeling arms and moments

Page 343
Appendix C: Criteria Help

To learn how to cross reference these heeling arms into criteria, please see Heeling arm criteria (xRef) on
page 379.

Heeling Arm Definition

This section describes how to define heeling arms and is valid for both the parent heeling arms that can be
cross referenced into the heeling arm criteria, and for the Old heeling arm criteria where the heeling arm is
specified for each criterion separately.

There are several heeling arms that are used for the criteria. They are defined below.
• General heeling arm
• General heeling arm with gust
• General cos+sin heeling arm
• User Defined heeling arm
• Passenger crowding heeling arm
• Wind heeling arm
• Wind heeling (consine plus constant) arm
• Velocity Profile Wind heeling arm
• Lifting heeling arm
• Towing heeling arm
• Tow tripping heeling arm
• Forces heeling arm
• Trawling heeling arm
• Grain heeling arm
• Areas and leavers
• Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement
Note:

When you are working with the parent heeling arms, make sure you copy them into a custom
heeling arms folder before editing them. Same as for the Parent criteria, the Parent heeling arms
will be reset to their default values each time you start up Stability.

General heeling arm

The general form of the heeling arm is given below:

H ( ) = A cos n ( )
where:
 is the heel angle,
A is the magnitude of the heeling arm,
cos n describes the shape of the curve.

Typically n=1 is used for passenger crowding and vessel turning since the horizontal lever for the passenger
transverse location reduces with the cosine of the heel angle. For wind n=2 is often used for heeling because
both the projected area as well as the lever decrease with the cosine of the heel angle. However, some
criteria, such as IMO Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) have a heeling arm of constant magnitude, in
this case n=0 should be used.

Make sure you read Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 358.

Page 344
Appendix C: Criteria Help

General heeling arm with gust

Some criteria require a Gust Ratio, this is the ratio of the magnitude of the wind heeling arm during a gust to
the magnitude of the wind heeling arm under steady wind.
H gust
GustRatio =
H steady
Both the steady and the gust heel arm have the same shape.

H steady ( ) = A cos n ( )
H gust ( ) = A  GustRatio  cos n ( )

where:
 is the heel angle,
A is the magnitude of the heeling arm,
cos n describes the shape of the curve.

It should be noted, that in this case, the definition of gust ratio is the ratio of the heeling arms. Some criteria
specify the ratio of the wind speeds; if it is assumed that the wind pressure is proportional to the square of
the wind seed, the ratio of the heel arms will be the square of the ratio of the wind speeds.

General cos+sin heeling arm

Some criteria, notably lifting of weights, require a heeling arm with both a sine and cosine component:
(
H ( ) = k A cos n ( ) + B sin m ( ) )
It should be noted that provided the indices are both unity, the same heeling arm form may be used for
computing towing heeling arms of the form:
H ( ) = k ( A cos( +  ) + B sin(  +  ))
in this case a constant angle (in the case of towing, the angle of the tow above the horizontal) is included.

It may be shown that this is equivalent to:

H ( ) = k (C cos( ) + D sin(  ))
where:

R2
C= tan  =
B
1 + tan ( −  ) , D = C tan( −  ) , R 2 = A2 + B 2 and
2
A
Make sure you read Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement on page 358.

User Defined heeling arm

A user-defined heeling arm may be used in the criteria. With the heeling arm, the user can specify the
number of points and the shape of the heeling arm curve.

This heeling arm can then be cross-referenced into any of the heeling arm criteria. First, the number of points
is specified and then for each point the angle and magnitude of the curve can be specified. These should be
comma delimited for example <45 , 1.2> for a heeling arm magnitude of 1.2 meters at 45 degrees angle of
heel. (To aid input of the data, if only one value is supplied it is taken as the heel angle – and the magnitude
is left unchanged, and if a value preceded by a comma is given, this is taken as the magnitude – and the heel

Page 345
Appendix C: Criteria Help

angle is left unchanged.) A single coefficient may be adjusted and this is used as a multiplication factor (whist
the shape of the curve remains unchanged).

Passenger crowding heeling arm

The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

n pas MD
H pc ( ) = cos n ( )

where:
n pas
is the number of passengers
M is the average mass of a single passenger
D is the average distance of passengers from the vessel centreline
 is the vessel mass (same units as M )

The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows:

Option Description Units

number of passengers: Number of passengers none
nPass
passenger mass: M Average mass of one passenger mass
distance from Average distance of the passengers from length
centreline: D the centreline
cosine power: n Cosine power for curve - defines shape none

Wind heeling arm

In the case of the wind pressure based formulation, the wind heeling arm is given by:
PA(h − H ) n
H w ( ) = a cos ( )
g
where:
a is a constant, theoretically unity
A is the windage area at height h

Page 346
Appendix C: Criteria Help

 is the vessel mass

P is the wind pressure
H is the vertical centre of hydrodynamic resistance to the wind force

In the case of the wind velocity based formulation, the wind heeling arm is given by:
v 2 A(h − H ) n
H w ( ) = a cos ( )
g
where:
a is now effectively an average drag coefficient for the windage area multiplied by the air density and has
units of density
v is the wind speed.
And the other parameters are described as above.

Option Description Units

constant: a Constant which may be used to modify none for
the magnitude of the heel arm, pressure
normally unity for pressure based based
formulation or 0.5 ρair CD for the formulation;
velocity formulation; where ρair is the mass/length3
density of air and CD is an average drag for velocity
coefficient for the windage area based
formulation
wind model Pressure or Velocity (type “P” or “V”)
wind pressure or Actual velocity of pressure - depends Pascals =
velocity on wind model mass /
(length.time2)
or
length/
time
area centroid height: h Height of user defined total or length
additional windage area
total area: A User may specify either a total windage length2
area
additional area: A Or, an area to be added to the windage length2
area computed by Stability based on
the hull sections
height of lateral There are four options for specifying H length
resistance: H (all options are calculated with the
vessel upright at the loadcase
displacement and LCG):
User specified
H = mean draft / 2 H is taken as half the mean draft. length
H = vert. centre of H is taken as the vertical centre of length
projected lat. u’water underwater lateral projected area.
area
H = waterline H is taken as the waterline length
cosine power: n Cosine power for curve - defines shape none

Page 347
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Wind heeling (cosine and constant) arm

The magnitude of the wind heeling arm, Hw0, is the same as for the normal wind heeling arm and may be
velocity- or pressure-based. The variation of heeling arm with heel angle has two components – a cosine
component and a constant component. The wind heeling arm is always non-negative.

H w ( ) = H w0 (1 − f ) + f cos n ( ) 
In the case of the wind pressure based formulation, the magnitude of the wind heeling arm is given by:
PA(h − H )
H w0 = a
g
where:
a is a constant, theoretically unity
A is the windage area at height h
 is the vessel mass
P is the wind pressure
H is the vertical centre of hydrodynamic resistance to the wind force

In the case of the wind velocity based formulation, the wind heeling arm is given by:
v 2 A(h − H )
H w0 = a
g
where:
a is now effectively an average drag coefficient for the windage area multiplied by the air density and has
units of density
v is the wind speed.
And the other parameters are described as above.

Option Description Units

constant: f Factor by which the cosine and none
constant components of the wind
heeling arm are divided.
constant: a Constant which may be used to modify none for
the magnitude of the heel arm, pressure
normally unity for pressure based based
formulation or 0.5 ρair CD for the formulation;
velocity formulation; where ρair is the mass/length3
density of air and CD is an average drag for velocity
coefficient for the windage area based
formulation
wind model Pressure or Velocity (type “P” or “V”)
wind pressure or Actual velocity of pressure - depends Pascals =
velocity on wind model mass /
([Link] )
2

or
length/
time
area centroid height: h Height of user defined total or length
additional windage area
total area: A User may specify either a total windage length2
area

Page 348
Appendix C: Criteria Help

additional area: A Or, an area to be added to the windage length2

area computed by Stability based on
the hull sections
height of lateral There are four options for specifying H length
resistance: H (all options are calculated with the
vessel upright at the loadcase
displacement and LCG):
User specified
H = mean draft / 2 H is taken as half the mean draft. length
H = vert. centre of H is taken as the vertical centre of length
projected lat. u’water underwater lateral projected area.
area
H = waterline H is taken as the waterline length
cosine power: n Cosine power for curve - defines shape none

Velocity profile wind heeling arm

This wind heeling arm allows the definition of a vertical velocity profile to be specified. This heeling arm is
always velocity-based (not pressure-based); furthermore only the model-defined windage profile is used
(there is no option for additional area).

Wind heeling arm with velocity profile option

The velocity profile is defined by a series of horizontal strips parallel and above the waterline. Each strip has a
factor which is applied to the base velocity. This is done so that the same velocity profile can easily be
maintained for different base wind velocities. To apply a uniform velocity profile (constant velocity at all
heights) then simply specify

Uniform velocity profile

For a variable velocity profile simply specify the number of heights and the factor for each height range:
When entering the data for the velcity profile enter: "height , factor". Heights must be in descending order. A
height can he changed by typing "height"; a factor can be changed by typing ", factor"

Page 349
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Variable velocity profile

When a variable velocity profile is selected for display, the different height zones are displayed.

Wind profile showing height zones defined in the selected variable wind velocity heeling arm
The wind heeling moment is calculated by dividing the windage profile in to the defined height zones and
applying the velocity profile. This is done for all the windage groups whose contributions are then summed
to give the total wind heeling moment. This is divided by the vessel displacement to obtain the total wind
heeling arm. Thus the wind heeling arm, arm wind , is given by:

a. cos n ( )  
arm wind = 
g. heights 
2
 
(v. f height )  Ftotal group. Agroup.(hgroup − H ) 
groups 
where:
a is a constant (typically half the density of air);
cos n ( ) defines the shape of the heeling arm (typically this would be 0.0 if the calculation of the actual
windage profile at each heel angle option has been selected);
g . is the weight-force of the vessel;
 ... accounts for the summation over all the height intervals specified for the velocity profile, with a base
heights

velocity of v and a factor at each height f height ;

 ... accounts for the summation over all the defined windage groups;
groups

Ftotal group is the total factor for the windage group defined as Ftotal = Fdrag .(1.0 − Fshield ).Fuser
Agroup is the area of the windage group
hgroup is the vertical height of the center of area of the windage group
H is the height to be used for the assumed center of lateral resistance of the underwater part of the hull.

Turning heeling arm

The magnitude of the heel arm is derived from the moment created by the centripetal force acting on the
vessel during a high-speed turn and the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and hydrodynamic lateral
resistance to the turn. The heeling arm is obtained by dividing the heeling moment by the vessel weight. The
heeling arm is thus given by:
v2
H t ( ) = a h cos n ( )
Rg

Page 350
Appendix C: Criteria Help

where (in consistent units):

a is a constant, theoretically unity
v is the vessel velocity
R is the radius of the turn
h is the vertical separation of the centres of gravity and lateral resistance

The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows:

Option Description Units

constant: a Constant which may be used to modify the none
magnitude of the heel arm, normally unity
vessel speed: v Vessel speed in turn length/time
turn radius: R Turn radius may be specified directly length
turn radius, R, as Or, as some criteria require, as percentage %
percentage of LWL of LWL
Vertical lever: h There are four options for specifying h (all length
options are calculated with the vessel
upright at the loadcase displacement and
LCG):
User specified
h = KG h is taken as KG - position of G above length
baseline in upright condition
h = KG - mean draft / 2 h is taken as KG less half the mean draft. length
h = KG - vert. centre of h is taken as the vertical separation of the length
projected lat. u’water centres of gravity and underwater lateral
area projected area.
cosine power: n Cosine power for curve - defines shape none

Lifting heeling arm

This is used to simulate the effect of lifting a weight from its stowage position. (The weight is lifted from a
stowage position onboard the vessel by a crane on the vessel; i.e. the vessel displacement remains constant,
but there is an effective change of its centre of gravity.) The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

H lw ( ) =
M
h cos( ) + v sin(  )

where:
M is the mass of the weight being lifted
h is horizontal separation of the centre of gravity of the weight in its stowage position and the suspension
position (upper tip of lifting boom)
v is vertical separation of the centre of gravity of the weight in its stowage position and the suspension
position (upper tip of lifting boom)
 is the vessel mass (same units as M )

Page 351
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Just before lifting the weight off the vessel’s deck

The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows:

Option Description Units

Mass being lifted: M Mass of weight being lifted mass
vertical separation of Vertical separation of suspension point length
suspension from from weight’s original stowage position on
stowage position: v the vessel. This value is positive if the
suspension position (upper tip of lifting
boom) is above the original stowage
position.
horizontal separation of Horizontal separation of suspension point length
suspension from (upper tip of lifting boom) from weight’s
stowage position: h original stowage position on the vessel
This value is positive if the horizontal shift
of the weight should produce a positive
heeling moment.

Towing heeling arm

The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

H tow ( ) =
T
g

v cos n ( +  ) + h sin(  +  ) 
where:
T is the tension in the towline or vessel thrust, expressed as a force.
h is horizontal offset of the tow attachment position from the vessel centreline
v is vertical separation tow attachment position from the vessel’s vertical centre of thrust
 is the vessel mass
n is the power index for the cosine term which may be used to change the shape of the heeling arm curve
 is the (constant) angle of the towline above the horizontal. It is assumed that the towline is sufficiently
long that this angle remains constant and does not vary as the vessel is heeled.

The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows:

Option Description Units

tension or thrust: T Tension in towline or vessel thrust force

Page 352
Appendix C: Criteria Help

vertical separation of Vertical separation tow attachment length

propeller centre and position from the vessel’s vertical centre of
tow attachment: v thrust. This value is positive if the towline is
above the thrust centre.
horizontal offset of tow Horizontal offset of the tow attachment length
attachment: h position from the vessel centreline. This
value is positive if the offset is in the
direction of the tow.
angle of tow above Angle of tow above the horizontal angle
horizontal: tau
cosine power: n Cosine power for curve - defines shape none

Heeling due to tow tripping

The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

C2 ( )(H tp − H wl ) cos( ) − r sin(  ) + dC3 ( )

C0 C1V 2 AP
H towtrp ( ) =
2 g
where:
C0 is a fixed coefficient and can be loosely regarded as the drag coefficient of the underwater hullform
when moving sideways
 L 
C1 = k1  S − k 2  is a fixed “lateral traction coefficient” which depends on the longitudinal position of the
 LPP 
tow point

C 2 ( ) = k 3 −1
+ k 4 is a “heel angle correction” which varies with heel angle and depends on the
tan (2 f / B )
vessel’s freeboard and beam

C 3 ( ) = k 5 −1
+ k 6 is a “vertical lever coefficient” which varies with heel angle and depends on
tan (2 f / B )
the vessel’s freeboard and beam
H tp is the vertical height of the tow point above the zero point for the upright, trimmed vessel (zero heel),
measured perpendicular to the waterline
H wl is the vertical height of the waterline above the zero point for the upright, trimmed vessel (zero heel) ,
measured perpendicular to the waterline
r is the horizontal offset of the tow point measured in the vessel’s coordinate system
d is the mean draft of the vessel (average of drafts taken at the fore and aft perpendiculars)
LS is the longitudinal position of the tow point from the aft measurement point of the reference length
(normally length between perpendiculars) LPP measured in the vessel’s coordinate system
f is the freeboard of the Margin Line amidships
B is the moulded breadth of the vessel
V is the velocity at which the vessel is moving sideways through the water
AP is the lateral projected area of the underwater part of the vessel
 =  /  is the displaced volume of the vessel (for vessel displacement  and water density  )
g is acceleration due to gravity (taken as 9.80665m/s2 in Maxsurf Stability)
Note that compared with IMO MSC.415(97) and BV NR476.E1 the following substitution has been made in
the equation for the heeling arrm:
 = /

Page 353
Appendix C: Criteria Help

The heeling arm parameters are specified as follows:

Option Description Value Value Units

IMO BV NR476.E1
MSC.415(97)

Page 354
Appendix C: Criteria Help

constant: C0 constant coefficient 1.0 0.999659 =

9.81/9.80665
k1 constant parameter to evaluate 2.8 2.8
C1
k2 constant parameter to evaluate 0.1 0.1
C1
apply lower Should C1 be bound to a range? 0.1 0.1
limit to C1 If so specify lower limit
apply upper Should C1 be bound to a range? 1.0 1.0
limit to C1 If so specify upper limit
k3 constant parameter to evaluate 0.333333 0.333333
C2
k4 constant parameter to evaluate 0.5 0.5
C2
apply lower Should C2 be bound to a range? 1.0 1.0
limit to C2 If so specify lower limit
apply upper Should C2 be bound to a range? no upper no upper
limit to C2 If so specify upper limit limit limit
k5 constant parameter to evaluate 0.26 0.26
C3
k6 constant parameter to evaluate 0.3 0.3
C3
apply lower Should C3 be bound to a range? 0.5 0.5
limit to C3 If so specify lower limit
apply upper Should C3 be bound to a range? 0.83 0.83
limit to C3 If so specify upper limit
Lpp, length Check this row to specify Lpp length
between directly otherwise calculated by
perpendiculars, Stability
user spec.
B, moulded Check this row to specify B length
breadth, user directly otherwise calculated by
spec. Stability
d, draft Check this row to specify d length
amidships, user directly otherwise calculated by
spec. Stability. Mean draft = average
of drafts at fore and aft
perpendiculars = draft amidships
f, freeboard Check this row to specify f length
amidships, user directly otherwise calculated by
spec. Stability as the freeboard of the
Margin Line amidships
Ap, projected Check this row to specify Ap length
2
lat. u'water (lateral projected underwater
area, user spec. area of the vessel) directly
otherwise calculated by Stability

Page 355
Appendix C: Criteria Help

long. dist of Longitudinal position of the tow length

tow attachment attachment point measured from
from aft perp.: the aft perpendicular in the ship
Ls coordinate system (parallel to
baseline)
vert. height of Vertical position of the tow length
tow attachment attachment point measured from
above zp: Htp the zero point in the ship
coordinate system. When
calculating the height of the tow
attachment point above the
waterline the effect of trim is
taken into account so that the
vertical distance is measured
perpendicular to the actual
waterline for the trimmed vessel
at zero heel.
horizontal Horizontal offset of the tow length
offset of tow attachment point measured in
attachment: r the ship coordinate system
lateral velocity: Lateral velocity of the vessel 2.57 m/s 2.57 m/s length
V during tow /
time

Forces heeling arm

This heeling arm can be used to model up to two forces acting on the vessel forces, such as those applied
due fire-fighting or manoeuvring using thrusters. The magnitude of the heel arm is given by:

H forces ( ) =
1
g

A1 (h1 − H )cos n1 ( ) + A2 (h 2 − H )cos n2 ( ) 
where:
A1 and A2 are two forces acting on the vessel, expressed as a force, not a mass.
h1 and h2 are the vertical heights (from the zero point) at which these forces act.
n1 and n2 define the shapes of the heeling arms created by the two forces.
H is the assumed vertical position of the vessel’s centre of lateral resistance (or the centre of rotation from
which the forces are applied)
 is the vessel mass
g is acceleration due to gravity

Trawling heeling arm

This heeling arm can be used model the effects of trawl net snagging as defined in Annex G of the Australian
NSCV requirements:
m y
H trawling( ) = cos n ( )
+m
where:
m is a mass parameter determined from the breaking load of the trawl gear and the downwards angle of
the trawl net.

Page 356
Appendix C: Criteria Help

y is the transverse distance of the line of action of the trawl wire from the vessel centreline
n defines the shape of the heeling arm.
 is the vessel mass

Grain heeling arm

This heeling arm can be used model the effects of bulk grain shift as defined in IMO Resolution MSC.23(59):

The heeling arm is defined by a straight line through two points A, B. It is mirrored about the heel=0 axis and
is not allowed to go below zero.
Point A = (0 deg heel, λ0)
Point B = ( 1 deg heel, α λ0)
i.e the heeling arm magnitude is reduced by a factor α at a heel angle of 1 . The equation of the line is given
below:
 (1 −  ) 
H grain ( ) = 0 1 − abs( )
 1 

The heeling arm magnitude at zero heel, λ0, is given by:

volHM
0 =
StowFact  
Where:
volHM is the assumed volumetric heeling moment due to transverse grain shift in units of [Link];
StowFact is the stowage factor in units of Length3/Mass; and
 is the vessel mass

Areas and levers

Some criteria require the evaluation of above and below water lateral projected areas and their vertical
centroids. The user may also specify additional areas and vertical centroids or the total areas and vertical
centroids. In all cases the vertical centroids are given in the model co-ordinate system; i.e.: from the model’s
vertical datum, positive upwards.

The lateral projected area and its centroid of area are calculated for the upright vessel (zero heel) at the draft
and trim defined in the loadcase or trim dialog. The area is calculated from the hydrostatic sections used by

Page 357
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Stability; thus, increasing the number of sections will increase the accuracy of the area calculation; further,
only “Hull” surfaces are included in the calculation - “Structure” surfaces are ignored.

The vertical position of the keel, K, is assumed to be at the baseline (as set up in the Frame of Reference
dialog), even if the baseline does not correspond to the physical bottom of the vessel.

Important note: heeling arm criteria dependent on displacement

Some heeling arm criteria are dependent on the displacement of the vessel for the calculation of the Heeling
Arm. For example, the value “A” in:
H ( ) = A cos n ( )

,is manually calculated from:

M
A= , where

M = heeling moment
Δ = displacement.

For these types of heeling arms you should use the various heeling moment curves that are available – see
below:

Heeling moment curves

Parent Heeling Moments

Heeling moments work the same way as the Minimum GM Calculations in that they can be cross referenced
into criteria. The advantage of using heeling moments is that they provide a constant heeling moment
(varying heeling arm) as the vessel displacement changes (due to different loadcases or during a limiting KG
analysis).

These are in addition to the existing specific heeling arm curves for passenger crowding, wind heeling etc.,
which take account of the vessel displacement as required.

The following heeling moments are available in the Stability criteria dialog:
• General heeling moment
• General cos+sin heeling moment
• General heeling moment with gust
• User Defined Heeling Moment

General heeling moment

The general form of the heeling moment is given below. It allows you to specify a constant heeling moment
as opposed to a constant heeling arm:
A
H ( ) = cos n ( )

Page 358
Appendix C: Criteria Help

where:
 is the heel angle,
A is the magnitude of the heeling moment ([Link]) and  the vessel displacement (mass); thus A is

the magnitude of the heeling arm (length).
cos n describes the shape of the curve.

Typically n=1 is used for passenger crowding and vessel turning since the horizontal lever for the passenger
transverse location reduces with the cosine of the heel angle. For wind n=2 is often used for heeling because
both the projected area as well as the lever decrease with the cosine of the heel angle. However, some
criteria, such as IMO Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) have a heeling arm of constant magnitude, in
this case n=0 should be used.

General cos+sin heeling moment

Some criteria, notably lifting of weights, require a heeling moment with both a sine and cosine component:

H ( ) =
k

(
A cos n ( ) + B sin m ( ) )
where:
 is the heel angle,
A and B the magnitudes of the cosine and sine components of the heeling moment ([Link]) and 
A B
the vessel displacement (mass); thus and are the magnitude of the heeling arm (length).
 

It should be noted that provided the n and m indices are both unity, the same heeling moment form may be
used for computing towing heeling moments of the form:

H ( ) =
k
( A cos( +  ) + B sin(  +  ))

in this case a constant angle (in the case of towing, the angle of the tow above the horizontal) is included.

It may be shown that this is equivalent to:

H ( ) =
k
(C cos( ) + D sin(  ))

where:
R2
C= B
1 + tan 2 ( −  ) , D = C tan( −  ) , R 2 = A2 + B 2 and tan  = A

General heeling moment with gust

Some criteria require a Gust Ratio, this is the ratio of the magnitude of the wind heeling arm during a gust to
the magnitude of the wind heeling arm under steady wind.

H gust
GustRatio =
H steady

The general form of the heeling moment is given below. It allows you to specify a constant heeling moment
as opposed to a constant heeling arm. Both the steady and the gust heel moment have the same shape.

Page 359
Appendix C: Criteria Help

A
H steady ( ) = cos n ( )

A
H gust ( ) =  GustRatio  cos n ( )


where:
 is the heel angle,
A is the magnitude of the heeling moment ([Link]) and  the vessel displacement (mass); thus A is

the magnitude of the heeling arm (length).
cos n describes the shape of the curve.

It should be noted, that in this case, the definition of gust ratio is the ratio of the heeling arms. Some criteria
specify the ratio of the wind speeds; if it is assumed that the wind pressure is proportional to the square of
the wind seed, the ratio of the heel arms will be the square of the ratio of the wind speeds.

User Defined Heeling Moment

With the User Defined Heeling Moment, the user can specify the number of points and the shape of the
heeling moment curve. Defining User Defined Heeling Moments works in much the same as for User Defined
heeling arm. This heeling moment can then be linked into a Heeling arm criteria (xRef) for evaluation.

Parent Stability Criteria

The parent criteria are divided up into different categories depending on their basic types.

Criteria at Equilibrium

These criteria are calculated after an equilibrium analysis and relate to the equilibrium position of the vessel
after the analysis. The equilibrium criteria are only displayed in the report if you run an equilibrium analysis.

Maximum value of Heel, Trim or Slope at Equilibrium

This criterion may be used to check the value of maximum Heel, Pitch or Maximum Slope (compared with an
originally horizontal and flat deck).

Option Description Units

The angle of Choose from the following (case deg
insensitive auto-completion is used):
Heel
Pitch
MaxSlope
Shall be less than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be greater
than

Page 360
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Minimum Freeboard at Equilibrium

Checks whether the minimum freeboard is greater than a minimum required value. This could be used to
check margin line or downflooding point immersion.

Option Description Units

The value of Choose from the following (case length
insensitive auto-completion is used):
Marginline
DeckEdge
DownfloodingPoints
PotentialDfloodingPoints
EmbarkationPoints
ImmersionPoints
Shall be greater than / Permissible value length
Shall not be less than

Maximum Freeboard at Equilibrium

Check that the maximum freeboard is less than a maximum required value. This could be used to check that
an embarkation point is sufficiently close to the waterline.

Option Description Units

The value of Choose from the following (case length
insensitive auto-completion is used):
Marginline
DeckEdge
DownfloodingPoints
PotentialDfloodingPoints
EmbarkationPoints
ImmersionPoints
Shall be greater than / Permissible value length
Shall not be less than

To check that the freeboard lies within a specified range, use a combination of both forms of the
minimum/maximum freeboard criteria.

Value of GMT or GML at Equilibrium

This criterion is used to check that the GM (transverse or longitudinal) exceeds a specified minimum value.

Option Description Units

The value of Choose from the following (case length
insensitive auto-completion is used):
GMtransverse
GMlongitudinal)
Shall be greater than / Permissible value length
Shall not be less than

Page 361
Appendix C: Criteria Help

GZ Curve Criteria (non-heeling arm)

These criteria, calculated from the GZ curve, are calculated from the Large Angle Stability analysis in Stability.

Value of GMt at

Finds the value of GMt at either a specified heel angle or the equilibrium angle. The criterion is passed if the
value of GMt is greater then the required value. GMt is computed from water-plane inertia and immersed
volume (not the slope of the GZ curve as this is inaccurate if the heel angle resolution is insufficient).

In addition to a fixed required value, you may also select a calculation to provide the required minimum GM.

Option Description Units

Value of GMt at either
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature deg
Select calculation from Chose a calculation for the minimum length
list required GM from a copy of one of the
Parent calculations
Shall be greater than / Permissible value length
Shall not be less than

Value of GZ at

Finds the value of GZ at either a specified heel angle, first peak in GZ curve, angle of maximum GZ or the
downflooding angle. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ is greater then the required value.

Option Description Units

Value of GZ at either
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle
Shall be greater than / Permissible value length
Shall not be less than

Value of Maximum GZ

Finds the maximum value of GZ within a specified heel angle range. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ
is greater than the required value. If you want to check the value of GZ at a certain angle you can set both
specified angles as the required angle. If any of the calculated angles for the upper limit are less than the
lower limit, they will be ignored when selecting the lowest. If all the upper limit values are less than the lower
limit, then the criterion will fail. This functionality is to allow criteria such as “The maximum GZ at 30deg or
greater”.
Note: Upper limit and analysis heel angle range

It is required that the range of heel angles specified for the Large Angle Stability analysis is
equal, or exceeds, the upper range heel angle specified in the criterion.

Page 362
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Option Description Units

Value of maximum GZ
in the range from the Lower limit for heel angle range, the
greater of greater of the following:
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature
to the lesser of Upper limit for heel angle range, the lesser
of the following:
specified heel angle User specified heel angle; this should deg
normally be specified and be less than or
equal to the upper limit of the range of
heel angles used for the Large Angle
Stability analysis.
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle
Shall be greater than / Permissible value length
Shall not be less than

Value of Maximum GZ

Page 363
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Value of GZ at Specified Angle or Maximum GZ below Specified Angle

If the angle at which maximum GZ occurs is greater than a specified value, the value of GZ at the specified
angle is calculated. Otherwise the value of maximum GZ is calculated. The required GZ value depends on the
angle at which the maximum occurs, see graph below.

Option Description Units

heel angle at which If the angle of maximum GZ is greater than Deg
required GZ is constant or equal to this value, the required value of
GZ is constant and is taken at this specified
angle. Otherwise the required value of
maximum GZ varies as a hyperbolic
function with the angle of maximum GZ.
This is  0 .
required value of GZ at Required value of GZ at the heel angle Length
this angle is specified above. This is GZ ( 0 ) .
limited by first GZ peak Angle at which GZ is measured may be deg
angle limited to the location of the first peak in
the GZ curve.
limited by first Angle at which GZ is measured may be deg
downflooding angle limited to first downflooding angle.
Shall be greater than / Permissible value. length
Shall not be less than

If  GZ max
  0 then GZ ( 0 ) must be greater than the specified, constant value.
0
If  GZ   0 then GZ max must be greater than GZ ( 0 )
max
 GZ max

where:
 0 is the specified angle at which the required GZ value becomes a constant
 GZ max
is the heel angle at which the maximum GZ of value occurs

GZ ( 0 ) is the GZ value at  0 and GZ max is the maximum value of GZ.

Page 364
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Variation of required GZ with angle of maximum GZ

The angle at which the GZ was measured is listed in the results.

Value of RM at Specified Angle or Maximum RM Below Specified Angle

As above (Value of GZ at specified angle or maximum GZ below specified angle) except the righting moment
rather than the righting lever is specified, measured and compared.

The righting moment RM is given by:

RM = gGZ
where:
 is the vessel volume of displacement
 is the density of the liquid the vessel is floating in
g is acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665m/s2
GZ is the righting lever.

Ratio of GZ Values at Phi1 and Phi2

Calculates the ratio of the GZ values at two specified heel angles. The criterion is passed if the ratio is less
then the required value.
GZ (1 )
Ratio =
GZ (2 )

Option Description Units

Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2
Phi1, first heel angle, First heel angle, the lesser of the following:
the lesser of
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle
Phi2, second heel angle, Second heel angle, the lesser of the
the lesser of following:
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle
Shall be less than / Permissible value %
Shall not be greater
than

Page 365
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2

Angle of Maximum GZ

Finds the angle at which the value of GZ is a maximum positive value, heel angle can be limited by first peak
in GZ curve and/or first downflooding angle. The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required
value.

Option Description Units

Angle of maximum GZ
limited by first GZ peak The angle of maximum GZ shall not be deg
angle greater than the angle at which the first GZ
peak occurs
limited by first The angle of maximum GZ shall not be deg
downflooding angle greater than the angle at which the first
downflooding occurs
Shall be greater than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be less than

Angle of Equilibrium

Finds the angle of equilibrium from the intersection of the GZ curve with the GZ=0 axis. The criterion is
passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value.

Option Description Units

Angle of equilibrium
Shall be less than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be greater

Page 366
Appendix C: Criteria Help

than

Ratio of equilibrium heel angle to the lesser of

The equilibrium angle and the lesser of the selected angles are compared. If the ratio is less than the required
value, then the criterion is passed. Using a ratio gives more flexibility, e.g.: it is possible to check that the
equilibrium angle does not exceed half (or any other fraction) the downflooding angle.

The user may choose the type of Key point to define the downflooding angle (downflooding point, potential
downflooding point, embarkation point, immersion point).

If the equilibrium angle is negative, the user is advised that the vessel should be heeled in the opposite
direction and the criterion is failed.

Option Description Units

Ratio of equilibrium angle to the lesser of:
spec. heel angle Specified heel angle deg
angle of margin line Angle of first immersion of the margin line deg
immersion
angle of deck edge Angle of first immersion of the deck edge deg
immersion
first flooding angle of Smallest immersion angle of the specified deg
the type of Key Point
angle of first GZ peak Angle of first local peak in GZ curve deg
angle of max. GZ Angle at which maximum GZ occurs deg
angle of vanishing Angle of vanishing stability deg
stability
Shall be less than / Permissible value %
Shall not be greater
than

Equilibrium heel angle satisfies either

This criterion is nothing more than two “Ratio of equilibrium heel angle to the lesser of” criteria. The actual
criterion is passed if either of the individual criteria is passed. This type of criterion is used to formulate
criteria such as:
The maximum allowable angle of equilibrium is 15 degrees in the damage condition, but
this can be allowed to increase to 17 degrees if the deck edge is not immersed.

Angle of Downflooding

Finds the angle of first downflooding. The criterion is passed if the downflooding angle is greater then the
required value.

Option Description Units

Angle of downflooding
Shall be greater than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be less than

Page 367
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Angle of immersion

Finds the first/minimum angle at which the selected key-point type immerses. The criterion is passed if the
smallest angle at which the selected item immerses is greater then the required value.

Option Description Units

first flooding angle of Downflooding points
the (key-point type) Potential downflooding points
Immersion points
Auto-complete is used Embarkation points
Shall be greater than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be less than

Angle of Margin Line Immersion

Finds the first/minimum angle at which the margin line immerses. The criterion is passed if the smallest angle
at which the margin line immerses is greater then the required value.

Option Description Units

Angle of margin line immersion
Shall be greater than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be less than

Angle of Deck Edge Immersion

Finds the first/minimum angle at which the deck edge immerses. The criterion is passed if the smallest angle
at which the deck edge immerses is greater then the required value.

Option Description Units

Angle of deck edge immersion
Shall be greater than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be less than

Angle of Vanishing Stability

Finds the angle of vanishing stability from the intersection of the GZ curve with the GZ=0 axis. The criterion is
passed if the angle of vanishing stability is greater then the required value.

Option Description Units

Angle of vanishing stability
Shall be less than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be greater
than

Page 368
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Range of Positive Stability

The angular range for which the GZ curve is positive is computed. The criterion is passed if the computed
range is greater then the required value.

Option Description Units

Range of positive stability
from the greater of Lower limit
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature deg
to the lesser of Upper limit of the range
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle
angle of vanishing See Nomenclature deg
stability
Shall be greater than / Permissible value deg
Shall not be less than

Range of Positive Stability Calculated Required Value

The angular range for which the GZ curve is positive is computed. The criterion is passed if the computed
range is greater then the required value. The required value is computed from a specified constant angle plus
a factor of the equilibrium angle
range = A + B  equi

GZ Area between Limits type 1 - standard

The area below the GZ curve and above the GZ=0 axis is integrated between the selected limits and
compared with a minimum required value. The criterion is passed if the area under the graph is greater than
the required value.

Option Description Units

GZ area between limits type 1 - standard
from the greater of Lower limit for integration, from greatest
angle of
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature deg
to the lesser of Upper limit of integration, from lesser
angle of
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
spec. angle above User specified heel angle above the deg
equilibrium equilibrium heel angle
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle

Page 369
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Option Description Units

immersion angle of See Nomenclature deg
Marginline or
DeckEdge
angle of vanishing See Nomenclature deg
stability
Shall be greater than / Permissible value [Link]
Shall not be less than

GZ area between limits type 1 - standard

GZ area between limits type 2- HSC monohull type

The area under the GZ curve is integrated between the specified limits. However the required minimum area
depends on the upper integration limit. The required area is defined below and is based on the area required
for IMO MSC.36(63) §[Link] and IMO A.749(18) §[Link].1. The criterion is passed if the computed area under
the graph is greater then the required value.

The required area is defined as follows:

If
 max   2 : required area = A2 ;

If
 max  1 : required area = A1 ;
 A − A2 
A2 +  1 (2 − max )
If 1
   max   2 : required area =  2 − 1  ;
Where:
 max is the upper integration limit;

Page 370
Appendix C: Criteria Help

A1 is the area under the GZ curve required at the specified lower heel angle 1 ; and A2 is the area under the
GZ curve required at the specified higher heel angle 2 .

For example, if the lower angle was 15 and the required area at this angle was [Link] and the upper
angle was 30 and the required area at this angle was [Link], then the required area would be given by:
 0.07 − 0.055 
A = 0.55 +  (30 −  max )
 30 − 15 
or simplifying:
A = 0.55 + 0.001 (30 −  max )

Variation of required area with upper integration limit

Option Description Units

GZ area between limits type 2- HSC
monohull type
from the greater of Lower limit for integration, from greatest
angle of
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature deg
to the lesser of Upper limit of integration, from smallest
angle of
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
spec. angle above User specified heel angle above the deg
equilibrium equilibrium heel angle
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle
angle of vanishing See Nomenclature deg
stability

Page 371
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Option Description Units

lower heel angle Minimum angle that requires a GZ area deg
greater than... Until this angle the required
GZ area is constant
required GZ area at Value of GZ area that is required until the [Link]
lower heel angle lower heel angle
higher heel angle Angle from which the required GZ area deg
remains constant onwards
required GZ area at Value of GZ area that is required from the [Link]
higher heel angle higher heel angle onwards
Shall be greater than / Permissible value [Link]
Shall not be less than

GZ area between limits type 2 - HSC monohull type

GZ area between limits type 3 - HSC multihull type

The area under the GZ curve is integrated between the specified limits. However the required minimum area

depends on the upper integration limit

A ( /  )
1 1 ( max ). The required area is defined below and is based on the area

required for IMO MSC.36 (63) Annex 7 §1.1. The criterion is passed if the computed area under the graph is
greater than the required value.

required area =
A1 (1 /  max ) ;
Where:
 max is the upper integration limit;
A1 is the area under the GZ curve required at the specified heel angle 1 .

Page 372
Appendix C: Criteria Help

For example, if the specified angle ( 1 ) was 30 and the required area at this angle ( A1 ) was [Link], then
the required area would be given by:
A = 0.055(30 / max )

Variation of required area with upper integration limit

Option Description Units

GZ area between limits type 3 - HSC
multihull type
from the greater of Lower limit for integration, from greatest
angle of
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature deg
to the lesser of Upper limit of integration, from lesser
angle of
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
spec. angle above User specified heel angle above the deg
equilibrium equilibrium heel angle
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle
angle of vanishing See Nomenclature deg
stability
higher heel angle Heel angle at which required GZ area is deg
specified
required GZ area at Value of GZ area that is required until the [Link]
higher heel angle higher heel angle
Shall be greater than / Permissible value [Link]
Shall not be less than

Page 373
Appendix C: Criteria Help

GZ area between limits type 3 - HSC multihull type

Ratio of GZ area between limits

This criterion calculates the ratio of the two areas between the GZ curve and the GZ=0 axis.
2

Area 1
 GZ ( )d
1
Ratio = = , where “abs” means the absolute value of.
abs(Area 2)  4 
abs  GZ ( )d 
 
 3 

Option Description Units

Ratio of GZ area between limits
Area 1 from the greater of Area 1 lower integration limit, 1
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature deg
Area 1 to the lesser of Area 1 upper integration limit, 2 deg
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding angle See Nomenclature deg
angle of vanishing stability See Nomenclature deg
Area 2 from the lesser of Area 2 lower integration limit, 3
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg

Page 374
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Option Description Units

angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding angle See Nomenclature deg
angle of vanishing stability See Nomenclature deg
Area 2 to Area 1 upper integration limit, 4
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
Shall be greater than / Permissible value %
Shall not be less than

This criterion is designed to be calculated on the positive side of the GZ curve only; GZ areas below the GZ=0
axis on the negative heel angle side of the GZ curve are not considered positive. Typically, Area 1 would be
from equilibrium to vanishing stability and Area 2 would be from vanishing stability to 180 deg, see graph
below.

In the example below, the lower and upper integration limits for Area 1 are equilibrium and vanishing
stability, respectively and the limits for Area 2 are vanishing stability and 180 deg.

Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 1

In the following example the upper limit for Area 1 has been set to the downflooding angle. The limits for
Area 2 remain unchanged.

Page 375
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 2

In the final example, the lower integration range for Area 2 has been reduced to the downflooding angle.
Note that Area 2 is now A1 – A2.

Ratio of GZ area between limits – Example 3

Page 376
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits

This criterion calculates the ratio of GZ area above the GZ=0 axis to that below the axis in the given heel
angle range.

Option Description Units

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area
between limits
in the heel angle range from User specified lower limit heel angle deg
to User specified upper limit heel angle deg
Shall be greater than / Permissible value %
Shall not be less than

Area 1
Ratio = ,
abs(Area 2)
where “abs” means the absolute value of. And the areas are defined as follows:

If both heel angle limits are ≥ zero: Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the
value of GZ > 0; Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ < 0.
Area 1 is positive, Area 2 is negative.

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits.

Positive heel: lower limit = 0deg, upper limit = 180deg.
If both heel angle limits are < zero: Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the
value of GZ < 0; Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ > 0.
Area 1 is positive, Area 2 is negative.

Page 377
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits.

Negative heel: lower limit = -180deg, upper limit = 0deg.
If the lower heel angle limit < zero, and the upper heel angle limit > zero (the upper limit is assumed to be
greater than the lower limit): Area 1 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of
GZ > 0 for heel angles ≥ 0 plus the area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ < 0 for
heel angles < 0; Area 2 is the total area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ < 0 for
heel angles ≥ 0 plus the area between the GZ curve and GZ=0 axis, where the value of GZ > 0 for heel angles
< 0. Area 1 is positive, Area 2 is negative.

Page 378
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between limits.

Positive and negative heel: lower limit = -180deg, upper limit = 180deg.

Subdivision Index s-factor - MSC 19(58)

Probabilistic damage s-factor according to MSC.19(58)

Option Description Units

Lower angle of range : the The greater of the selected angles is
greater of be to specify the lower limit of the
range of positive stability and the
range in which the maximum value of
GZ should be found.
specified heel angle User specified heel angle deg
angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature deg
Upper angle of range: lesser The lowest of the selected angles is be
of to specify the upper limit of the range
of positive stability and the range in
which the maximum value of GZ
should be found.
specified heel angle See Nomenclature deg
spec. angle above See Nomenclature deg
equilibrium
angle of first GZ peak See Nomenclature deg
angle of maximum GZ See Nomenclature deg
first downflooding angle See Nomenclature deg
immersion angle of See Nomenclature deg
Marginline or DeckEdge
angle of vanishing stability See Nomenclature deg
Max. GZ limit Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ length
value when computing s
Range limit Upper limit of allowable range of deg
positive stability when computing s

S = C sqrt( 0.5 GZmax . range)

Both the values of maximum GZ and range of positive stability can be clipped.

Heeling arm criteria (xRef)

The cross-reference heeling arm criteria are set up to allow you to define heeling arms or heeling moments
in a central location and then cross-reference or link them into the criteria. The criteria themselves work
much the same as the Heeling arm criteria (page 380), except for the fact that you don’t have to specify the
heeling arm for each criterion separately, but can simply select which heeling arm you wish to apply.

After you have defined your heeling arms, these can be cross-referenced into new heeling arm criteria:

Page 379
Appendix C: Criteria Help

The heeling arms are cross-referenced simply by selecting the desired heeling arm from the pull-down list.
Note that only heeling in the same group as the criterion will be selectable from the pull-down list:

For information on defining heeling arms or moments, see Minimum GM calculator - Grain on page 341.

Heeling arm criteria

The preferred method is to use the xRef heeling arm criteria rather than the stand alone heeling arm criteria.
This is because a wider range of heeling arm formulations is available and for some criteria, they only exist in
xRef form.

The heeling arm criteria available in the Stability Criteria dialog are listed below. Also available are:
• Multiple heeling arm criteria; these are where the same criterion is applied to up to three heeling arms
and/or combinations of these heeling arms
• Heeling Arm, combined criteria; these are where several criteria are applied to the same heeling arm

Value of GMT at equilibrium - general heeling arm

Calculates the transverse metacentric height (GMT) at the intersection of the GZ and heel arm curves. The
criterion is passed if the GMT value is greater then the required value. GMT is computed from the waterplane
inertia and the displaced volume at the equilibrium heel angle.

Page 380
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of GMT and heeling arm

Calculates the following ratio and the criterion is passed if the ratio exceeds the specified value.
GM sin(  )  HA( )
Where the heel angle, , is the lesser of: a user-specified heel angle; angle of margin line immersion; angle of
deck edge immersion; or first flooding angle of the specified key point type. In addition, this angle may also
be multiplied by a user-specified factor. The specified cross-referenced heel arm is then evaluated at this heel
angle to give: HA ( ) . Finally, The transverse GM is taken at a user-specified heel angle or angle of
equilibrium (without heel arm).

Ratio of GMt and heel arm criterion

Value of GZ at equilibrium - general heeling arm

Calculates the value of the GZ curve at the equilibrium intersection of the GZ and heel arm curves. The
criterion is passed if the GZ value is greater then the required value.

Page 381
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Value of GZ at equilibrium - general heeling arm

Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm

Finds the maximum value of (GZ - heel arm) in a specified heel angle range; various features of the GZ curve
and heeling arm may be used to limit the heel angle range used. The criterion is passed if the value of (GZ -
heel arm) is greater then the required value.

Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm

The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected
upper angle limits, including “specified heel angle”. However this option would normally be used to specify
an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”.

Value of maximum GZ

Finds the maximum value of GZ in a specified heel angle range; various features of the GZ curve and heeling
arm may be used to limit the heel angle range used. Note that this criterion calculates the actual value of GZ
and not the residual GZ above the heeling arm. The criterion is passed if the value of GZ is greater then the
required value.

Page 382
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm

The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected
upper angle limits, including “specified heel angle”. However this option would normally be used to specify
an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”.

Value of GZ above heeling arm at angle

Finds the value of (GZ - heel arm) at a specific angle of heel which may be calculated from parameters of the
GZ and HA curves.

This criterion works in three steps:

1. Determine the reference angle according to the formula
2. Find the GZ and heeling arm values at the reference angle by looking up on the GZ and
heeling arm curves.
3. Calculate the value (GZ - heel arm) and compare to the required value; the criterion is
passed if the required value is exceeded.

Reference angle
The reference angle, r , is determined as follows:
r = f s eff + 0
where:
f is a constant factor;  s eff is the effective angle of static heel; and 0 is a constant
offset angle.
the effective angle of static heel,  s eff , is the maximum of the actual static heel angle, s
and a limiting minimum value s0

Page 383
Appendix C: Criteria Help

 s eff = maximum  s 0 ,  s 

Variation of r with s for f = 2 and 0 = 5 with  s 0 = 15

Required value of GZ above heeling arm at reference angle:

The required value of (GZ - HA) evaluated at the reference heel angle, h(r ) , also depends on the effective
angle of static heel,  s eff , and is determined by the following formula:
h(r ) = c   s eff − 0 
Where the constant c is determined from the specified minimum allowable value h0 ( s 0 ) :
h0
c=
s0 − s

Variation of required value, h(r ) , with  s for c = 0.01 m/deg

Page 384
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Example application with typical parameter value:

An example of the application of this criterion can be found in
TÜRK LOYDU – NAVAL SHIP TECHNOLOGY, HULL STRUCTURES AND SHIP EQUIPMENT– JAN 2016.

Here the parameters are as follows:

f = 2 ; 0 = 5 deg ;  s 0 = 15 deg ; h0 ( s 0 ) = 0.1 m, giving c = 0.01 m/deg

thus the reference angle, r , is:

r = 2 s eff + 5 deg

and the required value of (GZ - HA) is

h(r ) = 0.01   s eff − 5 m

Option Description Units

Value of GZ above heeling arm at
reference angle (residual GZ)
factor, f Factor used to calculate the reference
angle
angle of static heel Angle of static heel: from the equilibrium, deg
(phi_s) is greater of: first +ve up-crossing of GZ=0 or HA
curve; an additional offset may be
included.
offset angle for required Offset angle used to calculate the reference deg
lever, phi_0 angle and required value
min. angle for phi_s Minimum value to be used for effective deg
angle of static heel. The angle of static
heel used to calculate the reference angle
and required value is never less than this
value.
req'd min. value when The required value at the specified m
phi_s at or below min. minimum value of effective angle of static
angle heel. This is used to compute the required
value.
Shall be greater than / Permissible value m
Shall not be less than

Maximum ratio of GZ to heeling arm

This criterion calculates the maximum ratio of GZ : Heeling arm (for the same heel angle) within the range of
heel angles specified. The value of GZ at this heel angle must be greater than zero. If the heeling arm is zero
or negative in the range, then the point with maximum positive GZ (where the heeling arm  0.0) will be
selected.

The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected
upper angle limits, including “specified heel angle”. However this option would normally be used to specify
an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”.

Examples:

Page 385
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Upper limit is 50% of angle of margin line immersion (43 / 2 = 21.5). In the range 0 to 21.5, the maximum
ratio of GZ:heel arm occurs at 21.5. At this heel angle the value of GZ is 0.553m and the heel arm 0.930m
giving a ratio of 59%.

Page 386
Appendix C: Criteria Help

In this case a constant heeling arm is used, thus the maximum ratio occurs at the angle of maximum GZ
(62.4). At this heel angle the value of GZ is 1.122m and the heel arm 0.5m giving a ratio of 224%.

Finally, the downflooding angle is 94.3, at this heel angle the heel arm is zero (thus the ratio infinite). Hence
the criterion is passed. The angle and value of GZ is given for the location where it is a maximum (in the
region where the heel arm is zero; the exact value will depend slightly on the heel angles tested in the Large
Angle Stability analysis.)

Page 387
Appendix C: Criteria Help

The same is true if an unusual user-defined heeling arm is used. In this case the heeling arm is zero between
50 and 70. Hence the maximum ratio reported is infinity and occurs at the angle where GZ is maximum in
this heel angle range.

Minimum ratio of GZ to heeling arm

This criterion calculates the minimum ratio of GZ : Heeling arm (for the same heel angle) within the range of
heel angles specified. And checks that this ratio is greater than a specified value. This criterion can be used to
check that the GZ is at least as great as the heeling arm over the specified range. If a heeling arm with zero
amplitude is used, the same criterion may be used to check that the GZ is positive over the specified range.

The upper limit may be specified as a certain percentage of the selected limits. This is applied to all selected
upper angle limits, including “specified heel angle”. However this option would normally be used to specify
an upper limiting angle of “half the angle of margin line immersion”.

Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - general heeling arm

Used to check the ratio of GZ values at two points on the GZ curve. The heel arm is used to define the
equilibrium angle and the heel angle where (GZ - heel arm) is maximum. The criterion is passed if the ratio is
less than the required value.

GZ (1 )
Ratio =
GZ (2 )

Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm

Calculates the heel angle at which the difference between the GZ curve and the heeling arm is greatest (GZ -
Heel Arm is maximum, positive). The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value.

Page 388
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm - general heeling arm

Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the specified heeling arm. The equilibrium angle is the smallest
positive angle where the GZ and heeling arm curves intersect and the GZ curve has positive slope. The
criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value.

Page 389
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm

Angle of equilibrium less than angle at which specified GZ occurs

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the cross-referenced heeling arm applied. The equilibrium angle is
the smallest positive angle where the GZ and heeling arm curves intersect and the GZ curve has positive
slope. The criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle (blue in figure below) is less then the required value
(green).

The required value (maximum allowable equilibrium angle) is determined from the smallest heel angle at
which a certain critical GZ (red in figure below) value multiplied by a specified factor occurs. The critical GZ
can be chosen as the minimum of:
1. GZ at fixed, specified heel angle
2. GZ at angle of first peak in the GZ curve
3. GZ at angle of maximum GZ
4. GZ at angle of maximum GZ above heel arm
5. GZ at first flooding angle of the specified type of key points
6. GZ at immersion angle of the deck edge or margin line

Note that this criterion uses the actual value of GZ not the residual GZ above the heeling arm.

Angle of equilibrium with heeling arm is less than angle at which specified GZ occurs

Angle of equilibrium less than angle at which specified freeboard occurs

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the cross-referenced heeling arm applied. The equilibrium angle is
the smallest positive angle where the GZ and heeling arm curves intersect and the GZ curve has positive
slope. The criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value.

Page 390
Appendix C: Criteria Help

The required minimum value of heel at equilibrium is determined from the smallest heel angle at which a
specified fraction of the minimum upright freeboard is attained. The freeboard may be measured to the
Margin line or Deck edge line.

Angle of equilibrium with heeling arm is less than angle at which specified fraction of upright freeboard
occurs

Option Description Units

angle at which Percentage of upright freeboard used to %
minimum freeboard of determine required minimum freeboard
the Margin line or which is in turn used to determine the
Deck edge is maximum allowable heel angle at
of the upright freeboard equilibrium.
of the
of the upright freeboard Margin Line or Deck Edge or KeyPoint
of the Type (auto complete)

Angle of equilibrium ratio - general heeling arm

Calculates the ratio of the angle of equilibrium (with the specified heeling arm) to another, selectable angle.
The angle of equilibrium is computed as described in §Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm.

Page 391
Appendix C: Criteria Help

 equilibrium
Ratio =
 specified
The other angle used to compute the ratio may be one of the following:
Required angle for ratio calculation Auto complete text
Marginline immersion angle MarginlineImmersionAngle
Deck edge immersion angle DeckEdgeImmersionAngle
First downflooding angle DownfloodingAngle
Angle of first GZ peak FirstGZPeakAngle
Angle of maximum GZ MaximumGZAngle
Angle of vanishing stability with heel arm VanishingStabilityWithHeelArmAngle

Angle of vanishing stability - general heeling arm

Calculates the location of the first intersection of the GZ curve and heel arm curve where the slope of the GZ
curve is negative. The criterion is passed if the angle is greater then the required value. This criterion should
not be confused with the range of positive stability.

Angle of vanishing stability - general heeling arm

Ratio of heel angles: phi1 and phi2 - general heeling arm

Used to check the ratio of the heel angles at which two features of the GZ curve occur. The heel arm is used
to define the equilibrium angle and the heel angle where (GZ - heel arm) is maximum. The criterion is passed
if the ratio is less than the required value. This can be used to verify that the angle of maximum GZ occurs at
a great angle than the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm.

Page 392
Appendix C: Criteria Help

1
Ratio =
2

Ratio of heel angles: phi1 and phi2 - general heeling arm

Range of positive stability - general heeling arm

Computes the range of positive stability with the heeling arm.

[Range of stability] = [Angle of vanishing stability] – [Angle of equilibrium]
The criterion is passed if the value of range of stability is greater then the required value.

Page 393
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Range of positive stability - general heeling arm

Freeboard at equilibrium - general heeling arm

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with a general heeling arm applied. The equilibrium angle is the smallest
positive angle where the GZ and heeling arm curves intersect and the GZ curve has positive slope. The
freeboard of the specified type of key-point or key-line at this angle of equilibrium is then found. The
criterion is passed if the equilibrium angle is less then the required value.

GZ area between limits type 1 - general heeling arm

Computes the area below the GZ curve and above the heel arm curve between the specified heel angles. The
criterion is passed if the area is greater than the required value.

 (GZ ( ) − heel arm( ) )d
2

Area =  1

Page 394
Appendix C: Criteria Help

GZ area between limits type 1 - general heeling arm

GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm

The area between the GZ curve and heel arm and the area under the GZ curve is computed (Area 1). The
required value is based on a constant plus a proportion of the area under the GZ curve (Area 2). The criterion
is passed if the ratio is greater than the required value.

 (GZ ( ) − heel arm( ) )d
2

Area 1 =  1 ;
4

Area 2 =
 GZ ( )d ;
3

Area 1  constant + kArea 2

Page 395
Appendix C: Criteria Help

GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm

Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm

The ratio of the area between the GZ curve and heel arm and the area under the GZ curve is computed. This
criterion is based on the area ratio required by various Navies’ turning and passenger crowding criteria. Type
1 stands for which areas are being integrated to calculate the ratio (see graph). The criterion is passed if the
ratio is greater than the required value.
2

Area 1 =
 (GZ ( ) − heel arm( ))d ;
1

4
 GZ ( )d ;
Area 2 =  3

Area 1
Ratio = Area 2

Page 396
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm

Ratio of areas type 2 - general heeling arm

This criterion is used to simulate the effects of wind heeling whilst the vessel is rolling in waves. Because of
the many different ways in which this criterion is used it has several options for defining the way in which the
areas are calculated.
If a gust ratio of greater than 1.0 is used, the vessel is assumed to roll to windward (under the action of waves
with the steady wind pressure acting on it, then roll to leeward under a gust. Hence the rollback angle is
taken from the equilibrium angle with the steady wind heeling arm, but the integration for Area 1 is taken
from the equilibrium with the gust wind heeling arm.
The roll back may be specified as either a fixed angular roll back from the angle of equilibrium with the
steady wind heel arm or can be rolled back to the vessel equilibrium angle ignoring the wind heeling arms
(i.e.: where the GZ curve crosses the GZ=0 axis with positive slope).
Note

The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to
allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.
2

Area 1 =
 (GZ ( ) − gust heel arm( ))d
1

2
Area 2 =
 (gust heel arm ( ) − GZ ( ))d
1

Page 397
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Area 1
Ratio = Area 2

Ratio of areas type 2 - general heeling arm

Ratio of areas type 3 - general heeling arm

The ratio of the area under the GZ curve to the area under the heel arm curve is computed. This criterion is
based on the area ratio required by BS6349-6:1989. The criterion is passed if the ratio is greater than the
required value. Areas under the GZ=0 axis are counted as negative.
2
Area GZ =

1
GZ ( ) d ;

2
Area HA =
 1
heel arm ( )d ;

Page 398
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Area GZ
Ratio =
Area HA

Ratio of areas type 3 - general heeling arm

Multiple heeling arm criteria

These criteria are used to check the effects of combinations of up to three heeling arms and their
combinations, for example passenger crowding, turning, wind.

The combined heeling arms are computed by adding the values of the individual heeling arms at each heel
angle.

Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - multiple heeling arms

Checks the ratio of GZ values as per §Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - general heeling arm with the
specified heeling arms.

Page 399
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - multiple heeling arms

Angle of equilibrium - multiple heeling arms

Checks the equilibrium heel angle as per §Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm with the specified
heeling arms.

Angle of equilibrium - multiple heeling arms

Page 400
Appendix C: Criteria Help

GZ area between limits type 1 - multiple heeling arms

Checks the area under the heel angle as per §GZ area between limits type 1 - general heeling arm with the
specified heeling arms.

GZ area between limits type 1 - multiple heeling arms

GZ area between limits type 2 - multiple heeling arms

Checks the area under the heel angle as per §GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm with the
specified heeling arms.
2

Area 1 =
 (GZ ( ) − heel arm( ))d ;
1

4

Area 2 =
 GZ ( )d ;
3

Area 1  constant + kArea 2

Page 401
Appendix C: Criteria Help

GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling arm

Ratio of areas type 1 - multiple heeling arms

Checks the area under the heel angle as per §Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm with the specified
heeling arms.

Page 402
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of areas type 1 - multiple heeling arms

Subdivision Index s-factor – MSC.216(82)

The Subdivision Index s-factor (probablity of survival) as described in IMO MSC.216(82) is computed. Several
extra options are presented to the user.

Page 403
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Option Description Units

Subdivision Index s-factor –
MSC.216(82)
Vessel type : The type of vessel being analysed.
Passenger, Cargo, This is used to determine default
User parameters and which s-factors should
be computed.
Which s-factors s-Final
should be applied ? s-Intermediate
s-Moment
Lower angle of range: The largest of the seleted angles is
greater of used to define the beginning of the
range. It is recommended that the
vessel be heeled so that the
equilibrium angle is positive, but if it
is heeled in the other direction, the
range can be specified to start at zero
(or some other angle).
Specified heel angle deg
Angle of equilibrium See Nomenclature deg
Upper angle of range: The lowest of the selected angles can
lesser of be used to specify the upper limit of
the range of positive stability. The
beginning of the range of positive
stability is taken as the first positive
equilibrium angles
first downflooding See Nomenclature deg
angle
angle of vanishing See Nomenclature deg
stability
Immersion angle of See Nomenclature deg
Marginline or
DeckEdge
s-Final Parameters for computing the s-Final
factor
Max. GZ limit Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ length
value when computing s-Final
Range limit Upper limit of allowable range of deg
positive stability when computing s-
Final
K-factor min. heel Theta_min used to determine K deg
K-factor max. heel Theta_max used to determine K deg
s-Intermediate Parameters for computing the s-
Intermediate factor
Max. GZ limit Upper limit of allowable maximum GZ length
value when computing s-Intermediate

Page 404
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Range limit Upper limit of allowable range of deg

positive stability when computing s-
Intermediate
Max. allowable Maximum allowable equilibrium heel deg
equilibrium heel angle after damage. If the equilibrium
angle heel angle exceeds this value then s-
Intermediate is zero.
s-Moment Parameters for computing the s-
Moment factor
intact displacement at Displacement of the intact vessel at the mass
subdivision draft subdivision draft
GZ reduction Reduction to be applied to maximum length
GZ
Passenger heel Link to passenger heeling moment [Link]
moment
Wind heel moment Link to wind heeling moment [Link]
Select survival craft Link to heeling moment that defines [Link]
heel moment the effect of launching survival craft
Angle of equilibrium There are two rows where you can deg
must be less than check that the equilibrium angle is less
immersion angle of ... than the immersion angle of different
key points (for example
PotentialDownfloodingPoints and
DeckEdge). This is to check
compliance with MSC.216(82)
Regulation 7-2 5.2 and 5.3
Shall be greater than / Permissible minimum value for s-
Shall not be less than factor

Vessel type:
If Passenger is selected, then s-Intermediate and s-Moment factors are computed. For the s-Final factor, the
minimum and maximum heel angles are set to 7 and 15 deg. respectively. The criterion result is then the
minimum value of s-Intermediate and (s-Final * s-Moment).

If Cargo is selected, then only the s-Final factor is computed and in this case, the minimum and maximum
heel angles are set to 25 and 30 deg. respectively.

If User is selected, then all three s-factors are computed as for the Passenger ship, and any values for the s-
Final factor minimum and maximum heel angles may be specified.

s-Final = K. {GZmax / limitGZmax . Range / limitRange}1/4

where:
K = 1 if equilibrium heel <= Theta_min
K = 0 if equilibrium heel >= Theta_max
K = {(Theta_max – equilibrium heel) / (Theta_max – Theta_min)}1/2

s-Intermediate = {GZmax / limitGZmax . Range / limitRange}1/4

if equilibrium heel > Max. allowable equilibrium heel angle then s-Intermediate = 0

Page 405
Appendix C: Criteria Help

s-Moment = (GZmax – GZ reduction) . Displacement / Mheel

where: Mheel is the maximum of the three selected heeling moments.

The result is the minimum of s-Intermediate and (s-Final * s-Moment).

All s-factors are in the range 0 <= s <= 1

Range start angle

Addition of “Lower angle of the range of stability” options

If the specified heel angle is selected and set to zero or positive, this will allow the criterion to evaluate even
if the equilibrium heel angle is negative:

Page 406
Appendix C: Criteria Help

The range of positive stability is taken from the specified heel angle (zero deg.) rather than the equilibrium
heel angle, because it is negative. The absolute value of the equilibrium angle is used to evaluate the K factor
(since this is more conservative than using zero deg.)

Heeling arm, combined criteria

Several criteria require the evaluation of several individual criteria components. Although it is possible to
evaluate these criteria by evaluation of their individual components, for simplicity the common combinations
have been combined into single criteria.
Note:

At least one of the individual criteria has to be selected.

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm

This is a combined criterion where three individual criteria must be met. These are:
1. Angle of steady heel must be less than a specified value. The Angle of steady heel is obtained as per
§Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm.
2. The area ratio must be greater than a specified value. The area ratio is evaluated as per § Ratio of
areas type 1 - general heeling arm
3. The ratio of the value of GZ at equilibrium to the value of maximum GZ must be less than a specified
value.

Page 407
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - general wind heeling arm

This is a widely applicable wind heeling criterion in its most generic format. The heeling arm is specified
simply by a magnitude and cosine power. Optionally, a gust wind can be applied.
1. Angle of steady heel must be less than a specified value. The angle of steady heel is obtained as per
Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm.
2. The area ratio must be greater than a specified value. The area ratio is evaluated as per Ratio of areas
type 2 - general heeling arm.
3. The ratio of the value of GZ at equilibrium to the value of maximum GZ must be less than a specified
value.
Note

The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to
allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.

Page 408
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Area definition
If required, a reduction of the GZ curve may be applied. If this is done, all calculations are done using a
reduced GZ’ curve which is computed at each heel angle as follows:
GZ ' ( ) = GZ ( ) − B cos m ( )

This criterion may be used to evaluate the following specific criteria (as well as many others of similar format):
• US Navy DDS079-1: §079-1-c(9) 1, §079-1-c(9) 4,
• Royal Navy NES 109: §1.2.2, §1.3.5, §1.4.2 Initial impulse and Wind heeling criteria
• RAN A015866: §[Link], §4.8, §4.9.5
• IMO A.749(18) Code on intact stability: §3.2
• IMO MSC.36(63) High-speed craft code §[Link]
• ISO/FDIS 12217-1:2002(E) Small Non-Sailing Boats §6.3.2

Page 409
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2a) - general heeling arm

This criterion is based on the calculations required for the Bureau Veritas criterion that ensures safety when
cargo is accidentally lost while lifting. The criterion evaluates two checks: ratio of Area2 / Area1 and the
remaining range of stability (phi3 – phi2).

PhiC is fixed at the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm (first up-crossing intersection of GZ curve with
heeling arm).

Area2 / Area1 must be greater than the required value

phi2 - phi3 must be greater than the required value

Page 410
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Option Description Units

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type
2a)
Area1 integrated from Angle that defines the lower heel angle
the greater of (phi1) for the integration range of Area1. The
lesser of the following three options
spec. heel angle A specified, fixed heel angle deg
(equilibrium angle
during lifting)
roll back from angle A roll-back angle (positive) from the deg
of equilibrium with angle of equilibrium with the heeling
heeling arm arm (first up-crossing intersection of
the GZ and heeling arm curves)
angle of equilibrium Roll back to the angle of equilibrium deg
(without heel arm) of the vessel (ignoring the heeling
arm)
Area2 integrated to Upper integration limit of Area2 deg
the lesser of (phi2) chosen from the lesser of the seven
options.
Max. heeling angle This angle is used to evaluate the deg
due to roll taken as second part of the criterion: the
the lesser of (phi3) difference phi2-phi3 must be greater
than the required value.
phi3 may be determined from a
number of features of the GZ curve
including being chosen such that
Area3/Area1 is some specified value.
angle at which Area3 The required ratio of Area3/Area2 deg
/ Area1 is used to determine the angle phi3

Note

The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to
allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.

Derived heeling arm criteria

For these criteria, the magnitude of the heeling arm is derived (rather than specified directly) from a required
relationship between the GZ curve and the heeling arm curve. The shape of the heeling arm (e.g. cos 1.3) must
be specified. The heeling arm is normally derived from a GZ value, GZ area or angle of equilibrium
requirement.

The criterion is then evaluated by comparing some requirement of the derived heeling arm with a specified
value.

Page 411
Appendix C: Criteria Help

GZ derived heeling arm

This criterion is used to calculate the amplitude of a heeling arm derived from the value of GZ at a certain
heel angle. The GZ value used to define the heeling arm is the GZ at one of the following heel angles:
• specified angle of heel
• angle of first peak in GZ curve
• angle at which maximum GZ occurs
• angle of first downflooding
• immersion angle of margin line or deck edge
The heeling arm is then calculated as described by the equation below, and is then compared with a
minimum required value.

GZ
A=
 cos n 
where:
A Amplitude of heeling arm
n Shape of heeling arm (n = 0 for constant heeling arm)
 Specified heel angle
GZ  Value of GZ at specified heel angle
 Required ratio = GZ / HA

GZ area derived heeling arm type 1

This criterion is used to calculate the amplitude of a heeling arm derived from the area under the GZ curve
between specified limits. The area under both the GZ and heeling arm curves is integrated between the same
specified limits, see below.

Lower integration limit, 1 :

• specified angle of heel
• angle of equilibrium
Upper integration limit, 2 :
• spec. heel angle
• spec. angle above equilibrium
• angle of first GZ peak
• angle of max. GZ
• first downflooding angle
• angle of vanishing stability

It is also possible to specify a minimum heel angle for the upper integration limit. Any negative areas (due to
negative GZ) up to this minimum upper integration heel angle will be deducted from the total area under the
GZ curve.

The amplitude of the heeling, which satisfies the equation below arm is then found and compared with a
minimum required value.
2
2  GZ d
 A cos n  d = 1

1 
A Amplitude of heeling arm
n Shape of heeling arm (n = 0 for constant heeling arm)
 heel angle

Page 412
Appendix C: Criteria Help

GZ GZ curve
 Required ratio

GZ area derived heeling arm type 2

This criterion is used to simulate the effects of wind heeling whilst the vessel is rolling in waves. Because of
the many different ways in which this criterion is used it has several options for defining the way in which the
areas are calculated. With the wind pressure acting on it, the vessel is assumed to roll to windward under the
action of waves and then roll to leeward. The rollback angle is taken from the equilibrium angle with the wind
heeling arm.

A heeling arm of prescribed shape is found such that the specified area ratio is met. The amplitude of the
heeling arm is then compared with a required minimum value.

The roll back may be specified as either:

• a fixed angular roll back from the angle of equilibrium with the wind heel arm;
• roll back to the vessel equilibrium angle ignoring the wind heeling arms (i.e.: where the GZ curve crosses
the GZ=0 axis with positive slope); or
• roll back to a specified heel angle.
Note

The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to
allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.

Area 1 =
 (GZ ( ) − heel arm( ))d
2

2
Area 2 =
 (heel arm( ) − GZ ( ))d
1

Area 1
Ratio = Area 2

GZ area derived heeling arm (type 2) - general heeling arm

Page 413
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Angle of equilibrium - GZ derived wind heeling arm

The derived wind heeling criterion is used to check that the steady heel angle due to wind pressure exceeds a
certain value. The steady heel arm is derived from a gust of specified ratio. The wind gust will cause the
vessel to heel over to the lesser of a specified heel angle, angle of the first GZ peak, angle of maximum GZ or
the first downflooding angle.

The vessel is assumed to be safe from gusts up to the specified ratio, if the angle of steady heel is greater
than the angle. This means that the lesser of: a specified heel angle, first peak in GZ curve, angle of maximum
GZ or the first downflooding angle, should be large enough to withstand a gust from a steady wind heeling
angle larger than ….

Angle of equilibrium - derived wind heeling arm

Ratio of equilibrium angles - GZ area derived heeling arm

This criterion is used to compare the equilibrium angles with two different heeling arms. The first equilibrium
angle, φ1, is the angle of equilibrium with a derived heeling arm. The second equilibrium angle, φ 2, is the
angle of equilibrium with a specified heeling arm.

The derived heeling arm is chosen such that the areas, A 1 and A2, are in the specified ratio. There are several
options which can be used to define the upper and lower ranges for the area integrations. The specified
heeling arm is specified by an amplitude and cosine power; the same cosine power is used for both the
specified and the derived heeling arms.

Page 414
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Ratio of equilibrium angles - derived heeling arm


Area 1 =
 (GZ ( ) − heel arm( ))d
2

2
Area 2 =
 (heel arm( ) − GZ ( ))d
1

Area 1
Ratio of areas = Area 2

φ1 = Angle of equilibrium with heeling arm derived from required area ratio (purple heeling arm)

φ2 = Angle of equilibrium with specified heeling arm (orange heeling arm)

The criterion is passed if the ratio φ2 : φ1 is less than the required value. Thus if it is required that φ2 be less
than φ1, then the ratio φ2 : φ1 must be less than unity.

Option Description Units

A Magnitude of specified heeling arm length
n Cosine power to describe shape of both
specified and derived heelning arms
required area ratio The required area ratio used to find the
Area1 / Area2 derived heeling arm magnitude
options Specify lower integration limit for Area1 deg
options Specify upper integration limit for Area1 deg
options Specify lower integration limit for Area2; the deg

Page 415
Appendix C: Criteria Help

upper integration limit is always the angle of

equilibrium with derived heel arm
required value Specifies the maximum allowable ratio of
equilibrium heel angle with the specified heel
arm to the equilibrium heel angle with the
derived heel arm (phi2 / phi1). This value is
normally less than or equal to 100%,
indicating that the equilibrium heel angle with
the specified heel arm must be less than the
equilibrium heel angle with the derived heel
arm

Note

The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to
allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.

Other combined criteria

Other criteria, which do not easily fall into the categories above, are found here.

Other criteria – STIX ISO12217-2:2002

The stability index criterion or STIX criterion as described in ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2002(E) is used to assess the
stability of sailing craft. The required input parameters are described below. Please refer to ISO/FDIS 12217-
2:2002(E) for exact definitions of parameters and how they should be calculated.

Option Description Units

delta Adjustment to STIX rating, either 0 or 5.
 = 5 if the vessel, when fully flooded with
water, has reserve buoyancy and positive
righting lever at a heel angle of 90º .
 = 0 in all other cases.
AS, sail area ISO 8666 Sail area as defined in ISO 8666. Note that length2
no additional windage areas are calculated
by Stability for this criterion.
height of centroid of AS Height of sail area centre of effort from length
model’s vertical datum (not necessarily the
waterline, this is not the same as the STIX
variable hCE which is measured from the
waterline, positive up).
LH, length Hull length as defined by ISO 8666. This length
may be either specified or calculated by
Stability. Stability calculates this parameter
as the overall length of the vessel (all hull
surfaces) in the upright, zero trim
condition.

Page 416
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Option Description Units

BH, beam of hull Hull beam as defined by ISO 8666. This length
may be either specified or calculated by
Stability. Stability calculates this parameter
as the overall beam of the vessel (all hull
surfaces) in the upright, zero trim
condition.
LWL, length waterline Hull waterline length in the current load length
condition as defined by ISO 8666. This may
be either specified or calculated by
Stability. Stability calculates this parameter
as the waterline length of the vessel (all hull
surfaces) at zero heel and at the loadcase
displacement and centre of gravity; if the
analysis is carried out free-to-trim, the
waterline of the trimmed vessel is used.
BWL, beam waterline Hull waterline beam in the current load length
condition as defined by ISO 8666. This may
be either specified or calculated by
Stability. Stability calculates this parameter
as the waterline beam of the vessel (all hull
surfaces) at zero heel and at the loadcase
displacement and centre of gravity; if the
analysis is carried out free-to-trim, the
waterline of the trimmed vessel is used.
height of immersed Height of centre of the lateral projected length
profile area centroid immersed area of the hull from model’s
vertical datum (not necessarily the
waterline, this is not the same as the STIX
variable hLP ); may be specified or
calculated by Stability. Stability calculates
this parameter at zero heel and at the
loadcase displacement and centre of
gravity; if the analysis is carried out free-to-
trim, the waterline of the trimmed vessel is
used.
Shall be greater than / Stability uses the numerical STIX rating
Shall not be less than value rather than the STIX design category.

Stability calculates the various factors and STIX rating according to ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2002(E). Note that a
downflooding angle is required to calculate the STIX index. Hence, if no downflooding points are defined, or
defined downflooding points do not immerse within the selected heel angle range, the angle of
downflooding is taken to be the largest heel angle tested. This affects the calculation of the Wind Moment
and Downflooding factors.

Other criteria - STIX ISO12217-2:2021

The stability index criterion or STIX criterion as described in ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2021(E) is used to assess the
stability of sailing craft. The required input parameters are described below. Please refer to ISO/FDIS 12217-
2:2002(E) for exact definitions of parameters and how they should be calculated.

Page 417
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Option Description Units

Page 418
Appendix C: Criteria Help

AS, sail area ISO Sail area as defined in ISO 8666. Note length2
8666 that no additional windage areas are
calculated by Stability for this criterion.
height of centroid of Height of sail area centre of effort from length
AS model’s vertical datum (not necessarily
the waterline, this is not the same as the
STIX variable hCE which is measured
from the waterline, positive up).
LH, length Hull length as defined by ISO 8666. length
This may be either specified or
calculated by Stability. Stability
calculates this parameter as the overall
length of the vessel (all hull surfaces) in
the upright, zero trim condition.
BH, beam of hull Hull beam as defined by ISO 8666. length
This may be either specified or
calculated by Stability. Stability
calculates this parameter as the overall
beam of the vessel (all hull surfaces) in
the upright, zero trim condition.
LWL, length Hull waterline length in the current load length
waterline condition as defined by ISO 8666. This
may be either specified or calculated by
Stability. Stability calculates this
parameter as the waterline length of the
vessel (all hull surfaces) at zero heel
and at the loadcase displacement and
centre of gravity; if the analysis is
carried out free to trim, the waterline of
the trimmed vessel is used.
BWL, beam waterline Hull waterline beam in the current load length
condition as defined by ISO 8666. This
may be either specified or calculated by
Stability. Stability calculates this
parameter as the waterline beam of the
vessel (all hull surfaces) at zero heel
and at the loadcase displacement and
centre of gravity; if the analysis is
carried out free to trim, the waterline of
the trimmed vessel is used.
FM, beam waterline Freeboard to deck edge amidships in length
the current load condition as defined by
ISO 8666, FM . This may be either
specified or calculated by Stability.
Stability calculates this parameter using
the defined deck edge (implicitly
derived from the Margin line definition
points) at zero heel and at the loadcase

Page 419
Appendix C: Criteria Help

displacement and centre of gravity; if

the analysis is carried out free to trim,
the waterline of the trimmed vessel is
used. This value is only used for the
automatic calculation of the critical
opening area for downflooding.
height of immersed Height of centre of the lateral projected length
profile area centroid immersed area of the hull from model’s
vertical datum (not necessarily the
waterline, this is not the same as the
STIX variable hLP ); may be specified
or calculated by Stability. Stability
calculates this parameter at zero heel
and at the loadcase displacement and
centre of gravity; if the analysis is
carried out free to trim, the waterline of
the trimmed vessel is used.
critical opening area This is the critical opening area which Length2
for downflooding must be immersed for the downflooding (cm2 or
angle DA . The areas of openings can inch2)
be defined in the Key Points table.
These areas are specified in cm2 (metric
length units) or inch2 (imperial length
units). The value can be specified
directly or Stability will calculate
according to the formula
1.2  LH  BH  FM
Key point type This specifies the type of Key point
defining non-quick- which should be used to find the
draining cockpits, downflooding angle of non-quick-
phiDC draining cockpits DC . (see below)
Key point type This specifies the type of Key point
defining main access which should be used to find the
hatches, phiDH downflooding angle of main access
hatches DH . (see below)
Key point type This specifies the type of Key point
defining submerged which is being used to define
critial area, phiDA downflooding points with an opening
area which should be accumulated to
determine the downflooding angle DA .
This is so that the three different
downflooding angles can be computed.
Downflooding points
Potential downflooding points
Immersion points
EmbarkationPoints

Page 420
Appendix C: Criteria Help

increase FDF by FDF may be increased if certain criteria %

(floats according to are met (vessel floats according to §7.6
7.6 and also, when and also, when flooded, has positive
flooded, has positive GZ at 90 deg heel). The user is required
GZ at 90 deg heel) to determine if these criteria are met
and the increase should be applied.
Stability does verify that GZ at 90deg
heel is positive. Use the check-box to
enable this increase to FDF; the value
of the factor can also be adjusted.
Shall be greater than / Stability uses the numerical STIX
Shall not be less than rating value rather than the STIX
design category.

Stability calculates the various factors and STIX rating according to ISO/FDIS 12217-2:2021(E). Note that a
downflooding angle is required to calculate the STIX index. Hence, if no downflooding points are defined, or
defined downflooding points do not immerse within the selected heel angle range, the angle of
downflooding is taken to be the largest heel angle tested. This affects the calculation of the Wind Moment
and Downflooding factors.

Specific stand alone heeling arm criteria

These criteria provide some specific stand alone heeling arm criteria. They are included for compatibility with
criteria sets defined in earlier versions of Stability, but it is highly recommended to use the equivalent xRef
criteria with the desired heeling arms.

Stand alone heeling arm criteria

Angle of equilibrium - passenger crowding heeling arm

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm due to passenger crowding applied. The heeling arm
is calculated from the number, weight and location of the passengers, see §Passenger crowding.

Angle of equilibrium - high-speed turn heeling arm

Calculates the angle of equilibrium with the heeling arm due to high speed turning applied. The heeling arm
is calculated from the turn radius, vessel speed and height of the vessel’s centre of gravity.

Ratio of areas type 1 - general cos+sin heeling arm

This is a very similar criterion to § Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm; the only difference being the
shape of the heel arm. In this criterion the heel arm has both a sine and a cosine component. This is used to
simulate the effects of lifting weights and is used by several Navies.
The modified form of the heeling arm is given below, for further information also see §General cos+sin
heeling arm

(
H ( ) = k A cos n ( ) + B sin m ( ) )

 (GZ ( ) − heel arm( ) )d
2

Area 1 =  1 ;

Page 421
Appendix C: Criteria Help

4
 GZ ( )d
Area 2 =  3 ;

Area 1
Ratio = Area 2

Stand alone heeling arm combined criteria

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - passenger crowding

This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general
heeling arm, however the heel arm is the specific passenger crowding form.

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - high-speed turn

This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general
heeling arm, however the heel arm is the specific high-speed turning form.

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general cos+sin heeling arm

The lifting criterion is the same as the Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general heeling arm except
that the heel arm has both a cos and sin component.

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) – cos+sin heeling arm

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - lifting weight

This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general
cos+sin heeling arm, however the heel arm is the specific lifting of a heavy weight form.

Page 422
Appendix C: Criteria Help

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - towing

This criterion is essentially the same as its generic form: Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - general
cos+sin heeling arm, however the heel arm is the specific towing form.

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - wind heeling arm

This criterion is exactly the same as §Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - general wind heeling arm
except that the magnitude of the heeling arm is automatically calculated from the wind pressure (or velocity),
projected area and area lever information.

Area definition

Page 423
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Note

The Large Angle Stability analysis heel angle range should include a sufficient negative range to
allow for the rollback angle. For more information see: §Heel.

Appendix D: Specific Criteria

In Stability, we have tried to distil the essence of the various stability criteria and present them in their
simplest form whilst preserving the physical significance of the stability characteristic under assessment. In
some cases, what is essentially the same criterion, is presented in quite different ways by different regulatory
bodies. In Stability we have always sought to keep the physical significance transparent in the formulation –
for this reason, constants such as acceleration due to gravity are explicitly shown in the formulations and
consistent units are used – thus removing the need for obscure constants with strange units.

In this section we look at some common criteria and demonstrate how they may be evaluated in Stability.

Dynamic stability criteria

In some cases the criteria are expressed in terms of the so-called dynamic stability curve. This is the integral
of the GZ curve where the ordinate is the area under the GZ curve integrated from zero to the heel angle in
question. Remembering this relationship and that the slope of the dynamic stability curve is the value of GZ it
is often possible to reformulate the same criterion in terms of one based on the GZ curve.

Capsizing moment

Often a capsizing moment is determined from the dynamic stability curve by drawing a line through the
origin which is tangent to the GZ area curve. This is the dynamic heeling arm curve (blue) and is the integral
of a constant value heeling arm. The capsizing moment is taken as the magnitude of GZ at this tangent heel
angle  2 . The problem is to reformulate this so that this capsizing moment can be found from the GZ curve:

Dynamic stability curve and Dynamic heeling arm.

From the figure above we can see that the slopes of both curves are the same at 1 and  2 ; from this we
can deduce that the value of GZ and Heeling arm are the same at these angles. Furthermore, at  2 , the
values are the same indicating that the areas under each curve from 0 to  2 are the same. Finally since the

Page 424
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

dynamic heeling arm is a straight line with constant slope we know that the corresponding heeling arm is a
constant value. From these facts we can derive the following GZ and heeling arm curves:

Stability curve, Area 1 corresponds to the area under the heeling arm curve up to the second intercept

Stability curve, Area 2 corresponds to the area under the GZ curve up to the second intercept
Knowing that Area1 = Area2 we can deduce that Area 3 = Area 4 in the figure below:

Page 425
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

The magnitude of the heeling arm must be chosen so that Area 3 = Area 4
So the capsizing moment can also be determined by finding the heeling moment that gives Area3 = Area4.
This can easily be done in Stability using the GZ area derived heeling arm type 2 criterion.

Heeling arms for specific criteria - Note on unit conversion

There are quite a few different ways in which different authorities define their heeling arms. The approach
that has been taken in Stability is to reflect the physics of what is generating the heeling moment.

Be careful as some criteria specify heeling arms and some specify heeling moments or “moments” in
[Link]. All Stability criteria use a heeling arm since this is what is ultimately plotted on the GZ curve. To
obtain the heeling arm from the heeling moment, it is necessary to divide by vessel weight ( g ); and in the
case of “moments” in [Link], it is necessary to divide by vessel mass.

Stability uses an internal conversion of knots to m/s based on the International Nautical mile which is defined
as exactly 1852m (International Hydrographic Conference, Monaco, 1929). Thus 1 knot = 1852/3600 =
0.5144444... m/s.
(Note that the UK nautical mile is 6080ft = 1853.184m; giving a conversion multiplier for knots to m/s of
0.51477333...)

In the following section, the conversions for some common criteria have been explained.

IMO Code on Intact Stability A.749(18) amended to MSC.75(69)

[Link] - Heeling due to turning

Heeling moment defined by:

V02  d
M R = 0.2  tonne  KG −  [kNm]
L  2
Where:
MR = heeling moment in kNm
V0 = service speed in m/s

Page 426
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

L = length of ship at waterline in m

tonne = displacement in tonne
d = mean draft m
KG = height of centre of gravity above keel in m

Hence the heeling arm, H R = 1000M R / g [m], is given by:

V02   d  1000 V2  d
H R = 0.2  KG −  = 0.2 0  KG −  [m]
L 1000  2  g Lg  2
Where:
g = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2
 = displacement in kg

The heeling arm in Stability is defined as:

V2
HR = a h
Rg [m],
Where:
V = vessel speed in m/s
R = radius of turn in m
h = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m
a = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Stability heeling arm, we obtain:
V2 V02  d
a h = 0.2  KG − 
Rg Lg  2

Equating similar terms:

 d
h =  KG − 
 2
V = V0
and assuming that the ratio of the turn radius to the vessel length is 5.1:1, we obtain:

R
= 510%
L
and
a = 0.2  510% = 1.02
L
Note that it suffices that a = 1.02 and any ratio of turn radius to vessel length and constant a that
R
satisfies this relationship may be chosen, the choice of a ratio of 5.1:1 merely gives a constant approaching
the theoretically correct value of unity.

3.2 - Severe wind and rolling criterion (weather criterion)

Heeling arm defined by:

Page 427
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

PAZ
lw1 =
1000 g 9.81 tonne [m]

Where:
l w1 = heeling arm in m
P = wind pressure in Pa
A = projected lateral windage in m2
Z = vertical separation of centroids of A and underwater lateral area in m
tonne = displacement in tonne
g 9.81 = IMO assumed value of gravitational acceleration - 9.81m/s2

The heeling arm in Stability is defined as:

PA(h − H )
Hw = a
g [m]
Where:
g = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2
 = displacement in kg
h = height of centroid of A in m
H = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m
a = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Stability heeling arm, we obtain:

PA(h − H ) PAZ
a =
g 1000 g 9.81 tonne

Equating similar terms:

h−H = Z
and

g 9.80665
a= = = 0.99966
g 9.81 9.81

IMO HSC Code MSC.36(63)

Annex 6 1.1.4 - Heeling moment due to wind pressure

Heeling moment defined by:
M v = 0.001PAZ [kNm]
Where:
Mv = heeling moment in kNm
P = wind pressure in Pa
A = projected lateral windage in m2
Z = vertical separation of centroids of A and underwater lateral area in m

Page 428
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Hence the heeling arm,

H v = 1000M v / g [m], is given by:
1000 PAZ
H R = 0.001PAZ =
g g [m]
Where:
g = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2
 = displacement in kg

The heeling arm in Stability is defined as:

PA(h − H )
Hw = a
g [m]
Where:
g = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2
 = displacement in kg
h = height of centroid of A in m
H = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m
a = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Stability heeling arm, we obtain:

PA(h − H ) PAZ
a =
g g

Equating similar terms:

h−H = Z
and
a = 1.0

Annex 7 1.3 - Heeling due to wind

Heeling arm defined by:

PAZ
HL1 =
9800 tonne [m]

Where:
HL1 = heeling arm in m
P = wind pressure in Pa
A = projected lateral windage in m2
Z = vertical separation of centroid of A and half the lightest service draft in m
tonne = displacement in tonne

The heeling arm in Stability is defined as:

PA(h − H )
Hw = a
g [m]
Where:
g = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2
 = displacement in kg

Page 429
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

h = height of centroid of A in m
H = height of half the lightest service draft in m
a = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

Thus equating the required IMO heeling arm to the Stability heeling arm, we obtain:

Equating similar terms:

h−H = Z
and
g 9.80665
a= = = 1.00068
9800 tonne 9.8

Where the effect of wind plus gust is required, the factor a should be multiplied by the gust factor – typically
1.5. Hence, in the case of wind plus gust, a becomes 1.50102

USL code (Australia)

USL C.1.1.3 - Wind heeling moment

USL wind heeling “moment” is specified as:

M = 0.000102 PA(h − H ) [tonne.m]

Where:
h = height of centroid of A in m
H = height of centroid of underwater lateral area in m
P = wind pressure in Pa
A = projected lateral windage in m2

Thus the heeling arm is given by:

1000
H = 0.000102 PA(h − H )
 [m]

The heeling arm in Stability is defined as:

PA(h − H )
H =a
g [m]
Where:
g = standard acceleration due to gravity = 9.80665 m/s2
 = displacement in kg
a = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

Thus equating:

PA(h − H ) 1000
H =a = 0.000102 PA(h − H )
g 

Page 430
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

simplifying and rearranging:

a = 0.000102  1000.0  g = 0.102  9.80665 = 1.0002783

USL C.1.1.4 - Heeling moment due to turning

USL wind heeling “moment” is specified as:
2
v kts  tonnesh
M = 0.0053
L [tonne.m]
Where:
v kts = vessel speed in knots
tonne = displacement in tonne
h = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m
L = waterline length of vessel in m

Thus the heeling arm is given by:

2
vkts  tonnesh 1
H = 0.0053  1000.0
L  [m]
Where:
 = displacement in kg

The heeling arm in Stability is defined as:

V2
H =a h
Rg [m],
Where:
V = vessel speed in m/s
R = radius of turn in m
h = height of centre of gravity above centre of lateral resistance in m
a = non-dimensional constant (theoretically unity)

Thus equating the required USL heeling arm to the Stability heeling arm, we obtain:

V2 2
v kts  tonnesh 1
a h = 0.0053  1000.0
Rg L 

simplifying and rearranging:

2
R vkts  tonnes R 1 1
a = 5.3g = 5.3g
LV 2
 2
L 0.5144 1000.0
finally, with g = 9.80665 [ms-2]:
R
a = 0.196424
L
R
= 509%
Assuming that the ratio of the turn radius to the vessel length, L gives a value for a:

Page 431
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

a = 0.196424  509% = 0.999798

R
a = 0.196424
Note that it suffices that L , and any ratio of turn radius to vessel length and constant a that
satisfies this relationship may be chosen, the choice of a ratio of 509% merely gives a constant approaching
the theoretically correct value of unity.

ISO 12217-1:2002(E)

This section explains how the ISO 12217-1 code calculates the heeling arm and how you can replicate this
calculation with a Stability criterion.

“6.3.2 Rolling in beam waves and wind

The curve of righting moments of the boat shall be established up to the downflooding angle or the angle of
vanishing stability or 50°, whichever is the least, using annex D. The heeling moment due to wind, MW,
expressed in newton metres, is assumed to be constant at all angles of heel and shall be calculated as follows:
MW = 0.3 ALV * (ALV / LWL + TM)* vW2
Where
LWL is the waterline length;
TM is the draft at the mid-point of the waterline length, expressed in metres;
vW = 28 m/s for design category A, and 21 m/s for design category B;
ALV is the windage area as defined in 3.3.7, but shall not be taken as less than 0.55*L H * BH.”

Basically they are using moment = force * lever, where

the force is calculated as 0.3 * ALV * vW2, and
the lever is (ALV / LWL + TM)
This lever is a bit confusing so let’s concentrate on that.

Stability’ wind heeling arm calculation uses H for the vertical height of the hydrodynamic centre (underwater
area) and h as the vertical height of the aerodynamic centre (windage area) – all measured consistently from
the zero point, positive up.

Thus the lever is (h-H) in Stability should be the same as the (ALV / LWL + TM) lever from ISO. You can calculate
(ALV / LWL + TM) manually and then make sure the (h-H) value in Stability is the same by specifying:
Velocity based heeling arm;
H = 0.0;
h = (ALV / LWL + TM);
a = 0.3 kg/m3

Note: the centre of the windage area -h- applies to the additional windage area or the total windage area
depending on which option you have selected. Make sure you check your total windage lever in the
intermediate results in the criteria results tab of the Results window.

For example, supposing we have a vessel with the following characteristics:

Displacement 105.7 tonne = 1037 kN
LH 24 m
BH 5 m
LWL 21.1 m
TM 1.9 m
vW 28 m/s for design category A
ALV 72 m2 ( this is greater than 0.55 LH BH = 66 m2)
Thus according to the ISO 12217 formula, the heeling moment is given as:
MW = 0.3 * 72 * (72 / 21.1 + 1.9) * 28 2 = 89961 Nm
Page 432
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Thus the heeling arm = MW / Displacement = 89961 / 1037000 = 0.0868 m

The input for Stability requires:

Total area A = 72 m2;
area centroid height: h = ALV / LWL + TM = 72 / 21.1 + 1.9 = 5.312 m;
a = 0.3 kg/m3
giving the expected result for heeling arm amplitude:

Intermediate results for the wind heeling arm.

ISO 12217: Small craft – stability and buoyancy assessment and categorisation.

This section gives some details on implementing the ISO 12217 stability criteria in Stability. See also the note
on converting units for the definition of the heeling arms in ISO 12217-1:2002(E).

Part 1: Non-sailing boats of hull length greater than or equal to 6m

In many cases the user must determine the required pass value for the criteria, which depends on the
category and length of vessel being tested. In most cases the default required value would exceed the worst
case.

6.1.2: Downflooding height

Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figures 2 and 3 (Section 6.1.2) and
entered into the required value field; the default value is set at 1.42m which is slightly greater than the height
required for a category A vessel of 24m in length.

6.2: Offset-load test

There are several ways of evaluating this criterion:
1. Define a heeling arm and calculate the intersection of the heeling arm with the GZ curve
to determine the angle of equilibrium.
2. Specify a loadcase with the offset load specified and carry out an equilibrium analysis.
Verify that the angle of equilibrium does not exceed the maximum permissible value.
An additional requirement in this section is that a specified freeboard must be exceeded.

6.3: Resistance to wind and waves

Determine the windage area and lever and enter them in the appropriate fields in the criterion. Also
determine the required wind speed and roll-back angle (depending on the design category) and enter these
values.

Page 433
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

In Stability, there is no option for placing the height, H, of the centre of lateral resistance at the bottom of the
vessel, so this must be specified manually (it is measured from the model zero point, positive upwards).

6.3.3: Resistance to waves

This criterion comprises two parts, one to check that the righting moment is sufficient and a second to
determine whether the righting lever is sufficient.

6.4: Heel due to wind action

Determine the parameters required for calculation of the wind heeling moment as per 6.3, but note the
different wind speeds to be used. Determine the limiting heel angle from Table 4 (Sections 6.2)

Part 2: Sailing boats of hull length greater than or equal to 6m

6.2.2: Downflooding height

Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figure 2 (Section 6.2.2) and entered
into the required value field, the default value is set at 1.42m which is slightly greater than the height
required for a category A vessel of 24m in length.

6.2.3: Downflooding angle

Must be greater than a certain value as determined according to the design category, see Tables 3 (Sections
6.2.3). The default value is set to 40

6.3: Angle of vanishing stability

Determine the required angle of vanishing stability which depends on design category and vessel
displacement. The default value is 130.

6.4: Stability index (STIX)

Determine the required STIX value depending on the design category, see Table 5 (Section 6.4.9). Also specify
the sail area and vertical position of the sail area centroid and enter these values in the appropriate fields in
the criterion. If desired you can specify the other values or let Stability calculate them for you.

6.5: Knockdown-recovery test

The test can be approximated by examining the angle of vanishing stability in the flooded condition. If the
flooded vessel has positive GZ at the knockdown angle, it should self right.

6.6.6: Wind stiffness test

Determine the wind heeling moment as defined in 6.6.6 for the wind speed of interest (Table 6, Section 6.6.7).
Convert this to a heeling lever. Calculate the GZ curve with the crew seated to windward, this criterion will
then look at the angle of equilibrium of the vessel under the applied wind heeling arm.

Part 3: Boats of hull length less than 6m

These criteria are evaluated after an equilibrium analysis under the specified loading condition.

Non-Sailing Boats:
6.2.2: Downflooding-height tests
Determine the required downflooding height and specify the appropriate loading condition. The criterion is
evaluated after an equilibrium analysis.

6.3: Offset-load test

This criterion is most effectively evaluated by performing an equilibrium analysis with the required offset
loading condition
Page 434
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Sailing Boats:
7.2: Downflooding height
Minimum freeboard to downflooding points must be determined from Figure 2 (Section 6.2.2) and entered
into the required value field, the default value is set at 1.42m which is slightly greater than the height
required for a category A vessel of 24m in length.

7.5: Knockdown-recovery test

The test can be approximated by examining the angle of vanishing stability in the flooded condition. If the
flooded vessel has positive GZ at the knockdown angle, it should self right.

7.6.6: Wind stiffness test

Determine the wind heeling moment as defined in 6.6.6 for the wind speed of interest (Table 6, Section 6.6.7).
Convert this to a heeling lever. Calculate the GZ curve with the crew seated to windward, this criterion will
then look at the angle of equilibrium of the vessel under the applied wind heeling arm.

ES TRIN 19.03 – Stability

Article 19.03.1 – Intact

Page 435
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.3.a – Maximum righting lever, angle and value

Article 19.03.3.a.i – Angle at which maximum righting lever occurs

3.a.i) The maximum righting lever shall occur at a heel angle of

Page 436
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article [Link] – Value of maximum righting lever

[Link]) GZ shall not be less than 0.2m in the range to

(re-wording but provides the same check when also checking that in 3.a.i) above.

Page 437
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.3.b – Downflooding angle

Page 438
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Page 439
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.3.c – GZ area

Variation of required area with upper integration limit

Page 440
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.3.d – Initial metacentric height

Calculate GM at zero heel or equilibrium angle (list due to asymmetry?)

Article 19.03.3.e – Angle of equilibrium with heeling arms

Article 19.03.3.f – Residual freeboard

Calculate freeboard to Margin line (or Deck edge) at equilibrium angle with heeling arms. Should heeling
arms be taken individually or combined?

Page 441
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.3.f – Residual freeboard

Downflooding points (other types of key points may be selected)

Should heeling arms be applied individually of all at the same time?

Article 19.03.4 – Passenger crowding heeling moment

ES TRIN 2017 wording

Page 442
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Maxsurf Stability implementation

Manual calculation required

Manually calculate the sum according to the rule specification:

Compute equivalent number of passengers (assuming fixed mass of 75kg) and distance from centerline and
enter these data in the formula.

Cosine power is zero, so give constant heeling moment with heel angle.

Page 443
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.5 – Wind heeling moment

ES TRIN 2017 wording

Maxsurf Stability implementation

Manual calculation required

Any additional area and centroid which is not modeled in the Maxsurf model.

Page 444
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.6 – Turning heeling moment

ES TRIN 2017 wording

Page 445
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Maxsurf Stability implementation

Manual calculation required

Heeling moment due to centripetal acceleration is given by:

[N.m]
Where: Δ is the vessel mass [kg]; v vessel speed [m/s]; R radius of turn [m]; h vertical separation of CG and
center of lateral resistance [m]

given the TRRIN 2017 equation:

Assuming the D is the volume of displacement and that the density of water is 1000 kg/m 3 then really this
equation is as shown below:

[Nm] (or in other words, the density of 1000kg/m 2 accounts

for the units originally being in kNm)

Comparing terms in the TRIN 2017 equation with that used by Maxsurf:

The turn radius is based on a multiple of the waterline length. Using the value of cdr = 0.45 and CB of 1.0, the
multiplier is 222.2%

The lever is the height of the centre of gravity above the centre of lateral resistance which is assumed to be
at a height of half the draft.

Page 446
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

The vessel mass is simply the displaced volume multiplied by the water density

g acceleration due to gravity [m/s2];

Note that at present there is not the option for automatically incorporating the block coefficient at the
waterline under analysis.
This would have to be accounted for as a manual calculation changing the turn radius as a function of
waterline length.

Article 19.03.7 – Damage

In Maxsurf all damage, intermediate or final damage is done by lost buoyancy method. It will be a very
significant amount of work to be able to provide an option to select which method to use and it will not be
possible to do this for the next release.
The work around would be to manually add floodwater to the damage spaces in the loadcases. (but it would
be much simpler if the rules permitted "lost buoyancy method" for intermediate damage)
This may require redefinition of the compartmentation :
1 - Compartments may be damaged (lost buoyancy), but cannot be filled (added mass) so any damaged
compartments would have to be changed to Tanks so that they can be filled.
2 - Maxsurf will allow Tanks to be defined within Compartments (it automatically removes the volume of the
part of the Tank which lies within the Compartment). However Tanks-in-Tanks and Compartments-in-Tanks is
not possible, which can be overcome but may require a more complicated Tank definition by using Linked
Tanks to define a Tank around another Tank(s).
3 - Only Linked Tanks share a common waterplane so all the damaged areas would need to be defined as a
single Tank by means of joining several Linked Tanks.
4 - A new Tank arrangement would need to be saved for each intermediate damage condition which had
different areas damaged. (The 25%-50%-75% conditions would be specified in different loadcases as
different filling levels. but would use the same tank arrangement.)

Page 447
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

In Maxsurf, intermediate damage stages using the “Lost Buoyancy” method are specified by giving the
maximum percentage of the full compartment volume which may be flooded.
The final stage flooding can be calculated first to determine the final values of lost buoyancy and these used
to compute the 25, 50 and 75% lost buoyancy volumes (as a percentage of total volume) to be specified for
the intermediate stages.

Article 19.03.9.c – Intermediate damage Downflooding

There are two options for 19.03.9.c:

1. Use the following heeling arm criterion with a heeling arm of zero:
(we shall add the option for calculating the equilibrium freeboard without requiring a “zero” heeling arm)

2. Use Equilibrium-based criteria

Page 448
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.9.e – Lesser damage

Although there are no specified requirements for heel or GMt these can be evaluated when looking at
conditions of lesser damage:

Article 19.03.10.a – Intermediate damage: Angle of equilibrium

Article 19.03.10.b – Intermediate damage: Maximum GZ

Article 19.03.10.c – Intermediate damage: Downflooding angle

Page 449
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

This would actually be covered by the above criterion because we are saying that GZ must be greater than
0.02m before the angle of downflooding occurs; which (by definition) means that downflooidng must not
occur before equilibrium.
But we can specify explicitly as the ratio:
Equilibrium angle / Downflooding angle < 100%

Article 19.03.11.a – Final damage: Angle of equilibrium under passenger crowding

Page 450
Appendix D: Specific Criteria

Article 19.03.11.b.i – Final damage: Maximum residual GZ above passenger crowding

heeling arm

Article [Link] – Final damage: Residual GZ area above passenger crowding

heeling arm

Page 451
Appendix E: Reference Tables

Article 19.03.11.c – Final damage: Downflooding

It is not clear if the heeling arm should still be applied when looking at equilibrium? But both may be
satisfied:
by selecting either the “zero”

or “passenger crowding” heeling arms:

Or if no heeling arm is required, we can use this criterion:

Appendix E: Reference Tables

This appendix contains the following reference tables:
• File Extension Reference Table
• Analysis settings reference table

File Extension Reference Table

The following table lists files that are used in Stability. The .hmd file contains all the additional information
that defines the Stability model and you need only save this file when working in Stability. However, if you
wish to transfer loadcases or compartment definitions from one model to another, this can be done by going
to the appropriate window and saving it to a separate file.

File Extension Description

Page 452
Appendix E: Reference Tables

File Extension Description

Modeler Design .msd Contains control point and surface
information. E.g. precision, flexibility,
thickness, outside arrows, trimming, color

When opening a .msd file Stability looks for a

.hmd file with the same name.
Stability Design .hmd Contains hydrostatic sections information
and all Input information that may also be
stored separately in the files below

The .hmd file does not contain:

- Modeler surface information
- Links to or information on the Stability
Criteria Library
- Links to or information on the Results
tables
- Links to or information on the Report

Separate Input files Extension Description

Loadcase .hml Each loadcase can be saved separately
Compartments .htk The compartment definition can be saved
separately
Damage cases .dcs The damage case definition can be saved
separately
All Input window tables .txt All tables in the input window can be saved
as text files. Downflooding/embarkation
points, margin lines, sounding pipes and
modulus

Output files Extension Description

All Result Window tables .txt Result tables can be saved separately

Results tables can not be opened in Stability

Report .rtf The report can be saved separately
Library Extension Description
Stability Criteria Library .hcr The library is not related to the Stability
Design File, i.e. is not model related. The
library is loaded when the program starts,
not when the model is opened. For more
information see the section on criteria.

Page 453
Appendix E: Reference Tables

Analysis settings reference table

The following table can be used as a reference to the various analysis settings for each analyses type.
Analysis Settings
Analyses type Trim Heel Draft Displace- LCG TCG VCG
ment
For GM
Upright stability S Upright R result n/a n/a
etc.
Large Angle S/
R result LC LC LC LC
Stability FTTLC
Equilibrium result result result LC LC LC LC
Specified
S S S S / LC S / LC S / LC S / LC
Condition
S/ S/
KN values S / FTT R result R S1
FTT LC4
S/ S/
Limiting KG S / FTT R result R result2
FTT LC4
Floodable Length FTT Upright result R FTT n/a S3
Tank Calibration S Upright n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Where,
result Cannot be specified – they are a calculated resul
S Specific (fixed, single) value to be set by user
R Varied within Range specified by user
LC Calculates values from loadcase – specifies displacement and COG only
FTTLC Free-to-trim to loadcase CG
FTT Free-to-trim to LCG calculated from a specific initial trim angle or specified
LCG (and VCG)
1
The VCG is used in two ways in the KN analysis.
a) The VCG only has an effect on the results if the analysis is free-to-trim.
b) The GZ curve is calculated for the specified VCG and then the normalised KN curve is calculated as KN =
GZ + VCG*SIN(heel).

2
The VCG is not required for the Limiting KG analysis. When calculating the LCG from a specified trim and
displacement, the current VCG is used.

Page 454
Appendix F: Quality Assurance

3
The VCG is required for the floodable length analysis because of its effect on trim. During the floodable
length analysis, the trim can be substantial and the vertical separation of CG and CB needs to be taken into
account.

4
The TCG may be specified directly of derived from the lost cargo / ballast water in damaged tanks from the
current loadcase.

Appendix F: Quality Assurance

This appendix describes the quality assurance processes used to ensure Stability gives reliable and accurate
results.

Quality Assurance

Many Stability users ask us how we know that Stability produces the correct results. This following explains
how Bentley Systems, Incorporated has verified that Stability gives accurate results and what steps we take to
make sure that each version of the software we ship is as reliable as possible.

Quality Principles

While it is impossible to ensure that any software product is completely free of bugs, we follow a series of
engineering and testing principles and procedures to ensure that Stability will produce results which are
consistent with the level of accuracy and thoroughness a professional engineer applies to design work. To
this end we follow a development and testing path which includes use of structured programming
techniques, verification of the underlying algorithms, testing of the computer implementation of those
algorithms, testing of real world problems in-house and beta testing in the field at Stability user sites.

Structured Programming

The best defence against bugs in software is to use structured programming techniques that have been
proven to improve software reliability. Without going into the technical details of our software development
methodology, we summarize by saying that we utilize structured code, object oriented design, data hiding
and encapsulation and fault tolerant programming practices to enhance our software's reliability. Stability is a
complex software system of over 400,000 lines of code and we believe our history of reliability reflects the
effort we have put into using reliable coding practices.

Verification of Algorithms

When new design or analysis algorithms are introduced into Stability, we first carry out testing on the
algorithms on Reference Designs – these are proven test cases with known analytical solutions, see Reference
Calculations.

Reference Designs

A folder of reference hull shapes is included with Modeler and Stability. These designs are of simple
geometric shapes and can be used to validate calculations performed by Stability. Below is a table of results
derived analytically from these shapes compared with results obtained from Modeler and Stability at
different precisions.

Page 455
Appendix F: Quality Assurance

Reference Calculations

Hydrostatics calculations for various reference designs, comparison of Modeler and Stability with analytical values

sphere 10m diam at 5m

draft
Volume WP Area VCB m LCB m Trans. I m^4 Long. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I Long. I
m^3 m^2
Analytically derived 261.79939 78.53982 -1.875 0 490.873852 490.87385 % error % error % error % error
Stability High Precision 261.764 78.534 -1.875 0 488.6807269 489.14247 -0.01% -0.01% -0.01% -0.02%
Stability Low Precision 260.34279 78.357 -1.874 0 488.564741 488.93873 -0.56% -0.23% -0.47% -0.39%
Modeler Hi Precision 261.532 78.341 -1.875 0 490.57 485.761 -0.10% -0.25% -0.06% -1.04%
Modeler Low Precision 257.105 77.849 -1.871 0 483.191 480.89 -1.79% -0.88% -1.57% -2.03%

10m Cylinder 10m diam. at 5m draft

Volume WP Area VCB m LCB m Trans. I m^4 Long. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I Long. I
m^3 m^2
Analytically derived 392.699 100 -2.122 0 833.333333 833.33333 % error % error % error % error
Stability High Precision 392.673 100 -2.121 0 833.257 833.308 -0.01% 0.00% 0.01% 0.00%
Stability Low Precision 391.991 100 -2.121 0 833.333333 833.33333 -0.18% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%
Modeler Hi Precision 392.522 100 -2.122 0 833.333 833.333 -0.05% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%
Modeler Low Precision 389.874 100 -2.118 0 833.333 833.333 -0.72% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%

Page 456
Appendix F: Quality Assurance

Box 20m long 10m beam at 5m draft

Volume WP Area VCB m LCB m Trans. I m^4 Long. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I Long. I
m^3 m^2
Analytically derived 1000 200 -2.5 0 1666.666666 6666.6667 % error % error % error % error
Stability High Precision 1000 200 -2.5 0 1666.666666 6666.6667 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%
Stability Low Precision 1000 200 -2.5 0 1666.666666 6666.6667 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%
Modeler Hi Precision 1000 200 -2.5 0 1666.667 6666.667 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%
Modeler Low Precision 1000 200 -2.5 0 1666.667 6666.667 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0.00%

Parabolic Wigley type Hull, LWL=15m,B=1.5m,D=0.9375

Volume WP Area VCB m LCB m Trans. I m^4 Long. I m^4 Volume WP Area Trans. I Long. I
m^3 m^2
Analytically derived 9.375 15 -0.352 0 1.92875 168.75 % error % error % error % error
Stability High Precision 9.368 14.998 -0.352 0 1.92527 168.4685 -0.07% -0.01% -0.04% -0.01%
Stability Low Precision 9.351 14.98 -0.352 0 1.92418 168.3773 -0.26% -0.13% -0.24% -0.22%
Modeler Hi Precision 9.372 14.999 -0.351 0 1.927 168.63 -0.03% -0.01% -0.09% -0.07%
Modeler Low Precision 9.302 14.942 -0.351 0 1.91 167.621 -0.78% -0.39% -0.97% -0.67%

Page 457
Appendix C

Testing of Implementation

Once the basic algorithms have been proven correct, testing is then carried out on more complex sample
problems to which a solution has already been established using a proven analysis program. These results
may either come from Naval Architecture and Marine Engineering texts such as well as from other results
carried out by Bentley Systems, Incorporated or other engineers using other software products such as
NAPA, AutoShip etc.

Testing of Upgrades

As each new version of Stability is released we perform a series of tests to ensure it functions correctly. At
each release the results from these tests are compared with the results from the previous release to ensure
conformance with answers which have been established as being correct.

Beta Testing

Immediately prior to the release of each new version of Stability, we conduct a beta test of the software. This
involves sending the software to practicing engineers and having them use it on design work in progress to
determine its reliability for actual design use. These beta testers provide us with feedback on the reliability
and accuracy of the program as well as its useability and suitability for everyday work. Once the beta test
program is completed and all testers are happy with the program, we begin shipping the commercial version.

Version Control

Each new version of Stability displays a version number indicating the version and the date the software was
first shipped. If the version is a development, alpha test or beta test release, the version number may also
include a letter and number suffix indicating the type and number of the release. A development version is
usually only for internal use and is a very early demonstration of a possible new product or feature. It is
highly experimental and not reliable. An alpha release is a first public release of a program for initial testing
and comment, it is not reliable. A beta release is a final test version of the program released for field testing
prior to commercial release. It is mostly reliable but may contain some bugs. A commercial release is a
completed, debugged program reliable and ready for professional use.

For example
1.0d1 The first development release of version 1.0
1.5a2 The second alpha test release of version 1.5
1.6b2 The second beta test release of version 1.6
1.64 A commercial release of version 1.64

But we're not Perfect

We make every effort to ensure that our software will meet our users' needs and perform accurately.
However, as with all complex software systems, it is possible for errors to occur. If you suspect a problem
with Stability, please contact our technical support staff through
[Link] and explain what you believe the problem to be. In the
unlikely event of a problem being found, we will correct it as soon as practicable, and send you a new
corrected version of the program.

Page 458
Appendix F: Quality Assurance

To get accurate results from Stability, it is necessary for you to model the problem correctly and to correctly
interpret the results produced. It is the users' responsibility to correctly model the structure and assume
responsibility for the results.

Page 459
Index

Index
Case
A
Menu ..............................................................................311
About .................................................................................. 324 Cell Border ........................................................................307
Activate GHS Export ..................................................... 308 Cell Shading .....................................................................308
Add Damage case ......................................................... 311 Centre of buoyancy .......................................................277
Add Load............................................................................. 47 Centre of flotation .........................................................277
Add Surface Areas ......................................................... 308 Centre of gravity .............................................................277
Added mass, damage .................................................... 94 Check for Updates .........................................................324
Allowable shears and moments ............................... 116 Closing a Loadcase .......................................................... 47
Analysis Coefficient parameters.................................................327
Menu ............................................................................. 311 Coefficients,
Output........................................................................... 241 calculation of ..............................................................321
Settings ......................................................................... 454 Hydrostatic .................................................................... 42
Toolbar.......................................................................... 294 Color ....................................................................................309
Analysis in waves ........................................................... 141 Compartment Definition ..................................... 59, 280
Analysis type New .................................................................................. 59
Equilibrium .................................................................. 139 Saving ............................................................................253
Floodable Length ...................................................... 154 Compartment types ........................................................ 78
KN Values Analysis ................................................... 143 Compartments ............................................................. 78
Large Angle Stability ............................................... 122 Linked .............................................................................. 78
Limiting KG .................................................................. 147 Linked Tanks ................................................................. 78
Longitudinal Strength ............................................. 157 Non-Buoyant Volumes ............................................. 78
Specified Conditions ............................................... 142 Tanks ................................................................................ 78
Tank Calibrations ...................................................... 159 Compartments Results .................................................284
Upright Hydrostatics ............................................... 120 Compartments,
Animate ............................................................................. 320 add, delete ..................................................................... 59
Arrange Icons .................................................................. 322 Forming........................................................................... 70
Assembly View ................................................................ 277 Conditional Flooding ....................................................113
Associate Project ............................................................ 306 Conditional Flooding, Tanks ......................................115
Automation Reference................................................. 323 CONNECTION Centre ...................................................323
Auto-save............................................................................ 16 Constant displacement, damage ............................... 95
B Convergence Error .........................................................232
Coordinate system........................................................... 39
Background ...................................................................... 319 Copy .......................................................................... 247, 307
Batch Analysis ................................................................. 223 Copying Graphs ..............................................................289
Beam ................................................................................... 329 Copying Tables ...............................................................248
Bentley Cloud Services ................................................ 306 Corrected VCG ................................................................235
Beta Testing ..................................................................... 458 Create cases from Zone Damage ............................311
Block Coefficient ............................................................ 332 Creating a Compartment definition file .................. 59
Bonjean .............................................................................. 121 Creating a new Loadcase File ...................................... 44
Boundary Box .................................................................... 60 Criteria see Stability criteria .......................................313
Bulkheads................................................................ 117, 281 Cross-Flood ........................................ 170, 232, 281, 312
C Cross-Flood connections .............................................. 86
Cross-Flood MSC.362(92) ............................................. 14
Calibration .............................................................. 231, 312 Cross-Flood, active .......................................................... 88
Calibration Increment .................................................... 79 Cross-Flood, connectivity ............................................. 87
Calibration Options ....................................................... 231 Cross-Flood, initial condition ...................................... 88
Cascade ............................................................................. 321 Cross-Flood, location ...................................................... 87
Page 460
Index

Cross-Flood, physical properties ............................... 87 E

Curve of Areas................................................................. 124
Edge Visibility Toolbar .................................................295
Curves of Form ............................................................... 124
Edit Damage case ..........................................................311
Cut ....................................................................................... 307
Edit Loadcase ...................................................................311
D Edit Menu ..........................................................................307
Edit Toolbar ......................................................................293
Damage ......................................................................88, 241
Edit,
Damage analysis .............................................................. 94
Add .................................................................................308
Damage Case
Delete ............................................................................308
saving ............................................................................ 253
Move Items Down ....................................................308
Damage Case, Add .......................................................... 88
Move Items Up ..........................................................308
Damage Case, Delete ..................................................... 90
Sort Items .....................................................................308
Damage Case, Display ................................................... 91
Emergence Angles .........................................................128
Damage Case, Extent of damage .............................. 92
Equilibrium ................................................................... 9, 139
Damage Case, Rename ................................................. 90
Equilibrium Condition .......................................................9
Damage Case, Re-ordering ......................................... 90
Export
Damage Case, Select ...................................................... 90
Bitmap ...........................................................................305
Damage Case, Type ........................................................ 90
DXF, IGES ......................................................................299
Damage Window ........................................................... 279
Fredyn ............................................................................300
Damage, cargo dropout ............................................... 93
GHS .................................................................................300
Damage, empty tanks .................................................... 93
Render mesh ...............................................................305
Damage, partial flooding .............................................. 94
Exporting ...........................................................................253
Data Format ........................................................... 281, 315
Extent of Damage ..........................................................311
export, import .................................................. 119, 318
External Tanks.................................................................... 63
Data layout ....................................................................... 282
Extra Buttons Toolbar ...................................................296
Data Menu ........................................................................ 321
Deactivate GHS Export ................................................ 308 F
Delete Cells ...................................................................... 307
Feedback, Ideas ..............................................................323
Delete Damage case..................................................... 311
Feedback, Licensing ......................................................323
Delete DXF background .............................................. 319
File Extension Table .......................................................452
Density ..................................................................... 236, 313
File Menu ...........................................................................296
Design Grid ............................................................ 320, 321
File Toolbar .......................................................................293
Design Grid Toolbar ..................................................... 294
File,
Design Preparation ......................................................... 17
Close ..............................................................................297
Design,
Exit ..................................................................................306
coherence ...................................................................... 26
New ................................................................................296
Saving ............................................................................ 252
Open ...................................................................... 27, 296
Disassociate Project ...................................................... 306
Save ................................................................................297
Displacement ......................................................... 230, 312
Save As ..........................................................................297
Display
Stability Version 8.0 .................................................255
Background ................................................................. 319
Files, Backup ....................................................................... 16
Display (extended)Toolbar ......................................... 296
Files, Recovery ................................................................... 16
Display Menu .................................................................. 315
Fill Down ............................................................................307
Downflooding Angles .................................................. 128
Floodable Length ............................................................. 12
Downflooding points ......................................... 102, 281
Floodable Length Criteria dialog .............................313
Draft ............................................. 120, 230, 312, 330, 331
Flooded volumes ............................................................284
Draft marks.................................................................. 18, 40
Flooding ............................................................................... 91
Draft Marks ...................................................................... 321
Flooding, conditional......................... 65, 107, 113, 115
DWL..................................................................................... 120
Flooding, conditional, tanks.......................................115
DXF export ........................................................................ 254
Fluid analysis method...................................................233
DXF, Export ....................................................................... 299
Fluid simulation ................................................................ 94
Dynamic Stability ........................................................... 124
Fluid VCG ................................................................... 55, 236
Page 461
Index

Fluids .................................................................................. 312 Initial Conditions .............................................................. 39

Font ..................................................................................... 310 Input ....................................................................................322
Form parameters ........................................................... 325 Input Tables, saving ......................................................253
Frame of Reference ........................................ 18, 39, 321 Input Window ..................................................................280
Free Surface Moment............................................55, 235 Insert New Table ............................................................307
Freeboard ......................................................................... 140 Insert Row .........................................................................307
Full Screen ........................................................................ 311 Installing Stability ............................................................. 15
ISO 12217-1 .....................................................................432
G
K
GHS, Export ...................................................................... 300
GHS, Import ..................................................................... 297 Key points ............................................................... 102, 281
Graph .................................................................................. 322 ‘Flood from’ .................................................................104
Curve of Areas ........................................................... 286 ‘Flow into Tank when immersed’ ........................105
Curves of Form .......................................................... 286 ‘Linked to’.....................................................................104
Data interpolation .................................................... 287 adding ...........................................................................103
double click ................................................................. 288 Condition Outflow ....................................................106
get data ........................................................................ 288 Condition use .............................................................105
GZ ................................................................................... 287 Conditional flooding ................................................107
GZ curve fitting .......................................................... 288 Conditional Flooding ...............................................113
Righting Lever (GZ) .................................................. 286 Data ................................................................................128
Type ............................................................................... 286 deleting .........................................................................103
Graph colors .................................................................... 288 editing ...........................................................................104
Graph Formatting .......................................................... 288 Opening area ..............................................................106
Graph Printing to Scale ............................................... 248 Outflow ............................................................... 108, 109
Graph Window ................................................................ 285 Results ...........................................................................283
Graph, annotations ....................................................... 289 Spilling...........................................................................108
Graph, gridlines .............................................................. 289 Water on Deck freeboard ......................................106
Graph, labels .................................................................... 289 KN Values .................................................................. 10, 144
Graphs ................................................................................ 286
L
Grid, design ...................................................................... 320
Grounding .............................................................. 240, 313 Large Angle Stability ...................................... 8, 122, 124
GZ ............................................................................................. 8 lateral projected area ...................................................357
LCB, LCG.............................................................................334
H
Legal Notice .....................................................................324
Heel ........................................................................... 227, 312 Length.................................................................................328
Help Menu ........................................................................ 323 Libraries..............................................................................267
Hide DXF ........................................................................... 319 License wiki .......................................................................323
Hog and Sag .................................................................... 237 Limiting KG ............................................................... 11, 147
Home View ............................................................. 277, 309 Linked negative compartments .................................. 65
Horizontal lever ................................................................ 48 Loadcase .................................................................... 43, 322
Hull Sections Adding and Deleting loads ..................................... 47
Recalculate .................................................................. 313 auto-ballasting ............................................................. 56
ballasting ........................................................................ 56
I
Distributed loads ......................................................... 50
IGES, Export ...................................................................... 299 Editing loads ................................................................. 47
Immersed depth ......................................................40, 331 Free surface correction ............................................. 55
Immersion ......................................................................... 335 maximum number ...................................................... 47
Immersion Angles.......................................................... 128 Renaming ....................................................................... 46
IMO MSC.362(92) .......................................................... 172 saving.............................................................................253
Import DXF Background ............................................. 299 Update............................................................................. 52
Import Image Background ......................................... 299 Loadcase Color Formatting .......................................... 49
Individual Loadcase ...................................................... 319 Loadcase Formatting ...................................................... 48
Page 462
Index

Blank lines ...................................................................... 49 Outside arrows .................................................................. 25

Grouping tanks ............................................................ 49 overlap.................................................................................. 66
Headings lines ............................................................. 48
P
Totals ............................................................................... 49
Loadcase Sorting ............................................................. 48 Page Setup........................................................................306
Loadcase Template ......................................................... 45 Pan ............................................................................. 277, 309
Loadcase Window ......................................................... 279 Partial flooding.................................................................. 94
Loadcase, cross referencing ........................................ 52 Partial flooding, analysis ............................................... 96
Loadcase, density............................................................. 54 Partial flooding, damage ............................................... 95
Loadcase, Distributed Loads ....................................... 50 Partial flooding, examples ............................................ 99
Loadcase, formatting, column selection ................. 50 Partial flooding, modelling ........................................... 96
Loadcase, max. number .............................................. 311 Partial flooding, results .................................................. 99
Loadcase, Tank loads ..................................................... 52 Partial flooding, results file and report ..................102
Loadgroup ................................................................... 43, 52 Partial flooding, waterline ............................................. 97
Loadgroup, Workshop structure ............................... 56 Paste ....................................................................................307
Loading a Saved Loadcase ........................................... 46 Permeability ............................................ 12, 65, 231, 312
Longitudinal Strength ...........................................12, 157 Perspective view .............................................................278
Lost buoyancy ................................................................... 94 Precision, surface.............................................................. 27
Preferences ............................................................... 16, 308
M
Print .....................................................................................306
Margin Line points .............................................. 107, 281 Print Preview ....................................................................248
Margin Line, Snap to hull ........................................... 314 Printing ...............................................................................248
MARPOL .....................................................................14, 231 Printing to scale ..............................................................248
MARPOL oil outflow ..................................................... 165 Prismatic Coefficient .....................................................333
MARPOL Options....................................... 231, 232, 312 Probabilistic Damage ........................................... 15, 174
MARPOL, Hull parameters ......................................... 167 alternative damage ..................................................196
MARPOL, Saving ............................................................ 170 Analysis .........................................................................217
MARPOL, Small Tanks .................................................. 168 copying damage cases ...........................................200
MARPOL, Tank parameters ........................................ 168 critical points ..............................................................203
Max. Area Section .......................................................... 332 damage .........................................................................174
Maximum deck inclination ......................................... 335 damage case ...............................................................175
Maximum shears and moments .............................. 116 Damage case generation .......................................209
Measurement reference frames ............................... 325 damage cases .............................................................199
Menus................................................................................. 296 damage space ............................................................175
MEPC.117(52) .................................................................. 165 damage spaces ..........................................................195
MEPC.141(54) Reg.12A ................................................ 165 damage specification ..............................................194
Merge Cells ...................................................................... 307 definitions ....................................................................174
Midship Section.............................................................. 332 Inputs .............................................................................177
Modulus points .............................................................. 281 Intermediate stages of flooding .........................205
Modulus Window .......................................................... 116 log file .................................................................. 175, 220
Moment to trim .............................................................. 335 permeabilities .............................................................202
MSC.19(58) ....................................................................... 174 p-factor .........................................................................186
MSC.216(82)..................................................................... 174 Principles ......................................................................175
MSC.421(98)..................................................................... 174 required index ............................................................180
Reuse of results .........................................................222
N
r-factor ..........................................................................189
News ................................................................................... 324 room...............................................................................174
Non-Buoyant Volume Definition ............................... 59 Saving input parameters ........................................177
nuShallo, Import............................................................. 297 s-factor ..........................................................................179
O space ..............................................................................174
v-factor ..........................................................................193
Online Support ............................................................... 323 visualisation .................................................................200

Page 463
Index

zones ................................................................... 185, 319 Show DXF ..........................................................................319

ProjectWise Projects ..................................................... 306 Show Grid ..........................................................................308
Properties.......................................................................... 310 Show single hull section ................................................ 36
Property Sheet ................................................................ 277 Shrink ........................................................................ 277, 309
Simulate fluid movement............................................235
Q
Skin Thickness ................................................................... 25
Quality Assurance .......................................................... 455 Sounding Pipes ....................................................... 78, 281
Quality Principles ........................................................... 455 Calibration Increment................................................ 79
R Edit .................................................................................... 79
Specific Gravity........................................................ 67, 236
Ratio of equilibrium angles – GZ area derived Specified Condition ........................................ 9, 142, 312
heeling arm ................................................................. 414 Specified Conditions, dialog ......................................231
Reference Calculations ................................................ 456 Spilling ................................................................................112
Reference Designs ......................................................... 455 Split Cell .............................................................................307
Relative Density .......................................................67, 236 Spool to Report ..............................................................314
Render ................................................................................ 320 Stability booklet..............................................................235
Render Transparent ...................................................... 320 Stability criteria ..................................................... 117, 313
Report Toolbar................................................................ 295 angle calculators .......................................................339
Report Window .............................................................. 290 Angle of deck edge immersion ...........................368
Keystrokes ................................................................... 292 Angle of downflooding ..........................................367
Report, Tags ..................................................................... 243 Angle of equilibrium ................................................366
Report, Tank plans ........................................................ 245 Angle of equilibrium - general heeling arm ..389,
Reporting .......................................................................... 242 391
Results ................................................................................ 322 Angle of equilibrium - GZ derived wind heeling
Results Window .............................................................. 281 arm.............................................................................414
Results, saving................................................................. 253 Angle of equilibrium - high-speed turn heeling
Resume Analysis .................................................. 226, 314 arm.............................................................................421
Ribbon................................................................................ 324 Angle of equilibrium - multiple heeling arms
Righting Moment .......................................................... 335 .....................................................................................400
Room .................................................................................... 94 Angle of equilibrium - passenger crowding
Room Definition ............................................................. 280 heeling arm ............................................................421
Room Results .................................................................. 284 Angle of equilibrium less than angle at which
Rotate ................................................................................. 309 specified freeboard occurs ...............................390
Row Positioning ............................................................. 307 Angle of equilibrium less than angle at which
S specified GZ occurs .............................................390
Angle of immersion .................................................368
Safe steady heeling angles ........................................ 124 Angle of margin line immersion .........................368
Sag ....................................................................................... 237 Angle of maximum GZ ............................................366
Save ..................................................................................... 253 Angle of maximum GZ above heeling arm.....388
Saving Densities ............................................................. 237 Angle of vanishing stability ...................................368
Section Area Coefficient ............................................. 333 Angle of vanishing stability - general heeling
Section, show single ..................................................... 320 arm.............................................................................392
Sectional Area Curve ...................................................... 36 Areas and levers ........................................................357
Sections, Forming ............................................................ 32 capsizing moment ....................................................424
Select All ............................................................................ 307 check boxes .................................................................265
Select View from Data ....................................... 249, 319 Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) -
Service Request Manager ........................................... 323 general cos+sin heeling arm ...........................422
Set Analysis Type ........................................................... 314 Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) -
Set Home View ............................................................... 309 general heeling arm ............................................407
Set Vessel to DWL ......................................................... 318 Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - high-
Settings, Analysis ........................................................... 226 speed turn...............................................................422
Shift Key .............................................................................. 16

Page 464
Index

Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - lifting Heeling due to grain shift ......................................357
weight ...................................................................... 422 Heeling due to lifting of weights ........................351
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - Heeling due to passenger crowding .................346
passenger crowding ........................................... 422 Heeling due to tow tripping .................................353
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 1) - Heeling due to towing ............................................352
towing ...................................................................... 423 Heeling due to trawling..........................................356
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - Heeling due to turning ...........................................350
general wind heeling arm ................................ 408 Heeling due to wind ................................................346
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2) - wind Heeling due to wind with velocity profile .......349
heeling arm ............................................................ 423 Heeling due to wind, cosine and constant .....348
Combined criteria (ratio of areas type 2a) - Heeling moment with gust ...................................359
general heeling arm ........................................... 410 Heeling moment, cos+sin .....................................359
copying criteria .......................................................... 265 Heeling moment, general ......................................358
criteria library file ...................................................... 267 Heeling moment, user defined ............................360
cross-reference .......................................................... 264 Heeling Moments .....................................................358
customizing text........................................................ 270 IMO Code on Intact Stability A.749(18) ...........426
damage and intact settings .................................. 266 IMO HSC Code MSC.36(63) ..................................428
defining custom criteria ......................................... 264 IMO roll back angle calculator.............................340
equilibrium .................................................................. 360 importing ........................................................... 267, 268
Equilibrium heel angle ............................................ 367 ISO 12217 .....................................................................433
File Format................................................................... 269 Libraries ........................................................................267
Freeboard at equilibrium - general heeling arm list ....................................................................................257
.................................................................................... 394 Maximum Freeboard at equilibrium .................361
General cos+sin heeling arm ............................... 345 Maximum ratio of GZ to heeling arm ...............385
General heeling arm ................................................ 344 Maximum value of heel, pitch or slope at
glossary ........................................................................ 275 equilibrium .............................................................360
GM calculators ........................................................... 340 Minimum Freeboard at equilibrium ..................361
Gust ratio ..................................................................... 345 minimum GM calculator – Constant .................342
GZ area between limits type 1 - general heeling minimum GM calculator – Constant with
arm ............................................................................ 394 freeboard ................................................................343
GZ area between limits type 1 - multiple minimum GM calculator – Grain .........................341
heeling arms .......................................................... 401 minimum GM calculator – Wind pressure ......341
GZ area between limits type 1 - standard ...... 369 Minimum ratio of GZ to heeling arm ................388
GZ area between limits type 2 - general heeling moving criteria ...........................................................264
arm ............................................................................ 395 parent criteria ................................................... 259, 360
GZ area between limits type 2 - multiple pass/fail test ................................................................266
heeling arms .......................................................... 401 Probability of survival ..............................................403
GZ area between limits type 2- HSC monohull Range of positive stability .....................................369
type ........................................................................... 370 Range of positive stability - general heeling arm
GZ area between limits type 3 - HSC multihull .....................................................................................393
type ........................................................................... 372 Range of positive stability, calc. req’d value ..369
GZ area derived heeling arm type 1 ................. 412 Ratio of areas type 1 - general cos+sin heeling
GZ area derived heeling arm type 2 ................. 413 arm.............................................................................421
GZ curve features ..................................................... 272 Ratio of areas type 1 - general heeling arm ..396
GZ definitions ............................................................. 274 Ratio of areas type 1 - multiple heeling arms
GZ derived heeling arm ......................................... 412 .....................................................................................402
GZ, non-healing arm ............................................... 362 Ratio of areas type 2 - general heeling arm ..397
heeling arm definition ............................................ 344 Ratio of areas type 3 - general heeling arm ..398
heeling arm dependency on displacement .... 358 Ratio of equilibrium heel angle ...........................367
heeling arm units ...................................................... 426 Ratio of GMT and heeling arm .............................381
Heeling due to arbitrary forces ........................... 356 Ratio of GZ area between limits ..........................374
Heeling due to bollard-pull .................................. 352 Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 ..................365

Page 465
Index

Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - general T

heeling arm ............................................................ 388
Table ....................................................................................307
Ratio of GZ values at phi1 and phi2 - multiple
Tank
heeling arms .......................................................... 399
adding, deleting .......................................................... 59
Ratio of heel angles
Display Options ........................................................... 69
phi1 and phi2 - general heeling arm ........... 392
Fluids ................................................................................ 67
Ratio of positive to negative GZ area between
Ordering ......................................................................... 68
limits ......................................................................... 377
Permeability ........................................................... 65, 67
report and batch processing ................................ 271
Saving ............................................................................253
results ............................................................................ 269
Sections........................................................................... 70
Results ........................................................................... 283
Surface Thickness ........................................................ 68
saving ............................................................................ 267
Visibility........................................................................... 68
selecting for analysis ............................................... 265
Tank Calibrations.................................................... 13, 160
STIX ISO12217-2 2002 ............................................ 416
Tank Definition ................................................................280
STIX ISO12217-2 2021 ............................................ 417
Tank Type
Subdivision Index s-factor MSC.19(58) ............ 379
external ........................................................................... 63
Survivability Index MSC.216(82) ......................... 403
linked ............................................................................... 61
tree list .......................................................................... 263
simple .............................................................................. 60
User Defined Heeling Arm .................................... 345
tapered ............................................................................ 60
USL code ...................................................................... 430
Tank, Create Tank from Surfaces ............................... 63
Value of GMt at ......................................................... 362
tanks
Value of GMt at equilibrium - general heeling
overlap ............................................................................ 66
arm ............................................................................ 380
Tanks
Value of GMt or GMl at equilibrium ................. 361
Recalculate...................................................................313
Value of GZ above heeling arm at angle ........ 383
Spilling...........................................................................109
Value of GZ at ............................................................ 362
Tanks within Compartments ........................................ 65
Value of GZ at equilibrium - general heeling
Tanks,
arm ............................................................................ 381
boundary surfaces ...................................................... 62
Value of GZ at specified angle or maximum GZ
complex .......................................................................... 62
below specified angle ........................................ 364
Non-Buoyant Areas.................................................... 63
Value of maximum GZ .................................. 362, 382
Recalculate...................................................................294
Value of maximum GZ above heeling arm ..... 382
Tanks, Open-top .............................................................108
Value of RM at specified angle or maximum RM
Tanks, Outflow ................................................................108
below specified angle ........................................ 365
Tanks, Spilling ..................................................................108
xRef ................................................................................ 264
TCG, Limiting KG, KN ....................................................230
Stability criteria, Main
Tile Horizontal .................................................................322
Import ........................................................................... 305
Tile Vertical .......................................................................322
Save As.......................................................................... 305
Tolerances .........................................................................232
Stability criteria, Prob Damage
Toolbars ................................................................... 293, 310
Import ........................................................................... 305
Trapezoidal integration ................................................. 32
Reset to defaults ....................................................... 306
Trim............................................................................ 228, 312
Save As.......................................................................... 306
Fixed ...............................................................................229
Start Analysis ......................................................... 226, 314
Free-to-trim to a specified LCG value ...............229
Start Batch Analysis ...................................................... 314
Free-to-trim using a specified initial trim value
Starting Stability ............................................................... 16
.....................................................................................229
Status Bar .......................................................................... 310
Trim angle .........................................................................334
Stockholm Agreement ................................................. 129
Trimmed surfaces, checking ........................................ 25
Stop Analysis ......................................................... 226, 314
Streaming results to Word ......................................... 242 U
Surface Use ........................................................................ 25 Undo ...................................................................................307
Units ............................................................................ 43, 321

Page 466
Index

Update Loadcase ........................................................... 313

Upright Hydrostatics ............................................... 7, 120
V
Validate Stability model ................................................ 36
VCG for trim balance .................................................... 229
Versions, coordinate system .......................................... 1
View (extended)Toolbar .............................................. 295
View Direction ................................................................. 322
View Menu ....................................................................... 309
View Toolbar.................................................................... 293
View Window .................................................................. 277
Visibility ............................................................................. 319
Visibility Toolbar .................................................. 294, 295
W
Water on Deck ................................................................ 129
Water on Deck volumes .............................................. 285
Waterplane Area Coefficient ..................................... 333
Wave definition .............................................................. 239
Wave height ..................................................................... 240
Waveform ......................................................................... 313
sinusoidal ..................................................................... 239
trochoidal..................................................................... 239
Wavelength ...................................................................... 240
Wetted surface area, integration of ....................... 336
Wind direction .................................................................. 21
Wind effect of heel.......................................................... 23
Windage Groups .............................................................. 19
Windage Surfaces ...................................................18, 321
Window Menu ................................................................ 321
Window Toolbar............................................................. 294
Windows Registry ............................................................ 16
Word, report streaming to ......................................... 242
Word, report templates ............................................... 245
Z
Zero Point ............................................................. 18, 39, 48
Zoom ........................................................................ 277, 309

Page 467